Register, Part 1

1. Introduction to the training

2. Overview of the system architecture

3. Before engineering begins…

4. Creating a multiproject

5. Configuration of stations and networks

6. Creating the plant hierarchy

7. Basics of CFC and blocks

8. Connection to the process

9. Basic automation with the APL

10. Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view

11. Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

12. Implementation of manual and automatic operation

13. Sequential controls with SFC

14. Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems

Attachment A – Documentation and Online Support

This document was created for training purposes. Siemens accepts no responsibil-
ity for the content.

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not per-
mitted without express written authorization. Violation of this rule can lead to
claims for damages.

© Siemens 2023. All rights reserved, in particular the right to register and be
granted patents and/or other commercial property rights.

Published by: Siemens AG, Digital Industries, Customer Services, P.O. Box 31 80,
91050 Erlangen, Germany

SITRAIN courses on the Internet: [Link]/sitrain

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

1 Introduction to the training

Learning objectives
1.1 Learning objectives
• You are familiar with the concept of this training.
• You are familiar with the general sequence of the course.
• You are familiar with the virtual "Johnsson" plant.
• You are familiar with the training equipment used in the course.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Introduction to the training

1 Introduction to the training 1-1 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

1.2 The training concept

Training concept

Training concept How do you acquire the knowledge?

1. You will become familiar with the system concept and • You obtain information from descriptive slides and
the basic plant structure of PCS 7. course documentation on PCS 7.

2. You will learn how to process digital and analog signals • You configure the automation hardware and
in PCS 7. digital/analog signals with PCS 7 and test the function
using the signal box to which the distributed I/O is
connected.

3. You will learn how to work with PCS 7 engineering tools • You configure the fictitious "Johnsson" plant step-by-
based on examples and exercises. step and you commission it virtually.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Introduction to the training

1 Introduction to the training 1-2 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

1.3 Course roadmap

Course
Week 1 roadmap

Configuration of the stations Operator control and monitoring

Configuration of the AS and the distributed AS-OS connection, provision of an OS
I/O, connected via PROFIBUS and
PROFINET Implementation of manual and
automatic operation
Connection to the process
Realization of the operating mode switchover
Basic automation of the signal box of the
between manual and automatic mode, switch
training device, drivers, charts and testing
and pushbutton operation
of the signals, creation of the plant
hierarchy

Day 1 2 3 4 5

Training concept Basic automation with the Sequence control with

Training device, model plant APL step sequencers
Provision of basic functions for a Automation of sequences with
System design and components unit, CFCs for material tanks, SFC, sequencers, steps,
System architecture, AS, OS, field level, reactor R310 and buffer tank transitions, interconnection with
networking, system requirements B410, working with the process basic automation, visualization
object view of sequence control
Setting up a multiproject
Creating the stations, master data
library
Configuration of the stations
Configuration of the ES/OS station

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Introduction to the training

Week 2
Course roadmap

Archiving system
Alarm and process value archiving,
WinCC Controls

Group displays and Bulk data processing

status displays Creating and synchronizing control
Configuration of group displays module types and control modules
and status displays

Day 6 7 8 9 10

Adapting the OS Interlock functions and Final steps for configuration

User administration, time synchronization, operating modes Communication between
settings in the OS project editor, Interlocks, local operation, automation systems, configuration
dynamization of graphic objects, message evaluation of the signal status in run (CiR), forcing on the ES level,
system, alarm management device simulation on the OS level
Bulk data processing
Basics

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Introduction to the training

1 Introduction to the training 1-3 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

1.4 Overview of the accompanying documentation

Accompanying these course materials, you have fast access to a selection of documents from
the PCS 7 system documentation. All references to these documents use a number in square
brackets.

Example:
References
See [103] PCS 7 V9.1 Engineering System, section 9.1 for an overview of the configuration
steps.
Overview of the accompanying documentation
Manual

The following figure shows you how to access the accompanying documentation collection:

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Introduction to the training

1 Introduction to the training 1-4 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

1.5 Virtual "Johnsson" plant

The virtual Johnsson system is the focus of the PCS 7 configuration task of this training. You
will automate and test processes such as dosing, mixing and temperature control with SIMATIC
PCS 7.

You will create the automation program modularly so that an extension is possible at a later
time.

1.5.1 General structure

General structure of the virtual Johnsson plant

Control room

Material tanks

Dosing

Reactors

Buffer tanks

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Introduction to the training

• Control room: ES & OS
• Material tanks: M110, M120, M130
• Dosing: D210, D220, D230, D240
• Reactors: R310, R320, R330, R340
• Buffer tanks: B410, B420

1 Introduction to the training 1-5 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

1.5.2 Plant flow diagram

The designations of the process tags and signals, as well as limits and switchover times, can be
taken from the P&ID flow chart.

1 Introduction to the training 1-6 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

1.5.3 Functional process description

The plant to be configured consists of 3 material tanks, which are filled with liquids. The liquids
are fed via one valve and one feed pump each to four possible dosing tanks, which are used for
quantity control. Three inlet valves, one for each liquid, are assigned to each dosing tank. After
dosing, the liquids pass through one transfer valve each into one of the four reactors.
The liquids are mixed and temperature-controlled in the reactors. The reaction products are
transferred to one of the two buffer tanks via a drain valve and a feed pump. The two buffer
tanks are used to temporarily store the products before they are transferred to the shipping
area.

Material tanks M110, M120 and M130

The liquids are taken from three material tanks. Two of these have a capacity of 6000 kg and
the third has a capacity of 4000 kg. The liquids are fed to the dosing tanks via one valve and
one feed pump per tank.
Filling and refilling the material tanks are not part of this project. This is done with valves whose
status is only displayed in the automation.

Dosing D210, D220, D230 and D240

Dosing tanks are used to control the quantity of the liquids that are to be mixed and
temperature-controlled. Only one liquid can be dosed at a time. The capacity of each dosing
tank is 400 kg.
Three inlet valves, one for each liquid, are assigned to each dosing tank. The drain valve is also
the inlet valve for the associated reactor.

Reactors R310, R320, R330, R340

Four reactors are available for temperature control and mixing of the liquids. R310 and R320
each have a capacity of 700 kg, R330 and R340 each have a capacity of 1100 kg. The inlet
valve also serves as the drain valve of the associated dosing tank.
Each reactor has a mixer drive with one direction of rotation and one mixing speed.
The temperature is controlled by supplying steam into a heating coil in the reactor. A control
valve controls the flow of steam. There is no cooling [Link] reaction products are
transferred to one of the two buffer tanks via a drain valve and a feed pump.

Buffer tanks B410 and B420

The two buffer tanks with 12000 kg and 18000 kg capacity, respectively, are used to temporarily
store the products before they are transferred to the shipping area. Each of the two buffer tanks
has an inlet valve.
The emptying of the two buffer tanks is not part of this project. This is done with valves whose
status is only displayed in the automation.

1 Introduction to the training 1-7 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

1.6 Schematic
Schematic structure
structure of of antraining
an example example training environment
environment

Engineering Station (ES)

/Operator Station (OS)

SCALANCE XC208

Terminal bus (Ethernet)

192.168.1.x
Signal box

Plant bus (Ethernet) SCALANCE XC208

192.168.2.x

AS x
Controller
CPU 410-5H

Fieldbus PN (PROFINET IO)

ET 200 SP HA
192.168.3.x IM 155-6 PN (PROFINET)

IM 152-1 ET 200iSP
Fieldbus PB (PROFIBUS DP) (PROFIBUS)

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Introduction to the training

1 Introduction to the training 1-8 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

1.7 Appendix
1.7.1 Digital inputs (DI)

Signal name Address Data type Description

YS111_FBO I100.0 BOOL M110 Material tank inlet valve feedback opened
NS113_FBR I100.1 BOOL M110 Material tank outlet pump feedback on
YS112_FBC I100.2 BOOL M110 Material tank outlet valve feedback closed
YS112_FBO I100.3 BOOL M110 Material tank outlet valve feedback opened
YS121_FBO I100.4 BOOL M120 Material tank inlet valve feedback opened
NS123_FBR I100.5 BOOL M120 Material tank outlet pump feedback on
YS122_FBC I100.6 BOOL M120 Material tank outlet valve feedback closed
YS122_FBO I100.7 BOOL M120 Material tank outlet valve feedback opened
YS131_FBO I101.0 BOOL M130 Material tank inlet valve feedback opened
NS133_FBR I101.1 BOOL M130 Material tank outlet pump feedback on
YS132_FBC I101.2 BOOL M130 Material tank outlet valve feedback closed
YS132_FBO I101.3 BOOL M130 Material tank outlet valve feedback opened
YS211_FBC I102.0 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 1 feedback closed
YS211_FBO I102.1 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 1 feedback opened
YS212_FBC I102.2 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 2 feedback closed
YS212_FBO I102.3 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 2 feedback opened
YS213_FBC I102.4 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 3 feedback closed
YS213_FBO I102.5 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 3 feedback opened
YS221_FBC I103.0 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 1 feedback closed
YS221_FBO I103.1 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 1 feedback opened
YS222_FBC I103.2 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 2 feedback closed
YS222_FBO I103.3 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 2 feedback opened
YS223_FBC I103.4 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 3 feedback closed
YS223_FBO I103.5 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 3 feedback opened
YS231_FBC I104.0 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 1 feedback closed
YS231_FBO I104.1 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 1 feedback opened
YS232_FBC I104.2 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 2 feedback closed
YS232_FBO I104.3 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 2 feedback opened
YS233_FBC I104.4 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 3 feedback closed
YS233_FBO I104.5 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 3 feedback opened
YS241_FBC I105.0 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 1 feedback closed
YS241_FBO I105.1 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 1 feedback opened
YS242_FBC I105.2 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 2 feedback closed
YS242_FBO I105.3 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 2 feedback opened
YS243_FBC I105.4 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 3 feedback closed
YS243_FBO I105.5 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 3 feedback opened
YS311_FBC I106.0 BOOL R310 Reactor inlet valve feedback closed
YS311_FBO I106.1 BOOL R310 Reactor inlet valve feedback opened
NS313_FBR I106.2 BOOL R310 Reactor outlet pump feedback on
YS312_FBC I106.3 BOOL R310 Reactor outlet valve feedback closed
YS312_FBO I106.4 BOOL R310 Reactor outlet valve feedback opened

1 Introduction to the training 1-9 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Signal name Address Data type Description

NS316_FBR I106.5 BOOL R310 Reactor stirring motor feedback on
YS321_FBC I107.0 BOOL R320 Reactor inlet valve feedback closed
YS321_FBO I107.1 BOOL R320 Reactor inlet valve feedback opened
NS323_FBR I107.2 BOOL R320 Reactor outlet pump feedback on
YS322_FBC I107.3 BOOL R320 Reactor outlet valve feedback closed
YS322_FBO I107.4 BOOL R320 Reactor outlet valve feedback opened
NS326_FBR I107.5 BOOL R320 Reactor stirring motor feedback on
YS331_FBC I108.0 BOOL R330 Reactor inlet valve feedback closed
YS331_FBO I108.1 BOOL R330 Reactor inlet valve feedback opened
NS333_FBR I108.2 BOOL R330 Reactor outlet pump feedback on
YS332_FBC I108.3 BOOL R330 Reactor outlet valve feedback closed
YS332_FBO I108.4 BOOL R330 Reactor outlet valve feedback opened
NS336_FBR I108.5 BOOL R330 Reactor stirring motor feedback on
YS341_FBC I109.0 BOOL R340 Reactor inlet valve feedback closed
YS341_FBO I109.1 BOOL R340 Reactor inlet valve feedback opened
NS343_FBR I109.2 BOOL R340 Reactor outlet pump feedback on
YS342_FBC I109.3 BOOL R340 Reactor outlet valve feedback closed
YS342_FBO I109.4 BOOL R340 Reactor outlet valve feedback opened
NS346_FBR I109.5 BOOL R340 Reactor stirring motor feedback on
YS411_FBC I110.0 BOOL B410 Buffer tank inlet valve feedback closed
YS411_FBO I110.1 BOOL B410 Buffer tank inlet valve feedback opened
YS412_FBO I110.2 BOOL B410 Buffer tank outlet valve feedback opened
YS421_FBC I110.3 BOOL B420 Buffer tank inlet valve feedback closed
YS421_FBO I110.4 BOOL B420 Buffer tank inlet valve feedback opened
YS422_FBO I110.5 BOOL B420 Buffer tank outlet valve feedback opened

1 Introduction to the training 1-10 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

1.7.2 Digital outputs (DO)

Signal name Address Data type Description

NS113_C Q100.0 BOOL M110 Material tank outlet pump
YS112_C Q100.1 BOOL M110 Material tank outlet valve
NS123_C Q100.2 BOOL M120 Material tank outlet pump
YS122_C Q100.3 BOOL M120 Material tank outlet valve
NS133_C Q100.4 BOOL M130 Material tank outlet pump
YS132_C Q100.5 BOOL M130 Material tank outlet valve
YS211_C Q101.0 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 1
YS212_C Q101.1 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 2
YS213_C Q101.2 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 3
YS221_C Q101.3 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 1
YS222_C Q101.4 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 2
YS223_C Q101.5 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 3
YS231_C Q102.0 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 1
YS232_C Q102.1 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 2
YS233_C Q102.2 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 3
YS241_C Q102.3 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 1
YS242_C Q102.4 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 2
YS243_C Q102.5 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 3
YS311_C Q103.0 BOOL R310 Reactor inlet valve
NS313_C Q103.1 BOOL R310 Reactor outlet pump
YS312_C Q103.2 BOOL R310 Reactor outlet valve
NS316_C Q103.3 BOOL R310 Reactor stirring motor
YS321_C Q103.4 BOOL R320 Reactor inlet valve
NS323_C Q103.5 BOOL R320 Reactor outlet pump
YS322_C Q103.6 BOOL R320 Reactor outlet valve
NS326_C Q103.7 BOOL R320 Reactor stirring motor
YS331_C Q104.0 BOOL R330 Reactor inlet valve
NS333_C Q104.1 BOOL R330 Reactor outlet pump
YS332_C Q104.2 BOOL R330 Reactor outlet valve
NS336_C Q104.3 BOOL R330 Reactor stirring motor
YS341_C Q104.4 BOOL R340 Reactor inlet valve
NS343_C Q104.5 BOOL R340 Reactor outlet pump
YS342_C Q104.6 BOOL R340 Reactor outlet valve
NS346_C Q104.7 BOOL R340 Reactor stirring motor
YS411_C Q105.0 BOOL B410 Buffer tank inlet valve
YS421_C Q105.1 BOOL B420 Buffer tank inlet valve

1 Introduction to the training 1-11 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

1.7.3 Analog inputs (AI)

Signal Address Data type Description Low High Unit

name limit limit
LIA114_PV IW208 WORD M110 Material tank 0 6000 kg
level
LIA124_PV IW210 WORD M120 Material tank 0 6000 kg
level
LIA134_PV IW212 WORD M130 Material tank 0 4000 kg
level
LIA214_PV IW216 WORD D210 Dosing level 0 400 kg
LIA224_PV IW218 WORD D220 Dosing level 0 400 kg
LIA234_PV IW220 WORD D230 Dosing level 0 400 kg
LIA244_PV IW222 WORD D240 Dosing level 0 400 kg
LIA314_PV IW224 WORD R310 Reactor level 0 700 kg
TT315_PV IW226 WORD R310 Reactor 0 200 °C
temperature
YC315_FB IW228 WORD R310 Reactor 0 100 %
temperature control
valve feedback
position
LIA324_PV IW232 WORD R320 Reactor level 0 700 kg
TT325_PV IW234 WORD R320 Reactor 0 200 °C
temperature
YC325_FB IW236 WORD R320 Reactor 0 100 %
temperature control
valve feedback
position
LIA334_PV IW240 WORD R330 Reactor level 0 1100 kg
TT335_PV IW242 WORD R330 Reactor 0 200 °C
temperature
YC335_F IW244 WORD R330 Reactor 0 100 %
temperature control
valve feedback
position
LIA344_PV IW248 WORD R340 Reactor level 0 1100 kg
TT345_PV IW250 WORD R340 Reactor 0 200 °C
temperature
YC345_FB IW252 WORD R340 Reactor 0 100 %
temperature control
valve feedback
position
LIA414_PV IW256 WORD B410 Buffer tank 0 12000 kg
level
LIA424_PV IW258 WORD B420 Buffer tank 0 18000 kg
level

1 Introduction to the training 1-12 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

1.7.4 Analog outputs (AQ)

Signal Address Data type Description Low High Unit

name limit limit
YC315_FBC QW208 WORD R310 Reactor 0 100 %
temperature control
valve
YC325_FBC QW210 WORD R320 Reactor 0 100 %
temperature control
valve
YC335_FBC QW212 WORD R330 Reactor 0 100 %
temperature control
valve
YC345_FBC QW214 WORD R340 Reactor 0 100 %
temperature control
valve

1 Introduction to the training 1-13 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

2 Overview of the system architecture

Learning objectives
2.1 Learning objectives

• What does a basic plant structure look like?

• How is a distributed process I/O connected?

• Which simulation tools can be used in PCS 7?

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-1 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

2.2 What is the basic structure of a SIMATIC PCS 7 plant?

Process
Typical plant control systems
structure generallyPCS
of a SIMATIC have 7a plant
hierarchical structure based on the process to be
controlled.
PCS 7 PH / IS OS client OS client
PCS 7 OS clients

Operation level

Terminal bus

PCS 7 OS server Engineering station Server level

Plant bus

PCS 7 AS Control level

S7-410-5H

PROFINET, redundant

PROFIBUS DP ET 200SP HA

Y switch 4..20 mA/HART

ET 200iSP

Integrated drives ET 200iSP PROFINET, fiber-optics

SIMOCODE Field level
SINAMICS
ET 200iSP Conversion
MTA

physical → electrical variables

4..20 mA/HART 4..20 mA/HART
CFU PA Process level
EX

PROFIBUS PA

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview

The architecture shown is an example. In reality, the architecture depends largely on the size of
the process engineering plant and the requirements of the process control system.

Operation level
In most plants, you find the operator control level in the control room. From here, the process is
centrally monitored and controlled with a PC architecture specifically designed for this purpose.
The engineering of the overall process control system also takes place centrally from this level -
in most cases, however, on special computers in rooms only accessible to personnel
designated for that purpose.

Server level
The server level is optional. It is required only after the process control system reaches a certain
size. The servers are usually located in the immediate vicinity of the control room. In most
cases, the servers themselves naturally have display screens. However, these are not displayed
via the hierarchy representations in order to highlight, that the process itself is controlled only
from the operator stations in the operation levels.

Control levels
Just as with the servers, the controllers are in the immediate vicinity of the operator stations in a
marked off area.

Field level
The field level is the closest to the process to be controlled. It contains the sensors and
actuators required for operator control and monitoring. There is a wide range of options for
connecting to the control level.

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-2 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

2.3 Typical requirements of a process control system

Process plants differ in their basic requirements from plants of the manufacturing industry. The
most important requirements are summarized below

2.3.1 Central operation and archiving

Process plants
Central operation andusually have a central control room. Detailed operator control and monitoring of
archiving
the entire process as well as individual parts of the plant is possible from there.

PCS 7 PH / IS PCS 7 OS clients Central operation

• Operator control and monitoring

• Alarm system
Terminal bus

PCS 7 OS server Engineering station

• Short-term archiving of the
process data
Plant bus
• Operator management
• Multiple control room concept

Central archiving

• Long-term archiving of process

data: Process Historian
• Reporting:
Information Server

EX

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview

In addition to plant visualization and operator control functions, the PC stations in the control
room should offer the following:
• Alarm system
• Trend recording of measured values
• Systems for data backup
• Operator management

Process Historian
• Scalable high-performance archiving system in SIMATIC PCS 7
• No restriction regarding single stations, servers or server pairs that can be archived
• May be combined with Information Server for the generation of reports

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-3 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

2.3.2 Central parameter assignment, diagnostics and maintenance

Due to the size of many process plants, central diagnostics plays an important role. The
distances from the control room to the actuators and sensors at the field level may be several
hundred meters in some cases.
For this reason,
Central parameter the processdiagnostics
assignment, control systemand
mustmaintenance
enable communication from the control room
through all levels down to the lowest field level.

PCS 7 PH / IS PCS 7 OS clients

Parameter assignment of...

• Intelligent I/O
Terminal bus
• Device calibrations
PCS 7 OS server Engineering Station /
Maintenance Station
Plant bus Diagnostics of...

PCS 7 AS • PC stations
S7-410-5H

• Network components
PROFINET, redundant
• Servers
PROFIBUS DP Routing ET 200SP HA
• Controllers
Y switch
ET 200M
4..20 mA/HART
• Distributed I/O
• Field devices
Integrated drives ET 200M
PROFINET, fiber-optics
SIMOCODE Readback of...
SINAMICS
ET 200iSP
MTA
• Local parameter assignments
4..20 mA/HART
CFU PA
4..20 mA/HART
• Actual states
EX • Programs
PROFIBUS PA

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview

Depending on the size of the process plant, specially equipped computer work stations can
even be provided for maintenance and diagnostics purposes.

Routing
Routing is the transfer of data beyond network boundaries. You can send information from a
transmitter to a recipient across several networks.
The data sent by data record routing includes the parameter assignments of the participating
communication devices and device-specific information (for example, setpoint values, limit
values, etc.). The field devices themselves do not have to support data record routing, since
they do not forward the information received.

SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager)

SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) is a universal, vendor-neutral tool for configuration,
parameter assignment, commissioning, diagnostics and servicing of intelligent field devices
(sensors and actuators) and field components (remote I/O, multiplexers, control room devices,
compact controllers).
With one software product, SIMATIC PDM enables users to work with over 4000 devices and
device variants of Siemens and over 200 other manufacturers worldwide on a single
homogeneous user interface.

Maintenance station
When a maintenance station is configured in the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system,
SIMATIC PDM is integrated into it and transmits parameter data, diagnostic information and
processing information.

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-4 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

2.3.3 Central engineering

Central engineering

PCS 7 PH / IS PCS 7 OS clients

Configuration of...
Terminal bus
• PC stations
PCS 7 OS server Engineering station
• Servers
Plant bus
• Controllers
PCS 7 AS
S7-410-5H

PROFINET, redundant
Central data management

PROFIBUS DP ET 200SP HA • In a multiproject

Y switch 4..20 mA/HART
• Common database for
ET 200M
engineering of the AS and OS

Integrated drives ET 200M

PROFINET, fiber-optics
SIMOCODE
SINAMICS
ET 200iSP
MTA

4..20 mA/HART 4..20 mA/HART

CFU PA

EX

PROFIBUS PA

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview

Central engineering of a PCS 7 plant plays a very important role. The PC stations and
controllers may be a long way apart. By networking the stations with a so-called engineering
station, practically all steps for setting up, commissioning and maintaining the control system
can be performed centrally.

System based on database

Another aspect of central engineering is to provide a common database for all the process
objects it contains. This means, for example, that a sensor does not need to be created in the
automation system and additionally in the operator control and monitoring system.

Design of the engineering system

The architecture of the engineering system depends on how the SIMATIC PCS 7 project is
processed:
• Locally, on a central engineering station
• In the engineering network (concurrent engineering)

The software licenses provided for the engineering system can be used to configure two system
variants for different applications areas:
• Conventional, dedicated engineering station allows a 2-hour OS test mode in addition to
engineering, but no productive operation as an operator station
• Combined engineering/operator station for small applications allows process control in
productive operation in addition to engineering for small plants

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-5 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
Standardization in the engineering
2.3.4 Standardized engineering

Advanced Process Library Standardization and modularization

• Basis for function blocks in the user program • Control Module Types (CMTs) or process tag types as a
basis
• Takes into account the latest NAMUR recommendations
and PNO specifications. • All instances can be compared and synchronized with
the type at any time.
• Well-engineered functionality as well as visually
attractive, easy-to-use user interfaces • Bulk data engineering possible via native tools or
external spreadsheet software.
• Type-instance synchronization over the entire plant

V1 V2 V3 Valve
Type (CMT)

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating the plant hierarchy

Process control libraries

The use of library elements plays a major role in minimizing the engineering work and thus also
the project costs.
Two process control libraries are integrated in the standard engineering software of SIMATIC
PCS 7:
• Advanced Process Library (current standard, pre-installed)
• PCS 7 Standard Library (former standard, can be installed later if required)
Pre-configured and tested blocks, faceplates and symbols are organized in these libraries and
form the basic elements for the graphic configuration of automation solutions.

Click here for more information on the Advanced Process Library.

Standardization and modularization through Control Module Types

One approach to standardization is the consistent use of Control Module Types (CMT) to create
an automation program. Control Module Type (CMT) technology creates a uniform structure for
the automation program, enabling fast adaptation to new requirements - and reducing
engineering work.

Click here for more information on standardization and modularization.

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-6 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

2.3.5 Fail-safe systems

Fail-safe systems

PCS 7 PH / IS PCS 7 OS clients Engineering station

Safety functions

• Monitoring and control of

Terminal bus
dangerous states
PCS 7 OS server
• Special execution of the control
Plant bus
program
PCS 7 AS
S7-410-5H
• In special control systems, the
operating program and safety
PROFINET, redundant program are located in a single
controller
PROFIBUS DP ET 200SP HA

Y switch
• Components with diagnostic
4..20 mA/HART
ET 200M capability

Integrated drives ET 200M

PROFINET, fiber-optics
SIMOCODE
SINAMICS
ET 200iSP
MTA

4..20 mA/HART 4..20 mA/HART

CFU PA

EX

PROFIBUS PA

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview

In process plants, it is possible for extreme physical conditions to arise. Process control systems
must be able to handle these conditions and, in case of doubt, alleviate them.
For example, due to the nature of the process, high pressures or temperatures may occur. In
addition, sudden changes of physical or chemical conditions must not pose a danger to humans
or the environment.
The monitoring and control of dangerous states in a process plant are referred to as safety
functions in process control systems. These include the entire chain from the sensor via the
controller to the actuator including the communications paths used.
All components of this safety function must meet special requirements relating to self
diagnostics and error detection. The entire chain is only as strong as its weakest link.
To this end, even controllers in process control systems must be capable of monitoring their
program execution themselves after each processing cycle. To do this, a controller specifically
intended for the safety functions is used, which calculates every program cycle twice in different
ways and then analyzes both results for consistency. The results are only output in error-free
condition, and the plant remains in safety mode. An error detected in this way leads to the
triggering of the safety function: the actuator(s) assume the safe state. Due to the process,
valves are normally closed for this purpose and motors stopped (cooling circuits, for example,
are an exception to this).

Click here for more information on functional safety in the process industry.

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-7 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

2.3.6 High availability

Depending on the process, long and costly start-up procedures may be required in process

Continuous operation – High-availability system

plants. After unwanted and even brief production interruptions, these procedures must be
completed before production can resume.

A process plant and its control system consist of electrical and mechanical parts that can cause
different types of errors.
© SiemensTo
2022 | SITRAIN
ensure | System
that individual overview
errors in the process control system itself do not lead to loss of
production, every level of the system architecture must be designed in such a way that there are
fallback strategies available.
In a car with a faulty speed indicator, a driver would theoretically have to look for a repair shop
while driving at a moderate speed.

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-8 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

In process plants, there must always be an alternative for the entire transmission path from the
speed sensor (installation of a second sensor) to the signal transmission (redundant
transmission path) up to the tachometer (further operator station) so that one error in this chain
does not necessarily lead to an unplanned interruption of the journey.
Regardless of the options provided by a process control system in this regard, the actual plant
configuration naturally depends on the effects of a possible process interruption for the
operating company and their budget.
Redundant system components cost more to purchase, but pay off very quickly depending on
the process.

References
See [511] PCS 7 V9.1 High-availability Process Control Systems - Function Manual

Manual

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-9 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

2.4 Available automation systems for PCS 7

Available For PCS 7, thesystems
automation modular automation
for PCS systems
7 of the S7-400 range are released. According to
their functionality they can be classified as follows:

Modular systems of the S7-400 series Embedded systems with software controller

AS 410-5H/AS 410E automation systems SIMATIC PCS 7 AS RTX

• Preferred systems for new plants with SIMATIC PCS 7 • Cost-effective, compact Microbox system based
on SIMATIC IPC427D
• Suitable for SIMATIC PCS 7 as of V8.0+SP1) or as of V9.0
(AS 410E) • Available optionally as:
• Standard systems, high-availability systems, and safety- ▪ SIMATIC PCS 7 AS RTX PROFIBUS
related systems are based on the very same CPU (with PROFIBUS interface)
• Scalable based on the number of process objects ▪ SIMATIC PCS 7 AS RTX PROFINET
(with PROFINET interface)
for connecting distributed I/O stations or field
devices.
Complementary S7-400 systems
• As an alternative to AS 410-5H/AS 410E, primarily in
existing systems
• Scalable based on types of CPU differing in performance
• Range of functions standard, F/H
• In existing plants, AS410x can be used as replacement of
previous CPU, advantage: low storage costs
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System design and specification of the components

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-10 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Type reduction
2.4.1 to a single
The modular CPU
CPU – The modular CPU 410-5H
410-5H

Characteristics

• 2 Ethernet/PROFINET interfaces available with firmware V8.1

• Online expansion of capacity in increments of 100 PO with
System Expansion Card
• Max. 9 process tasks, can be set individually from 10 ms to 5 s
• Block updates possible without stop
• Supports both NTP and S7 time synchronization, high-precision
time stamping
• Released up to 70 ºC (only as of version V8.1)
• PCB protective coating (conformal coating)

Exchangeable System
Expansion Card

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview

The AS 410 offers a CPU – the innovative CPU 410-5H Process Automation – which is versatile
in use. The automation performance is scaled without having to change the CPU and is effected
by means of the number of SIMATIC PCS 7 process objects. In this case, the best performance
is always available regardless of the area of application.
The type reduction to a single CPU in the AS 410 brings numerous advantages. It considerably
simplifies the selection, configuration and planning of the automation system as well as spare
parts inventory and plant expansion.

Scalable performance
The performance range of the CPU 410-5H can be individually scaled according to the size and
type of the PCS 7 applications. This is done by means of the PO volume, which is determined
by the System Expansion Card (SEC). The volume extends from 100 PO to unlimited, at which
point other performance data of the CPU acts as the limiting factor.
The PO configuration limits of an SEC can be conveniently extended as of PCS 7 V8.1 by
means of CPU 410 Expansion Packs. It is not necessary to uninstall the CPU or the SEC. There
are CPU 410 Expansion Packs available for 100 POs and 500 POs. You have the following
options when ordering CPU 410 Expansion Packs:
• Online via [Link]
• Through your Siemens contact person ([Link]/automation/partner)

Communication
The CPU has two 10/100 Mbps PN/Ethernet interfaces that can be configured as follows:
– 2x PROFINET, e.g. for redundant configurations without the use of external CPs
– 1x Industrial Ethernet and 1x PROFINET, e.g. for connecting to the plant bus and the
process bus without the use of external CPs.
– 2x Industrial Ethernet, e.g. to set up the plant bus redundantly
The CPU also has a PROFIBUS interface up to 12 Mbps and allows up to 96 nodes to be
connected. The distributed process I/O can be linked either directly (PROFIBUS DP) or via a
subordinate process bus (PROFIBUS PA).
The PROFINET interfaces can be used for connecting or expanding the I/O devices. 250
devices can be connected for each PROFINET interface.

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-11 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Advantages of CPU 410

• A hardware platform for all application purposes, application sizes and performance ranges.
Consequently the selection, configuration and planning of the automation system are
simplified
• Lower costs for spare or replacement part inventories, as only one CPU type is used in the
project
• Flexible expansion of the automation performance without replacing hardware
• Lower investment costs and greater possibilities for use in regions with coating
requirements, due to the protective coating of the CPU 410-5H
• Reduction of plant downtimes due to the possibility of type updating of AS blocks in RUN
(TCiR)

References
See [1028] Application example "Process automation with the CPU 4105H, for more
information on the CPU 410-5H"

Depending on your requirements you can configure an AS 410 as follows:

• Standard AS 410S automation system
• High-availability AS 410H automation system
• Safety-related AS 410F/FH automation system
In our training device, the AS 410S which has a CPU 410-5H Process Automation is used.

References
See [513] PCS 7 CPU 410-5H Process Automation - System Manual, section 3 and 6 for
more information on the structure and basic functions of CPU 410-5H.
Manual

2.4.2 CPU 410E – an inexpensive alternative

The cost-effective CPU 410E is available for applications with a small number of process
objects. For these applications, it provides the same benefits as the CPU 410-5H in terms of
• Flexibility
– Standard, high-availability and fail-safe applications
– Same hardware as CPU 410-5H
• Ruggedness: Conformal coating, extended temperature range up to 70 °C
• Secure investment: 1 PROFIBUS and 2 PROFINET interfaces, innovations via firmware
updates

References
Click here for more information about the modular automation systems CPU 410-5H and CPU
410E.
See also
[1028] Application example "Process automation with the CPU 4105H
[513] PCS 7 CPU 410-5H Process Automation - System Manual

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-12 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

2.5 Networked stations and systems in Industrial Ethernet

Industrial Ethernet is a powerful communication network complying with the international
standard IEEE802.3 (Ethernet) that was optimized to meet the requirements of industrial
application. Some of its benefits are as follows:
• Networking of different areas of application such as management and production
• Rugged design and electromagnetic immunity
• High transmission performance and support of different transmission media
• Scalable performance due to switched Ethernet technology and high availability due to
redundant network topologies
One feature of data transmission over Ethernet is that the maximum data packet size is limited.
If a large amount of data needs to be transmitted, this must be split into several packets. This
task is handled by the various transport protocols ISO or TCP/IP.

References
See [404] SIMATIC NET Industrial Communication with PG/PC Volume 1
– Basics, section 2.3 for further information.
Manual

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-13 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
Networked stations and systems – Plant bus and terminal bus
2.5.1 Plant bus and terminal bus

Communication protocols for IE OS clients

Use of TCP/IP: ES
Terminal bus / IE
• Special case: Plant bus and terminal bus together on one bus
• Routing via subnets OS server TCP/IP protocol
• CPU with integrated PN/IE interface
ISO protocol
• NTP for time synchronization TCP/IP protocol
• Asset management for network components on the plant bus
Plant bus / IE
• Gateways on the plant bus (third-party coupling of an AS)

Use of ISO:
• Recommended with separate plant bus and terminal bus Automation systems
• Use of H machines with FW < V5
(S7 high-availability) only with ISO
• SIMATIC procedure for time synchronization

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview

Terminal bus:
In the case of multiple station systems for the OS, the OS servers and OS clients are connected
together via a terminal bus. For communication via the terminal bus, the TCP/IP protocol is
used. The network adapters and connections on the terminal bus are not configured within PCS
7.

Plant bus:
The CPs of the stations involved (AS and PC stations) must be connected to the plant bus to be
able to be loaded. For process communication on the plant bus, the ISO or TCP/IP protocol for
Industrial Ethernet can be used.
In multiple station systems, we recommend installation of a terminal bus separate from the plant
bus. Small systems (single-station systems), on the other hand, can be designed with a
common plant and terminal bus. Various functions are executed via this bus, e.g. loading the
configuration data onto the target systems, testing the system and process mode.

Topology options
The plant bus and terminal bus can be configured as follows:
• As Industrial Ethernet (10/100 Mbps and Gigabit)
• In line, tree, ring, star or redundant ring structures

References
See [121] PCS 7 Compendium Part A - Configuration Guidelines, sections 4.3.5 to 4.3.7 for
more information about when ISO or TCP/IP should be used.
Manual

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-14 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
Networked stations and systems in Industrial Ethernet – Interfaces an
2.5.2 Interfaces and components for communication

Typical interfaces and components

in SIMATIC PCS 7

In PC stations:
• Standard network adapters (BCE*)
• CP 1623 or CP 1628

As network coupler:
• Switches of the SCALANCE series
• Switches of the RUGGEDCOM series
• OSM/ESM

In the AS:
• CPU with integrated PN/IE interfaces
• CP 443-1

*BCE = Basic Communication Ethernet

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview

2.5.3 Network address

Each Ethernet module (CP, network adapter) has a unique MAC address. Generally, this
address is preset in the module by the vendor.
• The MAC address is permanently implemented when standard network adapters are used
for communication instead of a CP. Office networks are a typical use case. If a network
adapter is replaced, the network administration must take the new MAC address into
account.
• Automation systems in plants are equipped with CPs. The MAC address can be configured
using HW Config (Hardware Configuration) in the PCS 7 project. By loading the AS, the CP
is initialized with the new MAC address.
The advantage of the configurable MAC address is the fast maintenance, because the
replacement part (replacement CP) can be given the same MAC address as the defective CP.
Apart from the standard network adapters, CPs are also available for the PC stations. Using
such CPs can have further advantages:
• Higher number of communications partners
• Configuration of high-availability connections (redundancy)
• Time-synchronizable

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-15 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Note When using several standard network adapters, the card for the terminal bus must in the first
position. Any network adapters plugged in without any functionality must be deactivated.
After PCS 7 is installed, a dialog box appears in which the network adapter for the terminal bus
must be selected.

The address of the network node is specified in the object properties of the Ethernet CP. The
following properties are specified:
• MAC address
• Also in the IP protocol: IP address/subnet mask/address of the gateway
With more recent CPs, a check box allows you to decide if you want to set the MAC address
and use the ISO protocol. You only need to enter a MAC address if you intend to use the ISO
protocol (use case: plant bus).
You do not need to activate the MAC address if you only configure types of communication that
require the TCP/IP protocol (TCP connections, ISO-over-TCP connections, UDP connections).
In this case, the field remains disabled; the address assigned to the CP in the factory is then not
overwritten when you download the configuration data (use case: terminal bus).

References
For more information, refer to:
[102] PCS 7 V9.1 PC Configuration, section 3.9

Manual
[103] PCS 7 V9.1 Engineering System, section 9.13
[121] PCS 7 Compendium Part A – Configuration Guidelines, section 4.3.5 to 4.3.7

"Physical" network connections and "logical" SIMATIC connections

• Physical communication takes place in a network between communication processors (CP)
in the stations: e.g. between the CP in the AS and the CP in the PC station.
• A (SIMATIC) connection is a logical assignment of two communication partners that perform
communication functions (e.g. exchange of process values). An example: The CPU of the
AS at one end and the OS (represented by a WinCC application) at the other end
generate/require information (data). As the "source" and "sink" of information, together they
form a logical connection.

Note The PCS 7 documentation often distinguishes between "Network connections" (relates to
physical connections) and "connections" (relates to logical SIMATIC connection types).

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-16 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

2.6 Process automation requirements for the fieldbus

Process
Process automation requirements
automation for the for
requirements fieldbus
the fieldbus

Scalable Flexible
redundancy architecture

Investment High reliability

protection and availability

Horizontal and
Simple
vertical
handling
integration

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview

Distributed I/O devices such as remote I/O stations with their I/O modules, transmitters, drives,
valves or operator terminals communicate with the automation systems at field level through a
powerful real-time bus system.
The universal PROFIBUS covers all of the requirements of the process industry and has already
proven itself as a rugged and reliable communication medium at the field level.
Field instrumentation is connected using PROFIBUS PA, which, in addition to communication,
also enables power supply via the fieldbus. This standard can be integrated seamlessly into the
SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system either via PROFINET or PROFIBUS DP as a link.

Click here for more information on conventional fieldbus solutions.

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-17 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Digitalization starts in the field

Scalability and availability are typical requirements of process automation. This also includes
the increasing flexibility for future plant expansions with ever shorter commissioning times and
downtimes.
Digitalization plays an increasingly important role in meeting these traditional requirements. The
basic approach of digitalization is the integrated digital communication from the control level
down to the sensor and actuator in the field.
PROFINET is the practical combination of the advantages of PROFIBUS, which is one of the
most widely used bus systems with over 50 million installed nodes worldwide, and the benefits
of Industrial Ethernet. PROFINET is the leading Industrial Ethernet standard for automation and
plays an essential role in the digitalization of the process industry. Thanks to its features – from
openness, scalability, flexibility and vendor neutrality to deterministic communication and hard
real-time capability – you are well-equipped for the digital transformation and the world of
Industry 4.0.

Click here for more information on communication in the field with PROFINET.

2.6.1 PROFIBUS as a fieldbus in process automation

PROFIBUS as a fieldbus in process automation

Features of communication via PROFIBUS

• PROFIBUS in the DP or PA version is used as the

communications medium.
• It corresponds to the international standards
IEC 61158 and IEC 61784.
• The PA version allows digital data transfer and power
supply of the field devices via a two-wire cable.
• Since PROFIBUS DP supports the HART protocol, it
is also possible to integrate HART field devices into
the PROFIBUS DP communication via HART remote
I/Os.

This communication is characterized by:

• Cyclic transmission of process data
• Acyclic transfer of alarms, parameters and
diagnostic data

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview

PROFIBUS DP
• Designed for data transmission rates of up to 12 Mbps and low response times of up to 1
ms
• Based on IEC 61158 and IEC 61784 standards
• Proven ruggedness and reliability in countless projects worldwide
• Can be implemented in electrical or optical transmission technology
• Optionally redundant
• Via fieldbus isolating transformer also as intrinsically safe fieldbus up to Ex zone 1 or 21

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-18 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Use of fiber-optics
Optical networks are more expensive than electrical RS 485 networks, but are insensitive to
electromagnetic interference. In addition to purely optical networks, combinations of electrical
and optical networks, in particular, have been proven in practice. These merge the advantages
of the two transmission technologies.
Optical Link Modules (OLM) permit the construction of optical and hybrid (electrical/optical)
networks in linear bus, ring or star topologies.
Suitable for the OLM, fiber-optic cables (FOC) made of glass with 2 multi-mode fibers are
preferably used for optical PROFIBUS networks indoors and outdoors.

Intrinsically safe PROFIBUS DP with RS-485-iS

The RS 485-iS coupler is an isolating transformer with which the PROFIBUS DP fieldbus can be
routed intrinsically safe into the hazardous area. It enables connection of intrinsically safe
PROFIBUS DP stations, e.g. ET 200iSP or devices from other vendors with Ex i DP connection.
The electrical PROFIBUS DP transmission technology is converted into the intrinsically safe RS
485-iS transmission technology with a transmission rate of 1.5 Mbps. It is then suitable as a
safety barrier and can be used in the Ex area as a repeater.

PROFIBUS PA
The advantages of distributed field automation using the PROFIBUS PA profile include low
hardware overheads, cost-effective engineering, increased operational safety and problem-free
maintenance. These advantages are underlined by the following features:
• Modularity and uniformity from the sensor all the way to the control level enable new plant
concepts
• Implementation of intrinsically safe applications through use of the fieldbus in hazardous
areas
• Redundant PROFIBUS PA architectures (ring and line topologies with coupler redundancy)
support Flexible Modular Redundancy (FMR) from the automation system (controller) down
to a PA field device
• Safety-related and high-availability applications with low device and cabling requirements
• Reduced configuration costs through simple, central engineering of the field devices
(PROFIBUS PA and HART with SIMATIC PDM, also cross-vendor)
• Simple installation using two-wire cable for both power supply and data transmission
• Reduced commissioning costs through simplified loop check
• Low servicing costs thanks to simple wiring and wide-ranging diagnostics options

CP 443-5 Extended for connection to the Profibus

In addition (or as an alternative) to the PROFIBUS DP interfaces integrated in the CPU, you can
use the CP 443-5 Extended to interface with your distributed I/O. With each further CP 443-5
Extended, you can insert further DP chains and theoretically address 126 more DP slaves.

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-19 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

2.6.2 PROFINET as a fieldbus in process automation

PROFINET as a fieldbus in process automation

Features of PROFINET

The best of both worlds

• Compatible with PROFIBUS
• Integrated device/network diagnostics
• High data rates digitally and in real time
• Fail-safe communication is possible without special
network components
Standardization
• Based on standard Ethernet according to IEEE 802.3
• Preeminent open fieldbus standard worldwide
• Supports IT services, e.g. TCP/IP
Straightforward handling
• Support during planning, operation and
commissioning through automatic addressing and
name assignment
• Easy device swapping without additional tools
through automatic neighborhood detection
• Clear and simple installation guidelines
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview

When used as a fieldbus, PROFINET meets all the requirements of process automation, offers
many advantages compared to PROFIBUS DP and, therefore, forms a future-proof platform for
plants in the process industry.
As an open standard for fieldbus communication, PROFINET combines the advantages of the
proven PROFIBUS DP fieldbus standard with those of the Industrial Ethernet network standard.
This integrated communication forms the basis for horizontal and vertical integration and is thus
the cornerstone for the implementation of digitalization.

PROFINET in comparison to PROFIBUS DP

• Greater cyclic payload
• Higher transmission rate
• Better bandwidth utilization
• Network architecture can be adapted more individually to the plant
• Plant expansions can be implemented more easily
• Commissioning is faster and easier, since only point-to-point connections exist and no
entire bus has to be commissioned at once

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-20 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

2.6.3 Basic structures of the network topology in PROFINET

Basic structures of the network topology

Line Star Ring

Line
The line is the simplest network structure. It is characterized by a network backbone to which
the individual nodes are connected directly or via individual branches in which each branch
contains only one node.
• Advantages of line topology: Simple structure, low hardware investment.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview
• Disadvantages:
– No optimal resource deployment: Depending on their position, the backbone may need
to take long detours which may, in turn, lead to problematic frame delay times.
– Lack of redundancy: A cable break at any point cannot be bridged.

Star
The star topology differs from the line in that one switch functions as a "middle point" of a
network from which cables branch off to the individual terminal nodes.
• Advantages:
– Higher network performance
– Higher failure safety. If a cable to one node fails, all other network components remain
unaffected.

Tree
When multiple star topologies are connected to one another, we call this a tree topology. These
star structures are then typically arranged hierarchically. Larger networks have this structure,
especially when several topologies are combined with one another.

Ring
If the two ends of a line are closed by an additional connection, a ring topology is created. A
special redundancy mechanism ensures that the ring structure remains a logical line in normal
circumstances and therefore prevents any message frames from circulating. If a section of the
ring fails, the mechanism allows a substitute path in the ring to become available quickly:
Instead of the message traveling via the direct path, which is now interrupted, it travels the long
way round via the intact network section and reaches its recipient via "detours". The network
does not split into two segments.

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-21 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
System redundancy
2.6.4 and media
System redundancy andredundancy – Terms
media redundancy inand definitions
PROFINET

• Ring topology with MRP is

• 1 interface • 1 interface • 2 interfaces each with one independent of system redundancy
communication connection
• 1 connection • 2 connections • 1 interface, 1 connection

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview

System redundancy
• All S1 devices (e.g. IE/PB Link, Sinamics, etc.) can be integrated only as "one-sided
connected" IO devices in an H-CPU. The interruption of the communication connection to
the configured IO controller results in device failure.
• An S2 device has the ability to communicate with two controllers in the H-system in parallel
via an interface module. Each device with S2 capability can also be operated one-sided on
a single AS; the reverse is not possible.
• In the case of an R1 device, each of its two interface modules communicate with one IO
controller each. This means that each IM works, so to speak, as an S1 device.

Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP)

• Connection of IO devices based on ring topologies.
• The use of ring topologies with MRP is independent of the system redundancy (S1, S2 or
R1).
• In order to set up an MRP ring, all ring nodes (e.g. IO controllers) must support MRP, but
please note that MRP only allows a maximum of 50 nodes per ring.
• In an MRP ring, there may only be one MRP Manager. The remaining nodes must be
configured as MRP clients.
• The MRP Manager is responsible for constantly checking the ring connection.
• If the ring is functional, the MRP Manager blocks a port, opens the ring connection and
provides loop-free communication.
• If the transmission path fails, the MRP Manager activates the blocked port and provides
another communication path.
• Subsequently, the ring nodes must reconfigure their communication paths. The maximum
reconfiguration time is 200 ms.

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-22 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
High-precision
2.6.5 time stamping
High-precision time stamping

OS clients Symbol Description

Terminal bus
Concept used for providing incoming events
(e.g. signal changes in distributed I/O) with
ES OS server a very precise timestamp (accuracy up to
Central 1 ms).
system clock /
• All operator stations and automation
NTP server Plant bus
systems used in the plant must be
TIME NET synchronized with the same current time
of day
AS S7 410-5H
• The time master supplies the time of day
that serves as the basis for time stamping
• TIME NET = Separate plant bus for
PROFINET central system time

ET 200SP HA

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview

The change of state of a process signal is an event in automation technology. If time information
is assigned to the event, this is regarded as time stamping.
In contrast, the goal of time synchronization is to ensure that the clocks of several components
match as exactly as possible.
Accurate time stamping is a concept used for providing incoming events (e.g. signal changes in
a distributed I/O) with a very precise timestamp (accuracy up to 1 ms). The time synchronization
of the nodes is a basic prerequisite for time-stamping.
The abbreviation of the term: Sequence of Events – SoE is used for symbolism.
High-precision time-stamping finds its application, for instance, in the event of a message
overload in the system. If a large number of messages occur within one second, it is only
possible to identify the first message and therefore also its cause by means of the timestamp.

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-23 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

2.6.6 PROFINET in SIMATIC PCS 7 – PA ready

For unrestricted use in process automation, IO devices must support at least the following
functionalities:
• Simple S2 system redundancy
• Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP)
PROFINET IO – Symbols and description
• Configuration in Run (CiR)
Siemens uses the PA ready symbol to identify the IO devices which meet the requirements of
process automation with regard to availability and changes during operation.
Symbol Description

PA ready: The IO devices must support at least the following functionalities:

• Simple S2 system redundancy
• Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP)
= • Configuration in Run (CiR)
Simple S2 system redundancy
Connection of an IO device via an interface module, which establishes one application relationship with each of
both IO controllers in the H-system
+
Media Redundancy with MRP
Function for ensuring the network and system availability, can be combined with system redundancy
Max. 50x IO devices; reconfiguration time up to 200 ms
+ Note: All IO devices in the ring must support MRP

Configuration in Run
Configuration in Run (CiR) is a function that enables the system and configuration to be changed during
operation.

PROFINET as a fieldbus in process automation –

Hardware for| System
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN implementation
overview
Hardware for implementation

Description
1
1. AS 410 with CPU 410-5H and CPU 410E:
the only controllers that support all PROFINET functions
(S1, S2, R1, CiR and SoE)
2. Recommended SCALANCE switches will support all
PA-ready functions in the future.
3. SIMATIC ET 200SP HA:
preferred choice for the distributed I/O
2 4. SIMATIC CFU PA:
Field distributor for process-oriented, distributed
connection of digital I/O signals and PROFIBUS PA field
devices to the PROFINET fieldbus.
3 4
5. IE/PB LINK PN IO:
Gateway between Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS for
seamless integration of PROFIBUS devices into the
PROFINET fieldbus.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview

See SIOS entry ID: PROFINET in Process Automation with SIMATIC PCS 7.

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-24 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

2.6.7 Distributed process I/O and field devices in hazardous gas and dust
Distributed process I/O and field devices in hazardous gas and dust
atmospheres
atmospheres

0/ 20:
Permanent, long-term or frequent presence of
explosive gas or dust atmosphere

1/ 21:
Occasional presence of explosive gas or dust
atmosphere

2/ 22:
Rare or short-term presence of explosive gas or
dust atmosphere

1) With DC power supply PS 405

2) Dust atmospheres: Installation of components always
in an enclosure with IP6x protection
3) Also complies with FM/UL Class I Division 2

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview

Fieldbuses can also be operated in potentially explosive atmospheres when physical changes
are made.

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-25 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
MIT – Digital twin
2.7 SIMIT – Digital twin

Real world

Process planning Automation / Function test Production

Design Simulation Training

Virtual
world

Detection of planning Accompanying tests in each Operator training for a wide

errors configuration phase range of scenarios

emens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview SIMIT is a simulation platform that can be used to implement both the virtual commissioning of
automation technology for systems, machines and processes, and realistic training
environments for plant operators.
This can easily be done directly at the workplace, even without available equipment and in-
depth simulation know-how.

Advantages of the SIMIT Simulation Platform include:

• Testing of the entire automation application, with HW controllers and/or emulated controllers
for SIMATIC S7 and PCS 7
• Broad application range with minimal simulation design thanks to libraries with generic and
application-specific simulation components
• Faster commissioning with fewer risks
• Plant operators can be trained at an early stage before the real commissioning of the plant
• Intuitive, user-friendly and simple simulation design from the I/O and signal level, through
the sensor and actuator level, all the way to the process level
• Flexible, scalable and open simulation setup and configuration
• Graphical user interface, intuitive navigation via drag-and-drop, visualization including 3D
representation

Click here for more information about the SIMIT Simulation platform.

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-26 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
MATIC PCS 7 – SIMIT Hardware or Software in the Loop?
Hardware or Software in the Loop?

OS clients OS Controller / PLC Field Process

server

PROFINET/IE

PROFIBUS DP

Hardware in the Loop

• Testing of the entire engineering with real
control system and real controllers
• Simulation of I/O signals on the fieldbus
• Simulation of the entire process
Software in the Loop
• Testing of the entire engineering with real control system
and simulated controllers including simulation of I/O
signals, field devices and the overall process
• Possibility for slow motion or time lapse simulations

To test the configuration and the automation program and to perform the validation, there are 2
emens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview
configuration options:
• Deployment of a real automation system (HiL: "Hardware in the Loop")
• Deployment of a virtual automation system (SiL: "Software in the Loop")

Deployment of a real automation system (HiL: "Hardware in the Loop")

In this application, the automation program to be tested runs in a real automation system but
has no real process I/O. Instead, it is coupled with SIMIT or a software tool using a Simulation
Unit (SU).
The simulation unit simulates the device communication with the field devices for PROFIBUS or
PROFINET.
References
See [6006] Application example: Configuration of a SIMIT UNIT in the PCS 7 environment

Deployment of a virtual automation system (SiL: "Software in the Loop")

When SIMIT Simulation Platform is coupled with SIMIT Virtual Controller or the S7-PLCSIM
emulation software, it is possible to test the automation function in the engineering office in
advance without the real hardware – from sensor to automation system back to actuator.
The user program is downloaded to the automation system emulated by SIMIT Virtual Controller
or S7-PLCSIM in SIMATIC Manager without modifications and started. It receives the simulated
I/O signals from the SIMIT Simulation platform via the coupling of the emulated automation
system.
References
See [6001] Application example: Getting started with SIMIT simulation and SIMATIC PCS 7.

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-27 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

2.8 system
Which Checkpoint
components are provided for PCS 7?

What system components are provided for PCS 7?

A. Engineering station ES
B. Automation system AS
C. Operator station OS
D. Fieldbus with PROFIBUS and/or PROFINET

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | System overview

2 Overview of the system architecture 2-28 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

3 Before engineering begins ...

3.1 Learning objectives
Learning objectives

• What are the requirements for a PCS 7 installation?

• What do I have to consider when selecting the computer name?

• What do I have to consider regarding third-party software and virus protection?

• How do I license the SIMATIC PCS 7 software?

• How can I minimize the administration effort for the computers in my

PCS 7 plant?

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Before engineering begins

3 Before engineering begins ... 3-1 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

3.2 Before engineering begins

3.2.1 Basic steps for installing the operating system
Basic steps for you
Below, installing
will find athe operating
practical outline system
of the basic procedure for installing PC stations for
PCS 7.

Microsoft Windows 10 LTSC 2019

Step Action Microsoft Windows Server 2019
1 Installing the operating system
2 Installing operating system service packs Swap file is managed automatically

3 Setting the location for the swap file

User / group
4 Making system settings Screen settings
5 Installing the Message Queuing service Energy saving options
Background services for servers
6 Installing additional components
7 Installing the Internet Information Service (IIS) Required for the message system

8 Installing additional services for SIMATIC BATCH Required for PCS 7 Web Server,
Information Server, PDM Server
9 Setting the color scheme and font size
10 Creating a backup Windows or Windows 10

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Before engineering begins

Supported
Supportedoperating
operatingsystems
systems

Always 64-bit

Microsoft Windows 10 Microsoft Windows Server 2019

Enterprise LTSC 2019 (64-bit) Standard Edition (64-bit)
Microsoft Windows Server 2019
Datacenter Edition (64-bit)

Single station systems Servers in multiple station systems

(OS, ES, ES/OS, SIMATIC Batch, Route Control) (OS, ES, SIMATIC Batch, Route Control)

Clients in multiple station systems Process Historian

(OS, SIMATIC Batch, Route Control, Web Clients) Information Server
Maintenance Server

Web server on OS client (OS Web Option)

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Before engineering begins

3 Before engineering begins ... 3-2 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

3.2.2 Name of the PC station

The selection of the computer name is crucial for the project configuration. You specify the
computer name when installing the operating system on the computer.
Specifications:
• The computer name starts with a letter.
• The computer name only contains letters and numbers.
• The computer name has a maximum of 15 characters (limited by the operating system).

After installation of PCS 7, the computer name must not be changed. If the computer name is
Note nevertheless changed, you need to reinstall (Restore DVD).

Windows
Windows components
components and
and settings settings

Message queuing Always required

IIS Activate the service when using the PC in PCS 7 as:

• PCS 7 Web Server
• Information Server
• PC station on which BATCH archives are swapped out.
• PDM server
Disable the service for all other installations
System optimization • Deactivate games
• Disable "Automatic System Restore"
• Size of the swap file: Swap file is managed automatically
• In the advanced system properties in the Control Panel, select the option
for optimizing the system performance for background services.
Energy saving plan • Switch off screen: Never
• Energy saving mode: Never
• Disable the energy saving option for network adapters

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Before engineering begins

3 Before engineering begins ... 3-3 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

3.3 Third-party software and virus protection

• Only install the software products released for PCS 7 on a PC station. This applies in
particular to PC stations for process mode (OS, SIMATIC BATCH, SIMATIC Route Control).
• Installing and simultaneously activating applications that are not approved by Siemens can
adversely impact the PCS 7 system performance.
• The user bears sole responsibility when third-party products are used.
Installing later: In particular with pre-configured PC stations (product bundles), you can also
install these components later.

Compatibility tool for automation and drive technology

The compatibility tool will help you to easily determine the compatibility of the following third-
party
Compatibility software.
with third-party software

Third-party software compatibility tool for automation and drive technology.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Before engineering begins

Compatibility of Microsoft Office

Check the compatibility of MS Office products so that the corresponding add-ins can work
correctly with SIMATIC PCS 7 products.
• The following applies to SIMATIC PCS 7 V9.1: Microsoft Office is only compatible in the
32-bit version.
• The following applies to SIMATIC PCS 7 V9.1 SP1: Microsoft Office is also compatible in
the 64-bit version.

Note No full scan of the PC must be made when OS Runtime is running.

3 Before engineering begins ... 3-4 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

3.4 Properties for description of license

3.4.1 Important terms for licensing

Properties
Propertiesfor
fordescription
descriptionof of
license
license

Represents the right to use a product:

CoL (Certificate of License) License key

License verification "Electronic license stamp"

• Paper or download • Storage and handling on the PC station
• For archiving • Transfer via USB stick or network

Consists of a basic license type and a license type:

Basic license type License type

• Unlimited license • Pay per use

• Single license
• Count relevant license license
• Floating license • Countable object • Contact license
license • Trial license
• Upgrade license • Demo license
• Rental license

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Before engineering begins

A license gives the user a legal right to use products. This right is represented by the following:
• CoL (Certificate of License): The CoL is the proof of the license. The product may only be
used by the license owner or authorized persons.
• License key: The license key is the "technical representative" of the license (also called an
"electronic license stamp").

PCS 7 without license key

Note You can use the PCS 7 Engineering Toolset software package for up to 14 days as a trial
version. You can activate trial mode when you first use the software (installation by the setup
program).

References
See also [100]
for more information about licensing PCS 7 software.
Manual

3 Before engineering begins ... 3-5 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
Process objects
3.4.2 Processforobjects
scalablefor
PCS 7 plants
scalable PCS 7 plants

If the plant grows, SIMATIC PCS 7 simply grows along with it!

Solution: Concept of cumulative software licenses for configured and loadable process objects

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Before engineering begins

Licensing
Licensingofofprocess
processobjects
objectsforfor
thethe
automation system
automation system

The following are counted as process objects by PCS 7: Technological

blocks / SFC,
no driver block
• All SFCs
• All block instances that meet the following criteria:
OCM possible
− Instance is not part of the driver library. Signaling
− Instance subject to operator control and monitoring.
− Instance generates messages.

These objects have the "S7_m_c" block attribute.

You need the "PCS 7 – Runtime License AS"

AS RT PO
with the "AS RT PO XXX" license key

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Before engineering begins

3 Before engineering begins ... 3-6 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

3.5 System administration with the SIMATIC PCS 7 Management

ChallengesConsole
for care and maintenance of a PCS 7 plant

• Challenges for the software management

Different Software installation Maintain overview

PCS 7 software
components Keep software up to date Central management

• Challenges for the system inventory

Different Plant "is alive"

Different
SIMATIC PCS 7
system components Specific settings
components

Life cycles

Maintain overview

Architecture
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Before engineering begins

Architecture

ES with
SIMATIC Management Console Central SIMATIC PCS 7 SIMATIC PCS 7 Client Station 1 SIMATIC PCS 7 Client Station N
Software administration

…
Central SIMATIC PCS 7
Management Agent Plant inventory Management Agent Management Agent

Terminal bus

Engineering station SIMATIC PCS 7 Server Station 1 SIMATIC PCS 7 Server Station N

Management Agent Management Agent Management Agent

Plant bus

AS 410
PA/FF link

ET 200M AFDiS
AFD

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Before engineering begins

A process control system includes numerous heterogeneous components, each with specific
parameter assignments and settings. It is also subject to a dynamic change process due to
updates, upgrades as well as modernization measures and expansion. As the plant gets older,
it becomes more difficult to keep track of the current state of hardware and software.

Architecture of the SIMATIC PCS 7 Management Console

The SIMATIC PCS 7 Management Console enables you to reduce the work for managing your
PCS 7 plant to a minimum. You also have the latest status of the installed hardware and
software components immediately at hand.
The SIMATIC PCS 7 Management Console enables:
• Central, standardized administration of SIMATIC PCS 7 software
• Inventory of all installed hardware and software components of the SIMATIC PCS 7 plant

3 Before engineering begins ... 3-7 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

3.6 Life cycle business model (as of PCS 7 V9.0)

When the project is opened in the SIMATIC Manager without the "system ID", a message is
Life cycledisplayed
business withmodel
a prompt(as
for of PCS 7 V9.0)
registration. This gives the user the option of obtaining the
registered system ID.

[Link]

SID
Unique key for identifying a particular PCS 7 system
based on:

• End customer
• Location
• Plant
• Production unit

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Before engineering begins

Register once – benefit over the entire plant life cycle!

After the registration of the new project, the project receives a unique system ID.
The system ID is stored or reproduced in the PCS 7 project and in the multiproject.
The "system ID" is a unique key for identifying a particular PCS 7 system based on the end
customer, location, plant and production unit.
It remains unchanged over the service life of the PCS 7 system. It is linked to all offers, orders,
service agreements, etc.
As of version 9, each installation of the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system can be
conveniently registered online. This automatically generates a unique identification number, the
System Identification Number (SID), and stores it centrally with our support for your inquiries.
The registration process required for this is free of charge and can be completed easily within a
few minutes. With the help of the SID, our technical support is even better equipped to provide
you with professional and fast support.

References
See [103] PCS 7 V9.1 Engineering System, section 4.1 System ID, for more information about
the system ID and how to create and edit a system ID.
Manual Click here to go to the registration page for Siemens process control systems.

3 Before engineering begins ... 3-8 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

3.7 Basic settings in SIMATIC Manager

The following global settings apply to each PCS 7 project that is opened with SIMATIC
Basic settings in SIMATIC Manager
Manager.

Wizards Language

Storage Archiving
locations

Message numbers

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Before engineering begins

• Wizard: Activate the PCS 7 Wizard.

• Message numbers: In the "Message numbers" tab, keep the default setting "Always prompt
for settings" or select "Always assign project-oriented unique message numbers".
• Language: Select the language for the user interface of SIMATIC Manager and the project
display. SIMATIC Manager must be restarted following a language change.
• Archiving (PCS 7 projects): Choose an archiving program and the storage location for the
archived projects.
• Storage location for projects/multiprojects (and libraries):
Default setting is C:\Program Files (x86)\SIEMENS\STEP7\S7proj

3 Before engineering begins ... 3-9 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

3.8 Rights to shares and folders according to the SIMATIC

authorization model
All rights to shares and folders related to SIMATIC products can be assigned using the
SIMATIC rights model. For this purpose, local groups are created during installation and are
then added to the SIMATIC objects together with the necessary permissions. This makes
granting the necessary permissions easier because the respective user account or the group
only has to be added to the local SIMATIC groups that are needed for operation of the SIMATIC
products. The number of added groups can differ depending on which SIMATIC products are
installed.
Besides the groups created by SIMATIC PCS 7 Setup, the membership in at least on of the
local default groups "Users", "Power user" or "Administrator" is also required.

Changing the project path and access rights

The project path under "Storage location for projects/multiprojects" is set by default to
"SIEMENS \STEP7\S7Proj" and all necessary access rights are set on this project path.
If you use another project path, the required access rights must be set there.

References
See [126] PCS 7 Compendium Part F – Industrial Security, section 7.3 for more information
on managing computers and users.
Manual

3 Before engineering begins ... 3-10 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

3.9 Further information

• [103] PCS 7 V9.1 Engineering System, section 4.2
• [121] PCS 7 Compendium Part A – Configuration Guidelines, section 4
• [126] PCS 7 Compendium Part F – Industrial Security

3 Before engineering begins ... 3-11 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

3.10 Exercise and checkpoint

3.10.1 Exercise: Adapting settings in the SIMATIC-Manager
Task
Task

Define the following basic settings in the SIMATIC Manager.

• Language including mnemonics
• Storage location for projects and libraries
• Wizards
• Assignment of message numbers
• Storage locations of project archives

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Before engineering begins

Procedure
1. Open the SIMATIC Manager and select the menu command "Options > Customize..."
2. Check the path information under "Storage location for projects/multiprojects" and "Storage
location for libraries" in the "General" tab.
If you want to use a specially configured project drive instead of the default path,
"SIEMENS\STEP7\S7Proj" under "Storage location for projects/multiprojects", specify the
new path.
– "D:\PCS7_Projects"
3. In the "Language" tab, set the language and the mnemonics with which you want to work.
– National language, including mnemonics (German or English)
4. In the "Date and Time of Day" tab, set the desired format and specify if the module should
show the local time of the programming device / PC (for UTC system time -> convert to
local time).
– This is not relevant in the case of the virtual training environment.
5. In the "Wizards" tab, check if the "PCS 7" option is set.
This setting is required to be able to later start the "New Project" and "Expand Project"
PCS 7 wizards.
6. In the "Message numbers" tab, select "Always assign CPU-oriented unique message
numbers".
7. In the "Archive" tab, you can select the archiving program you want to use (for example,
PKZip) and the paths for archiving/retrieval.
– "D:\PCS7_Archive"
8. Click on the "OK" button.

Result
You have adapted the basic settings in the SIMATIC Manager to meet the requirements of the
next exercises.

3 Before engineering begins ... 3-12 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

3.10.2 the settings

Compare Checkpoint
you have completed with this list.
Compare the settings you have completed with this list.

A. Program language and mnemonics may differ

B. The wizard remains set to STEP 7
C. Program language and mnemonics must be identical
D. The default storage address is changed to the D drive

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Before engineering begins

3 Before engineering begins ... 3-13 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

4 Creating a multiproject
4.1 Learning objectives
Learning objectives

• What are the components of a multiproject?

• What is the definition of projects and libraries?
• What are the options for the structure of a multiproject available for selection?
• How do I create a multiproject without a wizard?
• How do I customize the SIMATIC Manager?
• How do I create a multiproject with the PCS 7 wizard?
• How can I expand a multiproject and add more stations?
• How do I define the language in my multiproject?
• What are the options for multi-lingual work?
• How do I save my multiproject?
• How can I open an archived multiproject for editing?
• What are the tasks of the master data library?
• How do I fill the master data library?

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

4 Creating a multiproject 4-1 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

OverviewOverview
4.2 of the configuration steps
of the configuration steps for AS and OS

Configure the hardware Assign hardware

Select a block library or create Test / commission
(SIMATIC Manager, component resources
a project-specific library (configuration tools)
view, HW Config) (SIMATIC Manager)

AS
Configuration 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
steps

Create multiproject. Create plant hierarchy. Configure software. (CFC,

(SIMATIC Manager) (SIMATIC Manager, plant SFC, messages, archive
view) tags)

Create hardware resources: PC Compile OS

Make basic settings in the Test / commission
stations (SIMATIC Manager, (SIMATIC Manager)
WinCC Explorer (configuration tools)
Component view)

OS
Configuration 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
steps

Configure the hardware Insert picture objects (SIMATIC Individual objects (Editors in
(SIMATIC Manager, Manager, plant view or process WinCC Explorer: OS Project
component view, HW Config) object view) Editor, Graphics Designer, etc.)

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

References
See [103] PCS 7 V9.1 Engineering System, section 9.1 for an overview of the configuration
tasks.
See [104] PCS 7 V9.1 Operator Station - Configuration Manual, sections 4.1-4.3 for an
Manual overview of configuring the OS.

4 Creating a multiproject 4-2 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

4.3 SIMATIC PCS 7 engineering software

SIMATIC Manager is the central component of the STEP 7 programming and configuration
software for STEP 7 applications. It combines with additional tools and options to form the
SIMATIC PCS 7 Engineering Toolset.
Use of the SIMATIC PCS 7 engineering software is the only possible and reliable way to
program and configure SIMATIC PCS 7.
The functionality of the engineering system is largely covered by the standard engineering
software. The following software options are additionally available for special functions:
• SIMATIC PCS 7 Logic Matrix
• SIMATIC Version Cross Manager
• SIMATIC Version Trail
• SIMATIC PCS 7 Plant Automation Accelerator
• SIMATIC PCS 7 Import/Export Assistant
• SIMATIC PDM Process Device Manager for SIMATIC PCS 7
• Engineering Process Safety
• SIMATIC PCS 7 Maintenance Station
• SIMATIC Route Control Engineering
• SIMATIC PCS 7 TeleControl OS Engineering
• SIMATIC PCS 7 PowerControl OS
• S7-PLCSIM for the functional testing of CFC/SFC programs
SIMATIC PCS 7 engineering software

Technological Automation Engineering for discontinuous

function blocks engineering batch processes Path control

SIMATIC PCS 7 Engineering

Plant SIMATIC
Graphics SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC
Libraries Automation HW Config CFC / SFC Route
Designer BATCH F Systems PDM
Accelerator Control

SIMATIC Manager
General database

Engineering for network / OS Engineering for safety Field device parameter

communication / hardware engineering applications assignment

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

4 Creating a multiproject 4-3 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Plant Automation Accelerator

The PAA expands the functionality for the plant configuration and documentation. For more
efficient plant engineering, the PAA supports quotation preparation with a plant topology
diagram and the bills of materials. It also supports automatic generation of SIMATIC PCS 7 data
from electrical and functional engineering plans.
If planning tools from other manufacturers were used for electrical planning, this data can be
imported in Microsoft Excel format with the help of signal or process tag lists – same as in the
predecessor Advanced Engineering System (AdvES).
The PAA is thus the enhanced successor of the PCS 7 Advanced Engineering System. It offers
the same functionalities and, in addition, serves as a project execution and documentation tool.

References
See [103] PCS 7 V9.1 Engineering System, section 8.7 for more information on PCS 7
applications and how to use them.
Manual

4 Creating a multiproject 4-4 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

4.4 Projects and libraries

Similarities and differences
4.4.1 Similarities and differences

Common features of projects and libraries

Library X
• They are an organized set of data.
• They are stored in one directory including files and subdirectories.

Project B • This is how the management is performed using the SIMATIC

Manager and its tools.
Project A

Library Y Differences between projects and libraries

Library Z • Projects contain the data for at least one station (application-
specific programmable/configurable devices).
• Libraries contain pre-defined functions for use in projects.

Stations in
4.4.2 a PCS 7in
Stations project
a PCS 7 project
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

Distributed I/O Distributed I/O

AS AS
(S7-410-5H) (S7-413-3)

Automation systems (AS)

ES OS OS
(PC station (PC station (PC station with
with with WinCC) WinCC)
engineering
software)

Stations in Engineering system Operator System

SIMATIC PCS 7 (ES) (OS)

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

In a SIMATIC PCS 7 project, a station can be:

• A PC (SIMATIC PC station) used for engineering or operator control
• An automation system (SIMATIC 400 station)

4 Creating a multiproject 4-5 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

4.4.3 Various library types

Libraries are used for storing reusable program components. These program components can
Variousbe
library types
copied from an existing project to a library, or they are created independent of a project
directly in the library.

Standard installation of SIMATIC Downloadable Advanced Process

PCS 7 V9.1 previous versions Graphics Library PCS 7
of SIMATIC PCS 7 CEMAT
PCS 7 PCS 7 Advanced
Basic Library Process Library
Control Control Control
PCS 7
Industry Library
@System Driver Channel Customer-
AS blocks

specific
PCS 7 Library PCS 7 libraries
(standard)
Water Library
Drive ES Library
Faceplates/
block icons

SITRANS Library

The available program functions for creating an S7 program are the same for a library as for a
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject
project, with the exception of testing and debugging functions.
Libraries are organized in the same folder structure as a project:
Libraries can contain S7 programs. An S7 program contains exactly one "Blocks" folder, one
"Charts" folder, one "Sources" folder and one "Symbols" object (symbol table).
The "Sources" folder contains files with the source code of user-specific function blocks created
in various programming languages.

The PCS 7 standard library

The PCS 7 (standard) library has reached its last version with Version 7.1.3. As of PCS 7
version 8.0, it is no longer included in the system setup during installation.
Note Entry Download ID:: SIMATIC PCS 7 libraries updates

References
For more information on upgrading PCS 7 libraries, see
[208] PCS 7 Software update to V9.1 with utilization of new functions
Manual and [209] PCS 7 Software update to V9.1 without utilization of new functions

4 Creating a multiproject 4-6 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

4.4.4 Multiproject – The basic idea

Multiproject – The basic idea
Always use a multiproject for configuring with SIMATIC PCS 7. It integrates various user
projects and libraries:

Library X

Project B

Project A

Multiproject

Library Y Library Z

Multiproject Library X Y Z A B Project

Multiproject

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

At a minimum, a PCS 7 multiproject consists of one user project and one library (the master
data library), but it can also contain more than one project and library.
SIMATIC Manager shows all the components of a multiproject in a tree structure:
Multiproject – Basic elements

Multiproject

AS stations Controller S7 program User projects

SIMATIC PC station Chart folder

(here: ES/OS)

HMI components

Project library
(Green book)

Master data library

(Blue book)

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

4 Creating a multiproject 4-7 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

4.5 Creating a multiproject

Organization
4.5.1 of a multiproject
Organization of a multiproject

Each individual project contains at

Multiproject with project-specific structure
least one AS or one OS or all AS
Project 01 Project 99 Master data and OS that a configuration
library engineer is to work on.
AS ES/OS AS

Multiproject with station-granular structure Here, all AS and OS are stored

separately (granularly) in a
Project 01 Project 02 Project 99 Master data separate project.
library
AS ES/OS AS

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

• Project-specific structure:
Each individual project contains at least one AS or one OS or all AS and OS that a
configuring engineer is to work on.
• Station-specific structure:
In contrast to the project-specific structure, all AS and OS here are stored separately in their
own projects.

Distributed engineering
Multiprojects offer a major advantage: The individual projects can be distributed among different
project team members and worked on by them. The computers used can be regarded as a
distributed engineering system.
PCS 7 provides the corresponding system functions for managing, distributing and merging the
projects. The projects can remain in the multiproject or be removed for the duration of the work.

Note Distribution of the multiproject on a station-specific basis, i.e. one user project per station, is
generally recommended in PCS 7. This provides the maximum flexibility during the
configuration/commissioning phase.
This applies in particular to automation systems and the OS server. The stations for OS
clients can also be created in a user project.

References
See [103] PCS 7 V9.1 Engineering System, section 7.3 for more details.

Manual

4 Creating a multiproject 4-8 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

4.5.2 Creating a multiproject "step by step"

Although use of the wizard is the recommended and most efficient method of creating a
multiproject, you must also be able to individually create components of a multiproject in
SIMATIC Manager in order, for example, to add subprojects or stations to an existing
multiproject.
The "New Project" dialog is available for creating an empty multiproject:
Creating a multiproject manually – The "New Project" dialog
"New Project" dialog

3 2

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

1. Open the corresponding tab to create a new user project, library or multiproject.
2. If you have selected the "User project", "Libraries" or "Multiprojects" tab, the correct object
type is preset by default. However, you can change the object type using the list field. The
new object is then added in the appropriate tab.
3. Enter the name of the new user project, library or multiproject here. Do not use lengthy
names. You can also select and edit an existing name from the list located above.
4. The storage location of the new project, library or multiproject is displayed here.

4 Creating a multiproject 4-9 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Creating a new user project

You can create a new empty user project in the multiproject by selecting the current multiproject
Creating ainmultiproject
SIMATIC Manager
manually – Creating
and selecting theamenu command:
new user project
"File > Multiproject > Create in Multiproject..."

The "New Project" dialog is displayed again but without the "Multiproject" tab. An empty user
project is created in the multiproject and you can add stations to the user project in a later step.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

Creating a multiproject manually – Inserting existing user projects

Inserting existing user projects

The "New Project" or "Insert into Multiproject…" dialog is typically used for integrating additional
AS/ES/OS user projects in a basic multiproject that was created beforehand with the PCS 7
"New Project" wizard.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

4 Creating a multiproject 4-10 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
Creating a multiproject manually – Inserting project components
Inserting project components

Empty AS station, configurable in

HW Config.

Empty PC station, configurable as

ES and/or OS in HW Config

Subnet object for plant bus and

fieldbus

Expand project with the PCS 7

wizard

Shared declarations are

enumerations, units, equipment
properties
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

A project is divided into stations. These can be AS stations and/or PC stations that serve as an
ES, OS server, OS clients, etc. The stations contain the configuration information.

Note A PCS 7 multiproject should always contain a PC station as an engineering system (ES).
Never directly select "OS" or "OS (client)" from the "Insert New Object" menu in the SIMATIC
Manager. OS servers, OS clients and all other OS station types are always inserted as PC
station.

In addition, each project requires network information that will be provided via subnet objects.
Networks are configured with the HW Config and NetPro tools.

Note Subnet objects are required for configuring the plant bus and fieldbus. By contrast, information
on the terminal bus is not configured in SIMATIC Manager.

Shared declarations contain information about enumerations, units and equipment properties
that will be used in the PCS 7 project.
You can use enumerations to define textual representatives for parameter values in block and
chart I/Os with the possible data types "BOOL", "BYTE", "INT", "DINT", "WORD" and
"DWORD".
Several values can be assigned to each enumeration.
Equipment properties are parameters of a unit, e.g. jacket material, volume. The type of an
equipment property is defined as a "shared declaration". Instances of this type are individually
adapted in SIMATIC BATCH and its attributes.

4 Creating a multiproject 4-11 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

4.5.3 PCS 7 "New Project" wizard

The "New Project" wizard provides step-by-step support for creating a new project and includes
preassigned default settings. The PCS 7 wizard automatically creates various objects according
to the default settings or the settings you make specifically.
The following figures provide an overview of each step of the wizard for creating a new PCS 7
multiproject:
PCS 7 "New Project" wizard – Starting the wizard
1. Start the PCS 7 "New Project" wizard in SIMATIC Manager.
Click "Next" to continue step-by-step…

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

Note The "System ID" of the multiproject is reproduced in all subprojects.

The "System ID" is a unique key for identifying a particular PCS 7 system based on the end
customer, location, plant and production unit. It remains unchanged over the service life of
the PCS 7 system. It is linked to all offers, orders, service agreements, etc.

2. Select the CPU type you need in the project and then one of the associated bundles.
The list shows detailed information on the selected CPU.
PCS 7 "New Project" wizard
If you cannot – Selecting
find your exact CPU,ayou
bundle and
can edit theCPU MLFBconfiguration data later in the
inaccurate
HW configuration.

AS 410 - 1H CPU used singly

AS 410 - 2H CPU used redundantly

Youofcan
Merging / configuration use the "Find" button to search for a desired MLFB number (order number).
AS bundles: With
• Online via the catalog
"Number of communication
of Siemens Industry Mall: modules", you specify the number of PROFIBUS CPs.
[Link]

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

4 Creating a multiproject 4-12 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC
PCS 7 "New Project" wizard – Plant PCS and
hierarchy 7 System Course
OS objects
3. Specify the depth of the plant hierarchy.

Select the desired configuration objects for AS and OS. If you want to create an OS object in
your multiproject, you must also select its type (the basic architecture).

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

Note All created stations (automation systems and OS stations) are placed in one user project
because the automatically created multiproject always consists of just one user project.
If this multiproject structure does not meet your requirements, it is recommended not to select
any OS object. If you do not select an OS object, the resulting multiproject contains no PC
station.
In subsequent steps, you can add additional user projects and the stations within these user
projects to the multiproject.
PCS 7 "New Project" wizard – Storage location

4. Name the new multiproject ("Directory name") and select the storage location.

When you click "Finish", the wizard creates a multiproject containing an AS station, an OS
station (if selected) and a master data library. The wizard automatically creates the necessary
project structures so that you can start immediately on the actual engineering of the plant.

Note The wizard does not automatically create the subnet object for Industrial Ethernet. You must
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject
insert it yourself before you can configure the assignment of networks and addresses with
other tools:
Right-click project > Insert New Object > Industrial Ethernet

4 Creating a multiproject 4-13 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

4.5.4 Setting the master data library

Specify one library as the master data library in a PCS 7 multiproject.

If you used the PCS 7 "New Project" wizard to create a multiproject, the master data library was
created automatically.
The master data library contains the specific standards valid for the multiproject and permits a
central update of the following information for the multiproject:
• Block types
• SFC types
• Shared declarations

Master data library – Filling with block types

Filling of the master data library with block types

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

5. Open the desired PCS 7 library (in this example, the APL).
6. Enable the detailed view to have the symbolic names and other details of the blocks in the
library displayed.
7. Copy the needed blocks of all libraries used for the configuration to the block folder of the
master data library. Remember to transfer the blocks that are called as multi-instances of
other blocks into the master data library.

4 Creating a multiproject 4-14 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

4.5.5 Expansion of multiprojects

The PCS 7 wizard creates a basic configuration that you can expand with additional objects
based on the requirements of the plant. You can use the same dialogs that were previously
described in the section for creating a multiproject "step by step" for the expansion.
– Create in Multiproject... (other user projects or libraries)
– Insert into Multiproject... (other user projects or libraries)
– Insert New Object… (stations, subnets, shared declarations)
The PCS 7 "Expand Project" wizard is also available.

Expansion of a project with the PCS 7 wizard "Expand Project"

The PCS 7 "Expand Project" wizard uses some of the same steps as the "New Project" wizard.
Expansion 1.
of aAdd
project
an ASwith the (if
station PCS 7 wizard "Expand Project" – Adding an AS
needed).

If no AS stations
are inserted

Select station similar to the

"New Project" wizard

Expansion of a project with the PCS 7 wizard "Expand Project" – Adding an OS

2. Add an OS (single station and multiple station systems, including redundant)
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

Plant hierarchy and charts are not affected

by this wizard

OS selection similar to
"New Project" wizard

3. The storage location is displayed but cannot be changed.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

4 Creating a multiproject 4-15 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

References
For more information on expanding a multiproject, see also:
[103] PCS 7 V9.1 Engineering System, section 9.4.4 for inserting empty projects.
[121] PCS 7 Compendium Part A – Configuration Guidelines, section 5.4 for integrating other
Manual ES/OS projects.
[103] PCS 7 V9.1 Engineering System, section 7.2.2 for inserting pre-configured stations.

4.5.6 Multiproject-wide synchronization of information

It is typically necessary to update multiproject-wide information when projects/libraries are

added to a multiproject or after subnets are inserted.

Mergingsubnets
Merging subnets/ cross-project
/ cross-project connections
connections

Logical "Total network": Represents the common

properties of all of the assigned subnets. 3

Merged and therefore cross-project networks have the same subnet type and identical S7
subnet IDs. They are represented in NetPro by the name extension "Part of: Ethernet
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

Interproject".
References
See [103] PCS 7 V9.1 Engineering System, section 9.13.8 for more information on cross-
project networking.
Readme
Synchronizing shared declarations
Synchronizing shared declarations
Best practice: Manage the shared declarations in the
master data library and export them to the projects within
the multiproject

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

4 Creating a multiproject 4-16 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

LanguageLanguage
4.6 for display devices
for display devices

Select the languages for the display devices in an early phase of configuring.
When the OS is compiled, the texts to be displayed on the OS (for example, measured values,
operator input limits, units and operator texts of the blocks) are transferred to the OS in the
selected
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN languages.
| Creating a multiproject

You can select several languages from the list of available languages for your project and
define one of them as the default language.
If you have not selected the desired language, the message texts are transferred to the wrong
column of a text library and do not appear in process mode.

Note This setting always relates to individual projects and libraries within a multiproject and must be
made for each project and library individually!

4 Creating a multiproject 4-17 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

4.7 PCS 7 project backup

Archiving a multiproject
Archiving a multiproject

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

• Back up data:
– At least once a day
– After every download of the AS (complete download and changes only)
– After configuration changes
– Before and after an upgrade of system components
– Before and after an update of configuration software (PCS 7)
• Keep at least the last three versions of your PCS 7 project to hand as backup copy.
• Use different backup media for archiving your data. You can then restore your data even if
one device fails.
– LAN hard disk
– USB hard disk
– MOD
– CD/DVD
• You can also back up your data on hard disks of PCs in the network. A simultaneous hard
disk failure on two PCs is very unlikely.
• If necessary, perform a readback of parameters from the CPU before archiving.
• A new subdirectory is created in the selected directory, and the entire project directory
structure of the unpacked multiproject is transferred to the new subdirectory.

4 Creating a multiproject 4-18 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
Retrieving a multiproject
Retrieving a multiproject

The multiproject is retrieved in the destination directory with an additional subdirectory. The
system derives the name of this subdirectory from the multiproject name (this prevents an
existing
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN multiproject
| Creating a multiproject of the same name from being overwritten).

4 Creating a multiproject 4-19 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

4.8 Exercise and Checkpoints

4.8.1 Exercise: Multiproject

Task
Create a new multiproject as the starting point for the training.
• Use the PCS 7 wizard to create the multiproject.
– Bundle without additional communication modules
– Plant hierarchy with 4 levels
– No CFCs or SFCs
– OS as single station system
• Postprocessing:
– Rename objects
– Insert object for Industrial Ethernet as plant bus
– Include course library in the multiproject
– Setting the language for display devices

Procedure
1. Use the PCS 7 "New Project" wizard to create a multiproject. Follow the instructions of the
wizard and keep the following information in mind.
– For the AS, use a bundle without additional communication module CP443-5.
– Select 4 levels for the plant hierarchy.
– Do not allow any CFCs or SFCs to be inserted.
– Select a single-station system as the OS object.
– The multiproject gets the directory name Johnsson_xx (xx corresponds to the first
letters of your name).
– Click "Finish" on the last page of the wizard to create the multiproject. The software
requires a few minutes for this.
2. Show all levels of your multiproject
3. Rename the following objects:
– SIMATIC 400 station: ASxx
– S7 program folder of the AS: ASxx_program
– SIMATIC PC station: ESxx
– Project folder OS(1): OSxx (the process requires a few seconds until the change is
applied)
– S7 program folder of the master data library: LIBxx_Program
4. Retrieve the "Course Library V ..." library into the pre-defined storage location.
5. Insert the additional library into the multiproject.
6. Delete the network "MPI(1)". It is not required. You can find it in the folder of the user
project.
7. Add an object for Industrial Ethernet in the user project "Johnsson_xx_Prj", which you
rename to "Plant bus".
8. Select "English and German" as the language for display devices both for the project and
for both libraries. English is the default language.

4 Creating a multiproject 4-20 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Result
You have created a multiproject with a user project, a master data library and a course library.
The user project contains an AS and an ES/OS. The master data library is empty for the time
being, but will be filled from the standard libraries and from the course library in the course of
the training.

4 Creating a multiproject 4-21 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

What is the advantage

4.8.2 of using the PCS 7 "New Project" wizard?
Checkpoints

What is the advantage of using the PCS 7 "New Project" wizard?

A. The first run creates a multiproject with a project and the master
data library.
B. Bundles or pre-configured stations can be inserted both on the AS
side and on the OS side.
C. Multiproject, single project and master data library are located in the
same subdirectory.
D. The PCS 7 "New Project" wizard has no advantages at all.

What are the possibilities and constraints of creating PCS 7 projects in multiple
languages
What arefrom the start? and constraints of creating PCS 7 projects in multiple languages from the
the possibilities
start?
A. If PCS 7 is installed in multiple languages, up to 5 project
languages can be selected in the SIMATIC Manager.
B. A project can only be created in one language at a time.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject
C. Depending on the selected project language, the corresponding
message texts are generated during OS compiling.
D. If a selected language is removed from a project, all display texts in
this language are lost in the project.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating a multiproject

4 Creating a multiproject 4-22 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5 Configuration of stations and networks

Learning objectives
5.1 Learning objectives

• You are familiar with the tools for configuring stations

• You can configure a PC station

• You can configure an automation system

• You will be able to configure the distributed I/O on the PROFIBUS

DP and PROFINET IO

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-1 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.2 Stations and networks of a PCS 7 system

Stations and
5.2.1 networks
Stations andof a PCS 7 system
networks of a PCS 7 system

OS client OS client OS client

Terminal bus

ES

OS server OS server

Plant bus

AS AS AS

Fieldbus

ET200 ET200 ET200

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

Different systems are available in PCS 7 which are connected to each other in different
networks.

The most important systems are:

• Engineering station (ES)
• Automation systems (AS)
• Distributed I/O (e.g. ET 200)
• Operator Station server (OS server)
• Operator Station clients (OS client)

Loading the configuration data of the automation systems as well as the communication
between AS and OS servers takes place on the plant bus.
The configuration of PC stations as well as the communication between OS servers and
OS clients takes place on the terminal bus.
The fieldbus connects the automation systems with the distributed I/O.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-2 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course
Configuring and parameter assignment
5.2.2 Configuring and parameter assignment

ES
01 IE General [Link] Plant network
00-0C-29-5E-83-97

01 CP 1623 [Link] Plant network

00-1B-1B-16-23-12
OS server
02 WinCC application Software module

01 PS 407 4A Power supply

02 CPU 410E PIP1 … PIP15 CPU

AS
DP 2 Fieldbus (PROFIBUS)

PN-IO-X5 [Link] Plant network

PN-IO-X8 [Link] Fieldbus (PROFINET)

The term "configuring" refers to arranging racks, modules, distributed IO devices and interface
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

modules in the hardware configuration of the SIMATIC Manager.

Racks are represented through a configuration table in which individual modules of the station
are inserted.
"Parameterization" means setting properties and parameters, such as network addresses.
The data subsequently has to be transferred from the HW Config into the target stations.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-3 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Parameterization
5.2.3
in the classic STEP 7 way
Parameterization in the classic STEP 7 way

Programming device

PG/PC interface:
[Link].1 [Link].1
[Link].1 [Link].1

Intel LM CP1623
ISO TCPIP
TCPIP ISO TCPIP
TCPIP

PLCs

ISO TCP / IP ISO TCP/IP

In the conventional
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration way,
the "Set PG/PC interface" dialog on the programming device (PG) is
of stations and networks
used to select a defined communications module with which the PG can communicate with the
target station.
However, this "PG operation" requires a permanent manual adaptation of the "PG/PC interface"
if different target stations have to be parameterized.

Partial steps of the classic method

1. Configure the AS in the project on a programming device as a 1:1 image of the real, existing
hardware.
2. Connect the programming device to the AS and set the relevant PG/PC interface.
3. Download the configuration data to the AS.
4. Disconnect the programming device from the AS again.

The programming device and its PG/PC interface are not part of the project, it simply serves as
a "loading station".
The interface must be set individually for every connection type to be able to reach the relevant
station.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-4 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course
Parameterization of stations using the PCS 7-compliant method
5.2.4 Parameterization of stations using the PCS 7-compliant method

Engineering station PG/PC interface:

PC [Link].1

Softbus
Intel LM CP1623
ISO TCPIP ISO TCPIP

PLCs

ISO TCP/IP ISO TCP/IP

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

In a PCS 7-compliant configuration, the engineering station (ES) is part of the PCS 7 project
and the PG/PC interface is set to "PC [Link].1". This setting supports a "Configured
mode" of the real network cards of the computer.
In "Configured mode", no specific module is selected for communication but rather the virtual
module "Softbus".
The softbus corresponds to a centrally configurable interface that is loaded with project-specific
settings for all stations on the plant bus.
The settings are carried out on the ES in the PCS 7 multiproject and loaded into the PLC from
the ES.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-5 SITRAIN

Communication settings

SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.2.5 Communication settings

Communication settings

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

All communications modules available for PCS 7 on a station are listed there. The address of
these modules can be detected easily.
All access points and their assignment are shown clearly and can be changed.

References
See [102] PCS 7 V9.1 PC Configuration, section 5.7.7 for further details of using the SIMATIC
NET Configuration Console.
Manual

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-6 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

[Link] Setting the PG/PC interface PG/PC Schnittstelle

The interaction of your PC station with the various bus systems used to network the automation
systems (e.g. Industrial Ethernet, etc.) requires specialized interfaces. Each of the installed and
integrated interfaces is represented by a corresponding interface parameter set.
"PC [Link].1" is activated in the SIMATIC Manager via the following dialog: "Options >
Set PG/PC Interface...".
Subsequently, the selected interface is displayed in the status bar of the SIMATIC Manager.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-7 SITRAIN

C SHELL – Selection of the terminal bus
SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

[Link] Communication
SIMATIC SHELL – Selection settings
of the terminal bus

| SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

The configuration of the network cards that provide the connection to the terminal bus is
performed solely using Windows tools.
The PC stations can, however, have multiple network cards with the TCP/IP protocol. Therefore,
you must inform PCS 7 which network card is responsible for the connection to the terminal bus.
This is done by using the SIMATIC Shell application. You can perform the settings by means of
the SIMATIC NET communication settings or Windows Explorer.
Select the communications module for the connection to the terminal bus through which you will
configure the PC stations.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-8 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Configuration of stations
5.2.6 Configuration of stations

Station Configuration Editor Engineering station Automation system

Download to
station (1:1
mapping)

Fieldbus
Plant bus

Hardware configuration in the PCS 7 project

Download to
station (1:1
mapping) Distributed I/O

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

Inserting your own PC station for the ES

A configuration must be created for every AS or PC station used in a PCS 7 project. The ES
itself is part of the PCS 7 project and the stations networked in it.
Configuration of the stations:
• Create a 1:1 mapping of the real, existing hardware for all stations in the project.
• The configuration is created "slot-compliant": The AS hardware is structured in slots of a
rack. Every slot can be occupied by hardware components (e.g. power supply, CPU, CPs).
The properties of the components in a slot can be as follows: Type, addresses, etc.
• Since there are no real slot-related components in a PC station, a slot structure analogous to
an AS rack is simulated in the Station Configuration Editor of the PC station.
• The hardware description of a PC station therefore has to be stored at 2 different locations:
In the Station Configuration Editor of the PC station and in the HW Config of the PCS 7
project.

Configuration of the networks and connections

• By configuring the hardware of the relevant station in the HW Config, you specify the
network assignment of the components capable of communication.
• The NetPro tool within the SIMATIC Manager represents all configured stations and
connections of a project. All bus systems and stations are represented by separate symbols.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-9 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course
The configured
5.2.7 mode
The configured mode

Configured mode:
• Cooperation of PC [Link].1 and Station Configuration Editor
• No manual switchover of the access point necessary depending on the driver/protocol
internal

PCS 7 software
PC

S7 Online
Configuration

Softbus
Station
Editor

ISO TCP/IP ISO TCP/IP ISO TCP/IP

Intel LM Intel L CP1623

Plant bus 2
Plant bus 1
AS1 AS2 AS3
(ISO) (TCP/IP) (ISO)

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

"PC [Link].1" is a centrally configurable interface that is loaded with project-specific

settings for all stations on the plant bus. The settings are carried out on the ES in the PCS 7
multiproject and loaded from the ES.
As soon as "PC internal" is enabled, all network interfaces work in "Configured mode". Then no
specific module is used, but rather the virtual module "Softbus".

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-10 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course
Loading of stations
5.2.8 Loading of stations

Hardware configuration in the PCS 7 project

Download to Station Download Download to Station

Configuration Editor to station Configuration Editor

First download to ES Download to AS Download to OS server

In the first step the central ES must be loaded with all the information to be able to load the
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks
other stations of the PCS 7 project (AS and OS). The configuration data is checked when it is
loaded. As a requirement for successful loading, the PCS 7 project and the Station
Configuration Editor must have the same configuration information.

To this purpose, the Station Configuration Editor indicates information about the successful or
unsuccessful loading procedure.
After successful loading, the ES has access to the Industrial Ethernet network (IE) and therefore
access to all connected stations.
AS and PC stations (e.g. servers) can be reached via the CP of the ES and its network. The ES
received the information required for this via the PCS 7 project!
After successfully loading the ES, the AS hardware configuration can be downloaded to the AS
station. The configuration data is checked when it is loaded.
LEDs on the front of the CPU show status information about a successful/unsuccessful load
procedure.

5.2.9 The expansion of an ES to an ES/OS

Inserting an application for the OS into the PC station

Each PC station requires additional information about its purpose in a PCS 7 project (e.g. OS,
OS server or client, batch, etc.)
The required software component is represented by an object of the type "WinCC application"
and placed in a slot like a hardware component:
• In the "virtual rack" of the Station Configuration Editor on the local station,
• In the HW Config of the corresponding station in the PCS 7 project.

Note The following explanation can serve as an aid to help you understand:
The CPU of the AS requires a partner on the PC station: a "CPU of the visualization" for the
OS. This is the task of the "WinCC application". If you follow this analogy, the WinCC
application must be placed in a "slot" of the hardware configuration of the PC station like a
CPU in the real rack of the AS.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-11 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Specialized WinCC applications are available for the different types of PC station (OS, OS
server or client, batch, etc.).
ForDie
a single-user
ErweiterungOS, einer
for example,
ES zurthe WinCC–application is required.
ES/OS
Accordingly,
Einfügenifeiner
you also want to useinyour
Applikation dieES as a single-user OS (combined ES/OS), you need
PC-Station
to expand the configuration of your ES with a WinCC application for a single-user OS.

Configuration ©of networks

Siemens 2022 | SITRAINand connections
| Die Projektierung von Stationen und Netzen

Communication connections (for short: connections) must always be configured when data
exchange between automation systems themselves or between automation systems and a PC
station is necessary.
The figure above illustrates the relationship between communications partners:
• The "true communications partners" are the CPU of the AS on the one hand and the WinCC
application (see "CPU of the visualization") of the OS on the other. They are the end points
of a "logical connection" (→ red dots in the figure).
• The CPs are the physical interface to the network (> green line) and therefore the end points
of a "physical connection".
After the stations have been created and configured, the connections between the ES/OS
station and the automation system and between automation systems themselves can be
configured as a 1:1 image and downloaded to the stations involved just as when configuring a
station.

Note In terms of software, a connection is configured in NetPro and then downloaded to every
communications partner.
As long as the PC station is only used as an engineering station, it is adequate when it is
physically connected to the stations to be loaded. As soon as a PC has the function of an OS
single-user system or (redundant) server, a connection to the AS stations with which the OS
will communicate needs to be configured. Do not forget to download these connections on
both sides.

References
See [103] PCS 7 V9.1 Engineering System, section 9.10 for further details.

Manual

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-12 SITRAIN

Configuration steps of the PC station
SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.3 Configuration steps of the PC station

5.3.1 Basic configuration steps

Inserting a PC station in the Adding and parameterizing Saving and compiling the
SIMATIC Manager a network interface configuration

1 2 3 4 5 6

Opening HW Config Adding a Configuring and loading the

software application Station Configuration Editor

5.3.2 Determining and setting network addresses

Before starting the configuration, you require some relevant information with regard to the
network interfaces and network addresses.
In the PCS 7 project, only the network adapter for the plant bus (S7 protocol) must be
configured. At the terminal bus, communication takes place with the standard TCP/IP protocol
and does not have to be configured.
You can use a CP or a standard network card to communication on the plant bus. You can, for
Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

example, read the information of the network addresses with the software "Communication
Settings".

Determining network
[Link] addresses
Standard networkwith
card a standard network card

1. Open the "Communication Settings" program and, under "Modules", select the network card
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

which is connected to the plant bus.

2. The "Address" subfolder contains the MAC address (ISO protocol) and the IP address
(TCP/IP protocol).

Parameterization of the IP address takes place with Windows tools in the network settings.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-13 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

[Link] CP1623 or CP1628

A CP 16xx is not detected as the network adapter under Windows by default. During the
installation of SIMATIC NET, a virtual network adapter (NDIS) is set up with which the CP 16xx
is available as a Windows network card.
The CP 16xx therefore has two internal MAC or IP addresses for the following communication:
• Industrial Ethernet address for S7 communication
Determining/setting network addresses with a CP
• NDIS address for Windows communication

Industrial Ethernet (configured mode)

1 2

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

1. First select the CP in the communication settings and check whether the configured mode is
set at the CP.
2. In the "Address" folder, you can set the MAC address and the IP address for the Industrial
Ethernet.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-14 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Configuring an NDIS adapter

The standard "Network Driver Interface Specification (NDIS)" allows the operation of several
communications modules or simple network cards in a PC. In addition, it is also possible to use
several protocols on one communications module or network card.
The NDIS driver must be installed in the following cases:
• If the diagnostics of network components on the plant bus is to be monitored with a
Maintenance Station (MS).
A communications module is used in the PC of the Maintenance Station for access to the
plant bus.
• When an automation system in a SIMATIC PCS 7 BOX PC is to be downloaded with the aid
Address data of theofCP
an external
for theengineering
Windows station.
communication
A communications module is used in the engineering station for access to the plant bus.

Windows network (NDIS side)

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

The configuration of the SIMATIC Miniport CP1623 adapter takes place with Windows standard
resources in the network settings.

The TCP/IP addresses for the Industrial Ethernet and the NDIS side of a CP must not lie in
Note the same subnet.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-15 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

[Link] Network settings in Windows

You parameterize the settings of standard network cards or the SIMATIC Miniport CP1623
dows network parameters
adapter (NDIS address) in the network settings of Windows.

1 2

s 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

1. Switch to the Windows network settings. ("Settings > Network & Internet > Ethernet >
Change adapter options")
2. Open the properties of the network card which is connected to the plant bus.
3. You can modify the network addresses in the TCP/IPv4 settings.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-16 SITRAIN

Adding a PC station
SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.3.3 Adding a PC station

You have two options to create PC stations in the PCS 7 project:

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05creation
1. Manual Configuration of stations
(shortcut and networks
menu command: "Insert New Object > SIMATIC PC Station")
2. Start of the PCS 7 wizard (shortcut menu command: "Insert New Object > Preconfigured
Station...")

All PC stations in the project must be parameterized with the Windows computer name of the
PLC. This can deviate from the station name, if necessary.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-17 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Renaming the PC station

Name the PC station after the computer name.

en
This takes place for all PC stations. The name of a PC station must be identical to the station
name in the Station Configuration Editor which in turn is preset with the real computer name.
To do this, you can enable the option "Computer name identical to PC station name" in the
object properties of the PC station, so that you only have to make the necessary entries,
reducing the risk of errors.
A yellow arrow appears on the icon of your PC station in the SIMATIC Manager indicating the
capability of your ES to establish a connection to the plant bus via the "PC internal" interface.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-18 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.3.4 Modules and software modules

Modules andOpen
software modules
the hardware configuration for the ES.

5 4

1 3
2

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

In the hardware configuration, you configure the network interfaces and the software modules of
the system.
1. Rack of the PC station
2. Configured modules
3. Hardware catalog
4. Properties of the network interface
5. Saving and compiling the hardware configuration

All relevant components for the configuration can be found in the catalog. The filter "PCS7_V91"
must be activated, so that only modules which were released for PCS 7 V9.1 are displayed.
Required modules, e.g. network interfaces such as the CP1623 or IE general, can be found in
the hardware catalog and placed in the rack of the PC station.
The software modules determine the function of the PC station.

The most important ones are:

• HMI > WinCC Appl. -> OS Server / OS Single Station
▪ HMI > WinCC Appl. (Stby) -> OS Server Stand by (with redundant design)
• HMI > WinCC App. Client -> OS Client
• Archive > Process Historian Appl. -> Long-term archive server
• BATCH > BATCH Appl. -> Batch processes
▪ PDM > PDM Appl. -> Management of intelligent field devices

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-19 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

The following components have to be inserted for the combined engineering and operator
station with a single network connection:
• A network interface for Industrial Ethernet (a CP16xx or "IE general") for the plant bus. In
addition, this must be supplied with the correct addresses and network assignments.
• A WinCC application.
You can select the slot freely (see "Index" column) since this only involves a "virtual rack" of
your PC.
At the same position as in the Station Configuration Editor in HW Config, an Industrial Ethernet
interface (CP16xx or IE general) for the plant bus must be inserted and supplied with the correct
addresses and network assignments.

Parameterizing the Station Configuration Editor

5.3.5 Parameterizing the Station Configuration Editor

The Station Configuration Editor of the ES must be configured so that the ES has access to the
Industrial Ethernet network and thus also to all connected devices. This can be done manually,
orConfiguration
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 by transferring the configuration from the HW Config.
of stations and networks

Configuration is performed in two steps:

1. Configuring (shortcut menu command: "PLC > Configure…"). The hardware and software
modules are "plugged" into the rack of the PC station.
2. Downloading (shortcut menu command: "PLC > Download"). The configured data from the
HW Config is loaded into the PLC (Station Configuration Editor).

Note In the event of connection problems, check the communication settings (see section 5.2.5).

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-20 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.3.6 Configuring and loading the PLC

As of PCS 7 V7.0, the function "Configure PLC" provides a convenient way to configure PC
stations. You no longer need to edit the configuration twice (in the project on the ES and in the
Station Configuration Editor of the local station).
Important requirements are, however:
• The PCS 7 software is installed on the station to be configured,
• The station to be configured must be reachable in the network via the terminal bus.
Configuring and loading the PLC

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-21 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.4 Exercise and checkpoint

5.4.1 Exercise: Hardware configuration of the PC station

Task
Configure the SIMATIC PC station of your ES both in the project and in the Station
Configuration Editor.
Notes:
• Note the network adapter used in the PC.
Ensure that the network addresses and subnet masks are correct.
• Please use the "Communication settings" application.

Procedure
1. Deactivate the "Computer name identical with PC station name" option in the properties of
your SIMATIC PC station and insert the Windows computer name.
2. Check the communication settings for the modules used in your computer. Which goes on
the plant bus and which on the terminal bus?
See section: 5.3.2 Determining and setting network addresses
3. In the component view of the SIMATIC Manager, the hardware configuration of your PC
station is already equipped with a WinCC application.
4. From the hardware catalog, insert a used Ethernet interface module in this hardware
configuration and network it with the plant bus already created.
5. Save and compile the HW configuration.
6. Configure and download the Station Configuration Editor.
7. Check the result in the Station Configuration Editor.

Result
The PC station is configured and loaded. As an ES/OS, it can either be used for engineering or
Result later as an OS for operator control and monitoring.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-22 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.4.2 Checkpoint
Which additional components can you insert in a PC station?
Which additional components can you insert in a PC station?
A. If the PC station was created with the wizard, I cannot
add further components.
B. For the connection to the plant bus, I can insert a
network card CP16xx or an onboard card.
C. I can insert an "Application" component.
D. If the PC station is to operate as an OS client, I only
need to insert the WinCC Appl Client locally in the
Station Configuration Editor.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-23 SITRAIN

Configuration steps for AS SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.5 Configuration steps of the AS station in the project

5.5.1 Basic configuration steps

Inserting a preconfigured
Configuring object properties Saving and compiling
station in the SIMATIC
of CPU and CP the configuration
Manager

1 2 3 4 5 6

Downloading configuration
Opening HW Config Inserting and configuring
to AS (if applicable, fully
distributed stations
reset AS memory)

5.5.2 Adding an automation system

When you create an automation system, you require a SIMATIC 400 station with a power
supply, a CPU and an Ethernet communications processor (can be omitted when you use a
CPU with an integrated Ethernet interface).
Adding an automation system
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

3
1

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

You have two options to create automation systems in the PCS 7 project: manually or by means
of the PCS 7 wizard.
1. Manual creation (shortcut menu command: "Insert New Object > SIMATIC 400 Station")
2. Start of the PCS 7 wizard (shortcut menu command: "Insert New Object > Preconfigured
Station...")
3. Selection and preview of a preconfigured station
During manual creation of the station, you have to configure the rack as well as all existing
modules independently. It is significantly more efficient to configure a preconfigured station.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-24 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.5.3 Editing of the hardware configuration of an AS station

Opening the HW Config of an AS station

To open HW Config, select the object of the relevant AS station in the component view of the
SIMATIC Manager.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-25 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Opening theOpening
HW Config of the
an ASHW Config
station of an AS station
1 2 3

7 6
5

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

1. Switching over between the offline and online window
From HW Config, you can read out information from the module directly online (e.g.
diagnostics information).
2. Saving and compiling
After configuration and parameter assignment of the components, the hardware
configuration can be saved and compiled.
3. Downloading to the station
After compiling, the data can be downloaded to the station.
4. Station window
Here, you place the racks for the station setup. It also contains the objects for the
distributed I/O systems and field devices as well as the required bus systems (master
systems).
5. Hardware catalog window
Here, select the required hardware components e.g. racks, modules and interface modules.
6. Object for a distributed I/O system
7. Configuration tables
The racks are represented by a configuration table that permits the insertion of a specified
number of plug-in modules, like "real" racks.

The configuration of an AS station must include all really plugged in components and modules.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-26 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Working with the hardware catalog

IfWorking with
the "Hardware thewindow
Catalog" hardware catalog
is not displayed, select the menu command
View > Catalog.

1
2

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

Main components:
1. Input options in the Find box.
– You can enter any text, information text, catalog entries or order numbers in the Find
field. No distinction is made between upper and lower case text.
– Wildcards (*, ?;...) are supported.
– You can also enter parts of a full search term (e.g. 331).
2. Using the "Profile" drop-down list, you can set different catalog profiles. The profiles allow
you to adapt the hardware catalog individually to suit your requirements. Use a profile with
modules permitted in PCS 7.
3. Object for the required module (in this case with firmware version).
4. Detailed description of the selected module.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-27 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Versions
Many modules are available in different versions (often the firmware version).
During operation of a system in the course of maintenance, you may be forced to replace an
older module with a new one with a higher version. In this case, the old module remains
configured in HW Config and the new module is plugged in.
Consistency check when saving and compiling
Consistency check when saving and compiling

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

With PCS 7 version V9.1, the protection level of the CPU is set to "3: Read/write protection" by
default. Since no password has been assigned yet, you will receive an error message from the
consistency check.
Here you can switch to the lower protection level "1: Access protection for F CPU or keyswitch
setting".

Downloading
If this check has run without errors, the blocks required for the communication of the process
data are created without the user taking any action and can then be downloaded to the AS.
The AS then has all the information necessary to check whether the real setup corresponds to
the configured setup.
Numerous precautionary measures, invisible to the user, are taken for the error situation, for
example automatic sending of suitable alarms and interrupts.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-28 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.5.4 The parameter assignment of the CPU

PCS 7 uses optimized default settings for a CPU so that only a few parameters have to be
adapted
Parameterizing to the project
properties of thecircumstances.
CPU

• Information on the CPU

• Setting the CPU startup mode: Warm restart

• No acknowledgment-triggered reporting
• Time synchronization

• Cycle times for cyclic interrupt OB

• Configuring the process image partitions

• OB85 call for I/O access errors

• Setting the size of the process image

• H-specific parameters for fault-tolerant

systems

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

In the startup properties, this depends particularly on the enabled setting for "Warm restart".
Note As a result of this setting, the current process parameters are not reset to their initial values
on startup.
Startup properties

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-29 SITRAIN

ation of the process image partitions for cyclic interrupts
SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.5.5 Configuration of the process image partitions for cyclic interrupts

In PCS 7, it is important that process signals in a specific cycle are processed synchronously
with the module to be read. To achieve this, the same process image partition as the module to
be read in must be assigned to the processing cyclic interrupt OB.

TRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

1. In the properties of the CPU, you assign the process image partitions to the cyclic interrupt
OB.

Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between the operating system and the user
program. OBs are called from the operating system and control cyclic and interrupt-driven
program execution, the startup behavior of the automation system, and the handling of errors.
Start events triggering an organization block call are known as interrupts. Cyclic interrupts
interrupt the free cyclic program processing OB1 at specified intervals. They are represented by
OB30 – OB38. OBs also decide the order of the processing of individual parts of the program.
The processing of an OB can be interrupted by calling another OB (depends on the priority).
Before each program execution cycle, the CPU loads the signal states of the input modules into
a memory, the process image input (PII). Due to the PII, the signal state of the inputs remains
constant during program execution within a cycle. During execution of the user program, a
process output image PIQ is created. On completion of a cycle, the signal states of the PIQ are
written to the output modules.
Since, however, it cannot be certain in program execution within a cyclic interrupt that the PII
was updated at the start of every cyclic interrupt or the PIQ at the end of every cyclic interrupt, it
is necessary to assign separate process image partitions to the cyclic interrupts used.

Note In process automation with PCS 7, the use of cyclic interrupts (OB 30 - 38) and the assignment
of process image partitions is important.
The process image partitions are required during configuration of the signal modules while the
configured automation functions are "integrated" in the organization blocks responsible for the
cyclic interrupts with the aid of runtime properties.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-30 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.5.6
Configuring Configuring
the network the network connection
connection

3 4

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

In the hardware configuration, all modules which were also created by the wizard are contained
in the catalog. If necessary, you can add new modules to the station or exchange or delete
available modules.
For the AS, you first need to configure the network interface which is connected to the plant bus.
You have the option to use an integrated interface of the CPU or the interface of an additional
CP. Note, however, that not all interfaces support communication via the ISO protocol.

1. Selection of the interface which is connected to the plant bus.

2. Configuration of the network address and selection of the plant bus.
3. Saving and compiling the HW Config.
4. Downloading the configuration to the station.

Note Depending on the interface being used, the input boxes in the properties dialog may differ.

The device name is not relevant if the module is only used for the plant bus.
The connection to the plant bus is made by selecting the relevant subnet object in the properties
of the Ethernet CP.
When a multiproject is created with the wizard, this does not contain a subnet object for
Industrial Ethernet by default. You can, however, create the required subnet in the properties of
the Ethernet interface.
On a plant bus operated with the ISO protocol, each MAC address may only be used once.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-31 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course
Downloading the hardware configuration
5.5.7 Downloading the hardware configuration

1 2
3

4 5

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

1. In HW Config, execute a "Save and Compile". No errors should be reported.

2. Start downloading with the "Download to Module" button.
3. Certain configuration changes can be made in RUN mode using CiR. Processing is stopped
for a maximum of 60 ms.

When using a CPU 410 in single mode as of firmware version V8.2 you obtain this selection
dialog as default when downloading.
To be able to make system modifications during operation with CiR, however, further hardware
or firmware requirements must be met.

Note In some situations, it is possible to download the hardware configuration during operation
(CPU in RUN). To find out which configuration changes you can make in RUN (CiR), refer to
the section "Final steps in configuration" of our course.

References
See [513] PCS 7 CPU 410-5H Process Automation - System Manual, section 11.1 for more
information on the hardware or firmware requirements for a system change during operation
Manual with CiR.

4. The target module is the CPU. Confirm your entries with "OK".
5. Select the desired communication protocol for the download operation (only possible when
you have enabled both TCP/IP and ISO in the properties of the Ethernet interface).

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-32 SITRAIN

 Downloading the hardware configuration
SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

6 7

6. The dialog box appears when you want to download a configuration or when you want to
delete system data on the target module and at least one of the following online-offline
differences has been detected:
– The configured target module does not match the module that is plugged in; this can be
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks
recognized by the different order number online and offline.
– The configured target module is newer than the module that is plugged in; this can be
recognized by the different operational status/firmware version online and offline.
– Configured station name, module name or configured plant designation or location
identifier are different online and offline.
7. The download begins but is interrupted if the CPU is still in Run mode…
8. Confirm with "OK" if you accept that the CPU changes to Stop. The download is then
resumed.
9. After downloading is complete, you can switch the CPU back to Run. Confirm this with the
"Yes" button.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-33 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.5.8 "Node initialization" as required

If the configured network addresses deviate from the network addresses of the PLC, the
respective procedure for the solution you are using should be checked:
– Usage of PLCSIM as AS
– Usage of a CP443-1 for the plant bus
– Usage of a CPU-internal Ethernet interface for the plant bus

Usage
Usage of of PLCSIM
PLCSIM as AS
1. Open PLCSIM.

Usage of PLCSIM
When PLCSIM is opened, the PG/PC interface is automatically switched to
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks
[Link].1. You can check the setting via "Options > Set PG/PC Interface...".

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-34 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

2. Open the hardware configuration and perform the download. Download in STOP and select
Usage of PLCSIM
the desired CPU.

Usage of a CP443-1 for the plant bus

1. Open SIMATIC Manager.
2. Adjust the interface to ISO via the "Options > Set PG/PC interface..." menu. Make sure to
Usage of| SITRAIN
© Siemens 2022 a CP select443-1 for
stations the
the ofinterface
| 05 Configuration toplant
which bus
and networks your CP is connected.

3. In the "PLC" menu, select the "Edit Ethernet Node" command. The dialog is opened.
4. Click the "Browse" button and select your CP.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-35 SITRAIN

Usage of a CP 443-1 for the plantSIMATIC
bus PCS7 System Course

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

Usage of [Link] 443-1
Open for the plant
the hardware bus and perform the download. Download in STOP and select
configuration
the desired CPU. In the next dialog, you select the PLC and confirm the dialog.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

6. After downloading is complete, you can switch the CPU back to Run.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-36 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Usage of a CPU-internal Ethernet interface for the plant bus

1. Open SIMATIC Manager.
Usage of 2.
a CPU-internal Ethernet
Change the interface via theinterface
menu "Options > Set PG/PC Interface..." to TCPIP. Make sure
to select the interface to which your CPU is connected.

3. If you do not know the IP of your CPU or assign a new IP to the CPU, you can temporarily
modify IP addresses in the PCS 7. To do this, open the "Edit Ethernet Node" dialog via the
Usage of a CPU-internal
"PLC" menu. ClickEthernet
the "Browse"interface
button to have the accessible nodes displayed.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-37 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

4. You can use the "Flash" function to have the selected CPU flash and thus find your CPU.
When you have found your CPU, you can modify the IP address. With the button "Assign IP
Usage of a CPU-internal
Configuration",Ethernet interface
you temporarily assign your configured IP configuration to the CPU. To
change the IP address permanently, the configuration has to be loaded.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

Usage of a
5. CPU-internal Ethernet
Open the hardware interface
configuration and perform the download. Download in STOP and select
the desired CPU. In the next dialog, you select the PLC and confirm the dialog.

6. After downloading is complete, you can switch the CPU back to Run.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

When using a virtual machine (VM) in combination with hardware, remember to set the
Note network card of the VM to Bridged.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-38 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Changes to the system in runtime by means of CiR

Certain configuration changes can be made in RUN mode using CiR. Processing is stopped for
a maximum of 60 ms.
To be able to make system modifications during operation with CiR, however, further hardware
or firmware requirements must be met.

Note In some situations, it is possible to download the hardware configuration during operation
(CPU in RUN). To find out which configuration changes you can make in RUN (CiR), refer to
the section "Final steps in configuration" of our course.

References
See [513] PCS 7 CPU 410-5H Process Automation – System Manual Section 11.1 for more
information on the hardware or firmware requirements for a system change during operation
Manual with CiR.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-39 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.6 Exercise and checkpoint

Task
5.6.1 Exercise: Hardware configuration of the automation system
Configure the automation system and load the configuration into the PLC
Task
Configure the automation system and load the configuration into the PLC.

Note:
The softbus ("PC internal local") is not supported by PLCSIM. For this reason, a change to
the PG mode with access point "PLCSIM(TCP/IP)" takes place at this point. This is done
automatically when the PLCSIM starts.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

Procedure
1. Open the HW configuration of the automation system.
2. The AS created with the PCS 7 Wizard currently consists of only one rack with power
supply, CPU and, if necessary, a CP for connection to the plant bus. Check whether the real
modules match your hardware configuration and correct your configuration, if necessary.
3. At an Ethernet interface of the AS rack, parameterize the network address and connect the
interface with the "Plant bus".
4. Open the properties for the CPU and switch to the "Cyclic Interrupts" tab.
5. Parameterize the process image partition "PIP2" at OB32.
6. Parameterize the process image partition "PIP3" at OB33.
7. Save and compile the HW configuration of the AS.
8. Download the hardware configuration into the PLC.
If the network addresses differ and the loading is not successful, the respective procedure
for the solution you are using should be checked:
– Usage of PLCSIM as AS
– Usage of a CP443-1 for the plant bus
– Usage of a CPU-internal Ethernet interface for the plant bus
See the section "Node initialization" as required.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-40 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.6.2 is the
Where Checkpoint
scope of the IO address ranges for the used CPU
defined?
Where is the scope of the IO address ranges for the used CPU defined?
A. Each CPU has 16834 bytes in the process image input and just
as many outputs.
B. The size of the process image input and output can be found in
the properties of the CPU in the HW Config of the AS.
C. The size of the process image input and output can be found in
the device data of the corresponding CPU in the manual.
D. Each input and output that is defined in the symbol table can
be used as a HW address.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-41 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.7 Distributed I/O with PROFIBUS

iguration steps for DP master system
5.7.1 Configuring the DP master system

[Link] Basic configuration steps

Inserting a DP master system Assigning a node address Setting subnet properties

1 2 3 4 5 6

Connecting to a subnet
Setting the operating mode Download and diagnostics

2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-42 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

[Link] Overview of the involved objects in the HW Config

As default, the internal PROFIBUS interface of a CPU is created as a DP master system. If

PROFIBUS DP master system CPs exist, further DP master systems must be created for them.
other PROFIBUS
With PROFIBUS DP, the nodes are uniquely identified via their addresses.

3 4

5
1

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

1. Internal PROFIBUS interface of the CPU: created by default with a DP master system.
2. External PROFIBUS interface: is implemented by the CP 443-5 Ext. This allows additional
DP master systems to be created.

3. Subnet: Object for a PROFIBUS network. In its properties, you can specify the transmission
rate and the PROFIBUS profile. Always assign a meaningful name for the PROFIBUS
network.
4. DP master system: All devices assigned to a master form a master system along with the
master. A master system is part of a PROFIBUS subnet.
5. Distributed I/O or field devices are assigned to a DP master system with the aid of the
devices. In the case of an ET200M, this can be, for example, an interface module IM 153-2
that is used to connect to the PROFIBUS.
A PROFIBUS address (0...125) is assigned to every node (both masters and devices). The
address 126 is reserved for the delivery state.
6. Insert a new DP master system in the shortcut menu of the interface.

A segment can have up to 32 nodes (master/devices) and the total network up to 126 nodes.
The start and end of each segment must be fitted with a cable termination that is either
Note already integrated in the device (e.g. repeater) or is available as an active RS 485 terminating
element. Although repeaters are electrical participants on PROFIBUS, they do not have a
node address assigned since they do not communicate.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-43 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course
operties of the PROFIBUS interface
[Link] Setting the subnet and the node address

3
4

mens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

1. Name of the interface

2. Node address of the PROFIBUS interface
3. Selected subnet
4. Modification of subnet properties

When assigning node addresses, only the addresses available in a subnet can be used.

• PROFIBUS interfaces which are not created as a master system can also be networked
with a subnet. In this case, the node address of this interface counts as being assigned.
Note • Regardless of the disconnection of a master system, you may need to disconnect the
networking of the PROFIBUS interface with the subnet before you can assign this
address to another node (e.g. another PROFIBUS interface).

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-44 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

[Link]
Setting the operating mode
Properties of the PROFIBUS interface
In the properties dialog of the PROFIBUS interface in the "Operating Mode" tab, ensure that the
DP mode "DPV1" is used.

The DPV1 mode contains expansions for process automation.

These include acyclic data exchange for parameter assignment, operator control, visualization
and interrupt control of intelligent automation devices alongside the cyclic data transfer.

Note With the setting DPV1, DP devices that do not support DPV1 can also be connected/operated.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-45 SITRAIN

Properties of the PROFIBUS interface
SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

[Link] Setting the subnet properties

1. The default profile "DP" should not be changed in PCS 7.

2. Specify the transmission rate depending on the connected DP devices and the PROFIBUS
segment lengths. The default transmission rate of 1.5 Mbps can be increased to 12 Mbps
for a DP master system in individual cases to achieve faster signal runtimes.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks
3. Using the "Options" button, you include your bus architecture in the configuration so that the
DP bus parameters are optimized for your process.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-46 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

[Link] Disconnecting and installing DP master systems

A special situation arises when an already completely configured distributed I/O exists for a
DP master system, but the master system itself is to be moved to a different DP interface
(e.g. from an internal PROFIBUS interface of a CPU to an additional CP 443-5 Ext).
In this and
Disconnecting case, the master
installing DPsystem
mastercan be disconnected from one interface and is then an
systems
"orphaned" master system. The configuration of the distributed I/O is retained.

2 3

1. Distributed I/O system already completely configured

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

2. Disconnecting the PROFIBUS master system

3. Orphaned DP master system

Orphaned master systems are entered in a list that is displayed if you want to insert a master
system for a PROFIBUS interface. In this way, you can move an existing master system
including
Disconnection of DPthe configuration
master systems of a distributed I/O it contains simply to another PROFIBUS interface.

1. Orphaned DP master system

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

2. Set external PROFIBUS interface as PROFIBUS master

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-47 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.7.2 Configuring the DP device

onfiguration of the distributed I/O (DP device)
[Link] Overview

4
1

2
5

emens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

1. Tree structure under the fieldbus system

2. DP device "family"
3. Interface module: Using drag-and-drop, move the interface module from the "Hardware
Catalog" window onto the symbol for the DP master system. The "Properties – PROFIBUS
nodes" dialog box opens. Here you can set the following:
– Properties of the PROFIBUS subnet
(transmission rate, etc.)
– PROFIBUS address of the DP device
4. PROFIBUS address: The configured address must match the real set address. This
address is set on the interface module by means of a DIP switch.
5. Configuration table of the DP device: A symbol for the DP device is appended to the DP
master system. In the lower section of the station window, a detailed view of the DP device
appears with its possible slots.
6. Signal module: Using drag-and-drop, move the modules for the modular DP device to the
lower part of the station window. With modular DP devices, the possible modules are
arranged in the "Hardware Catalog" window below the relevant DP device "family"!

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-48 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

[Link] Parameter assignment of the interface module

ParameterMake
assignment of the
sure that the interface
"Replace module
modules during operation" option is activated.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-49 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course
Parameter assignment of the signal modules
[Link] Parameter assignment of the signal modules

2
1

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

1. Assign a meaningful name for diagnostic purposes.

2. Assign the process image partition that was defined earlier in the CPU properties for a
cyclic interrupt OB to an I/O module. As a result of this, the values of these I/O signals are
compared with the process image on the CPU before and after the cyclic interrupt OB. The
assignment of the process image partition therefore applies to the entire module for all I/O
signals.

Activating diagnostics capability

Modules with diagnostics capability recognize internal and external module errors and generate
a diagnostics interrupt.
When the diagnostics interrupt is enabled, messages for the module with diagnostics capability
are automatically generated in the OS by a PCS 7 driver block during Compile OS.

Channel-specific settings
A channel of a module should only be activated when the relevant actuator, sensor or a
substitute resistor is connected. This avoids unnecessary diagnostics messages in the PCS 7
OS in runtime.
For some modules, channels are grouped together in channel groups, e.g. the AI8x12Bit
module with 8 channels is made up of 4 channel groups with 2 channels per channel group. In
this case, a group is activated as soon as a signal is connected to one of the two channels. In
this case as well, at least an equivalent substitute resistor must be connected.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-50 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course
Parameter assignment of the I/O modules
[Link] Parameter assignment of the I/O modules

3
2

1 5 6

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

Why
Why is is everyone
everyone talking
talking about
about PROFINET?
PROFINET?

• With the future demands placed on performance and data quantities, the fieldbus is reaching its limit.

• Ethernet offers a high-performance, future-proof communication platform through continued technical

development.

• Vertical integration offers previously unutilized productivity potential through connection of the office and
automation worlds.

• Ethernet is the undisputed standard for installation technology and protocols in the office world.

In PCS 7, the diagnostics interrupt should be activated and hardware interrupts be deactivated
for all modules. Here is an example of the setting on the analog input module.
Vertical integration requires Ethernet!

1. Assignment of the module to the process image partition

2. Enable diagnostics interrupt for the module
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks
3. Hardware interrupt triggered by limit violation
4. Trigger for the hardware interrupt
5. Active channels, channel-group specific diagnostics, channel-group specific measuring type
6. Inactive channels

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-51 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.8 Distributed I/O with PROFINET IO

With the constantly increasing demands placed on performance and configuration limits,
fieldbuses are reaching their limit.
The use of Industrial Ethernet as a high-performance, future-proof communication platform for
fieldbus systems can solve this problem. With PROFINET, Siemens is applying the Ethernet
standard to automation.
In contrast to the PROFIBUS DP, the nodes in a PROFINET IO system are identified uniquely
via their devices names, not via their addresses.

5.8.1 Comparison of PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO

PROFIBUS vs. PROFINET – Attributes
Attributes

PROFIBUS DP Terminology / terms PROFINET IO

PROFIBUS / RS 485 Network type Ethernet

DP master system Designation of subsystem IO system

DP master Designation of the system controller IO controller

DP device Field device designation IO device

Master class 2 Administrative services IO supervisor

PROFIBUS DP Designation of hardware catalog PROFINET IO

PROFIBUS address Address assignment of device Device name

Station number Number assignment Device number

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

PROFIBUS vs. PROFINET – Functionality

Functionality

PROFIBUS DP Functionality PROFINET IO

Only one precisely defined data channel Multiple data channels between
Data channel
between master and device controller/supervisor and device possible
Possible through flexible configuration of the
Same priority of data traffic Data prioritization
update rate.
Maximum of 256 nodes per controller.
Maximum of 126 nodes Number of nodes
Unlimited in overall network segment.
Not permitted IT services Can be integrated without limitations.
From multiple nodes, From multiple nodes, reading and writing
Access to data of the field device
only reading possible possible
Only one priority possible Interrupts and diagnostics Can have different priority
Easy designation of address/name of device
Using a DIP switch or via frame Addressing setting in the project (by controller with support of
engineering tool)
Max. 12 Mbps (token) Data rate 100 Mbps (full duplex i.e. 200 Mbps)
Normally a line structure, but tree or ring
Line, star, tree, ring and combinations thereof
structure possible to a limited extent; terminal Topology
possible
resistor required on last node

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-52 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course
The most important difference: Address assignment of field devices
Address assignment of field devices

Addressing during commissioning

Simple naming by controller with support

Individual addressing of each station
of the engineering system

PROFIBUS DP| 05 Configuration of stations and networks

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN PROFINET IO
Coding of DP device addresses via a Assignment of IP addresses for IO controllers in STEP 7
DIP switch on the DP interfaces of the
devices Node initialization of the IO controller with STEP 7 or the PST
tool
Configuring PROFIBUS DP using Configuring the device names of the IO devices in the
"HW Config" "HW Config" tool of STEP 7
Transfer the device names using the "HW Config" tool to
ONLINE
Transferring a HW Configuration When the IO controller starts up, it assigns the IP addresses in
to the CPU accordance with the device name
A web page is integrated in some switches. An IP address can
also be assigned via this web page

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-53 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.8.2 Configuration of a PROFINET IO system

Tools andOverview
[Link] methods of
forthe
configuring PROFINET
tools for node parameter assignment

Node parameter assignment (address and name)

Address assignment by By means of a memory card

STEP 7, initialization via dialog (MMC = Micro Memory Card or
C-Plug) with preconfigured
Edit Ethernet node device name (IO controller and
Direct connection of ES to IO device) and address
PROFINET IO node (IO controller only)
Additional tools such as
Use of the Topology Editor:
• Primary Setup Tool (PST)
Automatic assignment of the device
• PRONETA tool name and IP address based on
• Web Based Management neighborhood relationship (PROFINET
(SCALANCE X components) functionality of IO devices and IO
controller)
May require a change of access point on the plant
bus; not all tools interact with the CP16xx Conforms to PCS 7 philosophy of
engineering from a central ES

During startup, the IO controller identifies all IO devices via their configured device names and
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks
automatically assigns them the IP address.
The Discovery and Configuration Protocol (DCP) that is used for assigning the IP addresses to
the device names is used for the name assignment. The IP addresses are generated by the
configuration tool and downloaded to the IO controller. The automatic assignment of the
configured IP addresses takes place during system startup of the IO controller.

PRONETA
PRONETA is a free tool for analysis and configuration tasks in PROFINET networks with
special support for the ET 200 distributed I/O. The IO test enables a quick and convenient check
and documentation of the wiring of a system.

Advantages of the topology

PROFINET IO systems can be topologically configured with the SIMATIC Topology Editor.
The interfaces and ports of the PROFINET IO nodes are interconnected for this.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-54 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course
Overview Overview
[Link] of the components involved and terminology involved
of the components

PROFINET IO system
PROFINET IO controller with • Subnet PROFINET IO device with
• Interface properties (device name, • Interface properties (device name,
• Connected nodes with IP address)
IP address) update times
• Connection to the subnet • Connection to the subnet
• Topology information
• PROFINET properties (send clock, PN IO properties
IO communication allocation) • PROFINET properties (send clock,
• Settings for media redundancy IO communication allocation)
• Settings for media redundancy
Ports with
• Topology information
Ports with
(neighbor)
• Topology information (neighbor)
• Line information
• Line information
• Transmission properties
• Transmission properties

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

A minimum PROFINET IO system consists of at least one IO controller, which controls one or
more IO devices.
The IO controller is a device via which the connected IO devices are addressed. This means:
The IO controller exchanges input and output signals with field devices. The IO controller is the
controller on which the automation program runs.
The IO device is a distributed field device that is assigned to one of the IO controllers, e.g.
Distributed IO, valve blocks, frequency converters, switches with integrated PROFINET IO
functionality.
PROFINET devices of the SIMATIC product family have a PROFINET interface (Ethernet
controller / interface) with one or more ports (physical connection possibilities).
PROFINET devices with multiple ports (two or more) are devices with an integrated switch.

Every PROFINET device can be uniquely identified on the network via its PROFINET interface.
For this purpose, each PROFINET interface has:
• A MAC address (factory setting)
• An IP address
• A device name

Interfaces and ports for all modules and devices in the PROFINET system are identified with the
following characters:
• Interface X In ascending order starting from number 1
• Port P In ascending order starting from number 1 (per interface)
• Ring port R

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-55 SITRAIN

guration steps: PROFINET IO system
SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

[Link] Basic configuration steps

Insert a PROFINET IO
Set an IP address Configure the topology
controller

1 2 3 4 5 6

Assign device name Insert and configure

Download and diagnostics
PROFINET IO device

[Link] Inserting a PROFINET IO system

Configuration of a PROFINET IO controller (AS station)

1. If no PROFINET IO system exists, insert a new system:

22 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-56 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Assign device name

In a PROFINET IO configuration, each device – IO controller as well as IO device – can be
identified on the basis of a unique device name.
Assign device name

3
Necessary that the IO controller
name is communicated via the
configured topology when a device
is replaced

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

1. Select the PROFINET IO interface (X5 PN-IO) and open the properties.
2. Enter the desired device name on the "General" tab.
3. So that future IO devices in the PROFINET IO system can obtain their device names from
the IO controller via the configured topology and neighborhood relations, the "Support
device replacement without exchangeable medium" option must be set.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-57 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Set an IP address
Independent of the device name, every PROFINET node also requires an IP address. This is
required
Configuration forcontroller
of IO TCP/IP communication
– IP settingsin the case of diagnostics and configuration.

1
3

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

1. In the properties dialog of the PN IO interface of the PROFINET IO controller, click the
properties of the interface.
2. Modify the IP address of the IO controller there and connect it to a subnet.
3. With the "New..." button, you can create a new subnet, if necessary.
4. On the "PROFINET" tab, you make the settings for the send clock and the communication
Configurationallocation for PROFINET
of IO controller [Link]
– PN IO

Send clock: Is the time period of two consecutive

intervals (IRT and RT communication) and corresponds
to the send interval for data exchange.

IO communication: PROFINET IO communication

4 allocation for the PROFINET segment (process
bus/fieldbus).
When 100% is set, the entire capacity is reserved for
the PROFINET data exchange.
The set communication allocation applies to the cyclic
communication.
For acyclic communication, sufficient capacity is
reserved by the system.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

The send clock is the time period of two consecutive intervals (IRT and RT communication) and
corresponds to the send interval for data exchange.
If there is not enough capacity for the acyclic communication, the communication allocation can
be reduced, taking the update time into account.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-58 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

[Link] Configuration of the PROFINET IO device

Configuring a PROFINET
The configuration IO device
of the IO device is very similar to the configuration of a PROFIBUS DP
device. Follow these steps:

Result

1. In the hardware catalog, open the most recent PCS 7 profile to display the approved
PROFINET IO devices.
PROFINET IO device
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN – Properties
| 05 Configuration of stations and networks
2. Drag-and-drop the required IO device, e.g. ET 200SP HA, to your PROFINET IO system.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

3. Open the properties of the IO device by right-clicking or double-clicking and enter a unique
device name.
4. In the properties of the Ethernet interface, enter the IP address of the PROFINET node.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-59 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course
PROFINET IO device – Inserting modules

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5. Equip the station with the modules that are available in your project. With the selected
modules, note the diagnostic settings as well as the assignment to the correct process
image partition.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-60 SITRAIN

 PROFINET IO update time –
Configured for the PN SIMATIC
IO system
PCS7 System Course

Update time

An update time is automatically calculated from the existing hardware configuration, the
resulting cyclic data traffic, the module properties and the communication allocation for
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks
PROFINET IO. Within this update time, new data is transmitted from the IO controller to all
IO devices with outputs in the IO system and all IO devices with inputs are queried.

The sequence of the cyclic data exchange, such as the timing of the data transmission or the
distribution of the data, is calculated automatically by PCS 7 and downloaded to the
IO controller along with the other configuration data.

You obtain a complete overview via the properties of the PROFINET IO system. Here you can
modify the update time for a selected node using the "Edit…" button.
The update time can only be set in accordance with the specified values and applies to all
devices of the IO system. PCS 7 determines the possible values from the properties (i.e. from
the GSD files) of the PROFINET devices involved.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-61 SITRAIN

 PROFINET IO update time – SIMATIC PCS7 System Course
Configured for the individual module

Preset default
values

Prioritization for selected

modules, such as special
settings

More accepted cycles

without IO data increase the
watchdog time.

3 ms x 128 = 384 ms

You can also set the update time in the individual PNIO properties dialogs of the nodes in the
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

PROFINET IO system.
The "Fixed update time" is set to a value that is less than the fastest process image partition
update (PIP). The watchdog time is the product of the "Update time" and "Number of accepted
update cycles with missing I/O data" parameters. It should be greater than 200 ms for a ring
configuration (reconfiguration time).

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-62 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

[Link] Configuring the topology

Advantages
PROFINET IO systems can be topologically configured with the SIMATIC Topology Editor. This
means that you connect the interfaces and ports of the PROFINET IO nodes with each other.
Typically the AS station acts as an IO controller of the PROFINET fieldbus system. To assign
the device name, the IO controller uses the configured topology and the neighborhood
relationships determined from the IO devices.
By configuring a topology, the PROFINET IO system or the IO controller will make known the
neighbor relationships of all the PROFINET devices located in the PROFINET IO system.
If you now replace a defective device with a replacement device which at this point in time is set
to the factory settings, the IO controller can identify the replacement device without name and
then assign it the configured name and the IP address. It is then automatically included in the
user data traffic again.
The topology editor has the following functions and properties:
• Display of all PROFINET devices in the project and their ports
• Cable length and type as well as transmission time for each port
• Connection data with location information for each individual port
• Diagnostics information of PROFINET devices for each individual port
• Troubleshooting is made easier by the online/offline comparison of connection data
• Call of the diagnostics (module information) from the graphic view
• Import of the network topology

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-63 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course
PROFINET IO topology

Structure of the topology editor

Filter

Tabular view Online / offline comparison Graphic view

• List of all configured • Display of the Miniature view
PROFINET devices with their PROFINET devices
with movable
ports Requires a direct online connection from the in the project and
their frame and slider
PG to the PROFINET IO system, not typical
interconnections for zooming
for PCS 7

The topology editor has the following three tabs:

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks
• Table view
Here, you see the PROFINET modules and their ports in the form of a table. With this, you
can create and edit connections.
• Graphic view
Here you see the PROFINET modules and their ports in graphic form. Here you can also
create connections.
• Offline/online comparison
In this tab, you can compare the devices of the STEP 7 project offline with the currently
connected devices (online)

Assignment of the PROFINET device name through the configured topology

PROFINET
1. IO – Open
Select "PROFINET Topology
IO Topology" Editor
in the shortcut menu of the PROFINET IO system.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-64 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

2. If you confirm with "Yes", the topology editor applies the data configured up to now.
3. For configuring the topology, the graphic configuration is recommended in PCS 7. Change
to the graphic view for this. You see both the IO controllers and the IO devices in the
screen.
4. Select both interfaces at which the PROFINET cable is plugged in and connect them
graphically.
5. The "Interconnection Properties" dialog box for the selected port now opens.
If you wish to change the default values for the cable data, either click the "Cable length"
radio
Editing topology button and select the desired value from the drop-down list or click the "Signal delay
graphically
time" radio button and enter the desired value.
As a result, a continuous line is drawn between the two devices in the screen.

Repeat this for all connections and close the Topology Editor with "OK".
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

Note The actual plugged-in hardware and the hardware configured in the topology must match.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-65 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Topology
Topology in moduleinproperties
information the module properties

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

The information relating to the topology can also be found and edited in HW Config in the
properties of the relevant device ports.

Note You can also create documentation of your PROFINET IO network with the "Topology
Reporter". You can use the following link to download the tool:
PROFINET in Process Automation with SIMATIC PCS 7

Download of the PROFINET IO configuration

Compile and download the modified configuration to the automation system.
To assign the device name, the IO controller uses the configured topology and the
neighborhood relationships determined from the IO devices.
By configuring the topology, the neighborhood relationships of all the PROFINET devices
located in the PROFINET IO system will be made known to the PROFINET IO system or the IO
controller. From the neighbor relationships specified by the set topology and the actual neighbor
relationships established by the real PROFINET devices, the IO controller can identify the
replaced IO device without a name and assign to it the configured name and the IP address and
then list it again in the user data traffic.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-66 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

[Link] PROFINET IO device – Resetting to factory setting

In order for "automatic commissioning" to be performed later, the PROFINET IO device must
first be reset to factory settings if it is not currently in delivery state.
Afterwards, all settings for the PROFINET IO controller (AS station) and the PROFINET IO
device (ET 200M) can be made directly in HW Config and then downloaded to the CPU after
being saved and compiled. The laborious assignment of a device name for the ET200M is no
longer necessary.
1. Set the PG/PC interface of the PC for the plant bus to the communication protocol that is
being used.
2. Open the dialog with the Ethernet properties using
PLC > Edit Ethernet Node…
3. With "Browse", all addresses attached to the plant bus are displayed.
4. Select the row with the addresses for the IO device. If you press the "Flash" button, the
corresponding station reacts and flashes for a set time.
5. With "Reset", the selected PROFINET IO device is reset to factory settings.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-67 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.9Hardware
Hardware diagnostics
diagnostics and troubleshooting
and troubleshooting
Brief description of the online view in HW Config:

Online window Offline window

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

1. In the element bar, click the Offline <-> Online button. This allows you to switch between
the online and offline window without closing the previous window. Diagnostics symbols
show the status and operating state. Here 4 examples to illustrate:
2. The CPU operating modes Stop and Run. Run mode is active in this window.
3. No match between the configured and the actual configuration: The configured slots are
either empty or different modules were placed in them.
4. Diagnostics not possible: No online connection, or the module does not return diagnostics
information.
5. Error: The module has an error.
Possible causes: Diagnostics interrupt, I/O access error or lit error LED was detected.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-68 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Reading out the diagnostic buffer of the CPU

Reading out the diagnostic
Detailed diagnosticsbuffer of theisCPU
information displayed after double-clicking on a module. The window for
the "Module Information" allows the diagnostic buffer to be read out:

1. The diagnostic events are displayed in the diagnostic buffer in the sequence in which they
occur. The first entry contains the most recent event.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

2. When you select an event in the list, you obtain detailed information:
– Event name and event number.
– Additional information depending on the event, such as the address of the command
that caused the event and the resulting operating state change of the CPU.
– Event statuses that have come in or have already gone out.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-69 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course
HW-Konfig –
Gestörte
Disrupted modules in theBaugruppen in der Diagnosesicht
diagnostics view

1
1
2

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Die Projektierung von Stationen und Netzen

1. Status of the CPU: Stop. There is a diagnostics interrupt that cannot be intercepted in the
status shown by special "error OBs" (OB 8x).
Note If there is a CPU STOP due to failure of I/O components, use the SUBNET block. When an
error OB (for example, OB 86, rack failure) is called, the SUBNET block allows only the driver
blocks that signaled the error to be processed. This reduces the processing time necessary.

Note PCS 7 provides the required blocks in libraries. The interfaces to the hardware including test
functions are implemented in these blocks.
As soon as a CFC is compiled with the option "Generate module driver", which is enabled as
default, all required error OBs are placed in the user program in the background. After such a
program has been loaded on the CPU, this is capable of intercepting I/O errors without Stop.

2. The interface module (IM) of the ET200 M station connected to the PROFIBUS DP master
system indicates an external error.
3. The configuration table of the DP device indicates a disrupted module in slot 4.
4. The module status of the disrupted module provides further information about the type of
disruption.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-70 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

5.10 Exercise and checkpoint

5.10.1 Exercise: Hardware configuration for the distributed I/O

Task
Configure the distributed I/O and load the configuration to the PLC.

PLCSIM does not support PROFINET IO

NOTICE If you use PLCSIM as emulated automation system, configure the distributed I/O exclusively
at the PROFIBUS DB.

Procedure
1. The AS created with the PCS 7 Wizard currently consists of only one rack with power
supply, CPU and a CP for connection to the plant bus. Check whether the real modules
match your hardware configuration and correct your configuration, if necessary.
2. You need a fieldbus, e.g. PROFIBUS DP or a PROFINET IO, to connect distributed I/O.
Use what you find on the training device as a guide. For a PROFIBUS DP, the CPU-internal
interface X1 is used. The PROFINET is either plugged on the interface X5 or X8 on the
CPU.
3. Equip the PROFIBUS or PROFINET station according to the modules available in reality.
The best way to do this is to refer to the data sheet that you will find at your training site.
4. Use the preset standard address ranges and process image partitions. The digital signals of
the signal box start with 0, the analog ones at 512. Select PIP2 (OB32) for the analog
signals and PIP3 (OB33) for the digital signals.
5. Note the measuring ranges of the analog signal module groups and disable channels that
you do not use.
6. Activate the possible diagnostics alarms and group diagnostics with all used IO modules.
7. Make all the required settings on the CPU, such as warm restart after power-on or the
corresponding cyclic interrupts for the process image partitions.
8. Connect your AS with the plant bus.
9. Save and compile the hardware configuration.
10. Download the hardware configuration of your AS to the CPU.

Result
You have configured your AS and downloaded the HW configuration. The AS is in RUN state
and can be reached via the ES.

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-71 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Where is the scope

5.10.2 of the IO address ranges for the used CPU defined?
Checkpoints

Where is the scope of the IO address ranges for the used CPU defined?
A. Each CPU has 16384 bytes in the process image input
and just as many outputs.
B. The size of the process image input and output can be
found in the properties of the CPU in HW Config of
the AS.
C. The size of the process image input and output can be
found in the device data of the corresponding CPU in
the manual.
D. Each input and output that is defined in the symbol
table can be used as a HW address.

Do you have to activate support of the TCP/IP protocol in the network adapters on the plant
busDo
foryou
connection of thesupport
have to activate distributed I/O to the
of the TCP/IP fieldbus
protocol in theofnetwork
the CPU via PROFINET?
adapters on the plant bus for
connection of the distributed I/O to the fieldbus of the CPU via PROFINET?
A. Yes, definitely. Both are Industrial Ethernet.
B. PROFINET is a fieldbus with TCP/IP protocol. During
operation, it is directly connected with the interfaces on
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

the CPU.
C. Only if one of the two PROFINET interfaces is used on
the CPU.
D. If the number of the connected ET200 stations is
larger than 256.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 05 Configuration of stations and networks

5 Configuration of stations and networks 5-72 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

6 Creating the plant hierarchy

Learning objectives
6.1 Learning objectives

• How can I map the process system in the multiproject?

• How do I set the number of hierarchy levels?

• What is the relationship between hierarchy folders and the S7 user

programs in a multiproject?

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating the plant hierarchy

6 Creating the plant hierarchy 6-1 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

6.2 Component view and plant view

6.2.1 Component view

Component viewhas been opened or created, its component view is displayed in the SIMATIC
After a project
Manager. All data is assigned to physical stations and components.

4
1

© Siemens 20221. Stations

| SITRAIN | Creating the plant hierarchy

2. Subnet objects: can only be renamed here.

3. Shared declarations contain the enumerations, units and equipment properties elements
that can be used by different applications.
4. S7 program folder: It is recommended that S7 program folders of various SIMATIC
stations within a multiproject have unique names assigned to avoid mix-ups. S7 program
names should not contain any spaces.

The names of the S7 programs are used as the name of the connection in the WinCC project
Note after the OS compiling. Therefore, you should use meaningful names (e.g. name of the
associated AS).

5. Symbol table: Each S7 program (each CPU, each AS) has a unique symbol table for
storing the relationship between symbolic names and addresses or blocks.

Note Stations and components must first be inserted before they can be edited. Subnet objects are
only displayed here. They are edited in HW Config.

6 Creating the plant hierarchy 6-2 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

6.2.2 Plant view

In the plant view, you structure the project according to technological aspects. In doing so,
divide the automation as well as operator control and monitoring functions hierarchically into the
Plant view
hierarchy levels plant, unit or function. You name the relevant hierarchy folders based on their
technological meaning.

Level 1

< Plant >

1
2 1
Level 2
< Unit >
1 2
Level 3
2
< Unit >

Level 4 1

< Function > 2

Different representation of the master data library

6.2.3 Different representation of the master data library

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating the plant hierarchy

1 4

2 5

3 6

In the component view:

1. A default folder for an S7 program with the folders for
– Sources
– Blocks
– Charts
2. One folder for shared declarations
3. A WinCC project as a container for process pictures and reports

In the plant view:

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating the plant hierarchy
4. One folder for shared declarations
5. Folders for process tag types, models
6. If required, user-created folders for plant units

6 Creating the plant hierarchy 6-3 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

6.3 Settings in the plant hierarchy

The plant hierarchy is a powerful ES tool for creating a relationship between the automation
functions in the AS program and the picture hierarchy in the OS.
Settings in the
The most plant
important hierarchy
settings are the maximum number of hierarchy levels, which can be a max.
of 8, selection of hierarchy levels to be involved in HID formation, and selection of the level for
OS area overview.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating the plant hierarchy

6 Creating the plant hierarchy 6-4 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
Settings in the plant hierarchy
6.4 Syntax rules for the plant hierarchy

Syntax rules for the

plant hierarchy

Prohibited special
[.][%][/][\]["]
characters
Conversion of The special characters
special characters ['][.][%][\][*][?][:]
[space]
are converted into a substitute
character $ when compiling the
OS.
Number of When the OS is compiled, texts
characters with a maximum of 255
characters are transferred.
Therefore, shorten the length of
the name for the hierarchy folder.

The position of the configured process tags (charts) in the plant hierarchy is one of the ways by
which they are identified. This results in a "Plant designation" (HID) together with the chart
name, which is later used in the OS as "origin" of a message sent by the automation system.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating the plant hierarchy

The remaining setting options in this editor are for the display in the operator system and are
Note explained at the appropriate place in this documentation.

6 Creating the plant hierarchy 6-5 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

6.5 Assignments
Configuration objects such as CFCs and pictures are created in the plant view of the project.
The individual units are assigned to particular automation systems (AS) and particular operator
stations (OS), which are created in the component view.
Plant view – Assignments
The assignment can be made via the properties of the hierarchy folder. This assignment is
optionally also transferred to the lower-level hierarchy folders.

Plant
© Siemensview – Assignments
2022 | SITRAIN | Creating the plant hierarchy

Alternatively, you can also open a dialog for the assignment directly via a shortcut menu:

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating the plant hierarchy

6 Creating the plant hierarchy 6-6 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
Updating the plant hierarchy in the multiproject
6.6 Updating the plant hierarchy in the multiproject

Result after updating the plant hierarchy in the multiproject

Result after updating the plant hierarchy in the multiproject
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating the plant hierarchy
Linked PH

Modify the PH in the source project

1 and then export this PH to the other
user projects.

1. The link icon indicates a link

relationship to a PH in another
project.

2. You can remove the link

relationship, for example, to delete
the PH in this project.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating the plant hierarchy

6 Creating the plant hierarchy 6-7 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Use case: Multiproject with one AS and one OS project

Useassignment
AS-OS case: Multiproject withfolders
of the hierarchy one AS and one OS project
AS-OS assignment of the hierarchy folder

Charts, but no pictures

AS project

OS project

Pictures but no charts

Link symbol on the

hierarchy folder

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating the plant hierarchy

The figure above shows how PH folders can be assigned if the AS station and the OS station
are located in different user projects of the multiproject, for example to enable parallel
processing.

6 Creating the plant hierarchy 6-8 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Task 6.7 Exercise and checkpoint

6.7.1 Exercise: Create the plant hierarchy

CreateTask
a starting point for the plant hierarchy.
Create the plant hierarchy:

Johnsson
Signal_box

Materials M-General
M110
Storage
B410
Reactors

R310
Dosing

Mixing
Heating
Draining

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

< Plant > < Unit > < Equipment Module > < Function >

Procedure
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating the plant hierarchy
1. Create new hierarchy folders or rename existing ones to create the following plant
hierarchy according to the task requirements:
– Observe the syntax rules for naming hierarchy folders.
2. Check the assignment in the SIMATIC Manager.
– The program that is created in all these hierarchy folders should only run in the AS that
is in the multiproject at the given time.

Result
The plant hierarchy reflects the structure of the Johnsson plant. The creation of the programs for
the individual process tags is now performed in this structure.

6 Creating the plant hierarchy 6-9 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

6.7.2 Checkpoint
Compare the arrangement of the folders on your ES with the arrangement as
listed in the exercise!
Compare the arrangement of the folders on your ES with the arrangement as listed in the exercise!
A. The hierarchy folders are arranged alphabetically in the plant
view.
B. The hierarchy folders in the plant view are arranged exactly as
entered.
C. The sorting of hierarchy folders depends on the number of
process objects in each branch.
D. The final order of the plant hierarchy folders does not
necessarily have to correspond to the order in which they were
entered.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Creating the plant hierarchy

6 Creating the plant hierarchy 6-10 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7 Basics of CFC and blocks

7.1 Learning objectives

• What are the basics of CFC and blocks?

• How does the CFC editor work?

• How does a run sequence work?

• How are textual interconnections made?

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-1 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.2 Overview
Each unit in a plant is represented by a chart with blocks in the ES and a block icon/faceplate
on the OS. Pre-defined block types are kept in a library.

1 4

1. Drive in the plant

2. Automation system
3. Program for controlling a drive (control module function, template from the AP library)
4. Operator control & monitoring of the drive

Control module functions

Control of motors, valves or other process devices (process tags) is achieved in process control
systems using control module functions.
They enable the control, monitoring and operation of control equipment by providing appropriate
I/Os for actuating and control signals and for configuration and monitoring functions.

Charts or CFCs (Continuous Function Charts)

CFCs contain the blocks and represent them with a graphic user interface (the CFC editor).
Each CFC has a unique name on the CPU. When the configuration is completed, each CFC will
contain at least one block, but usually multiple blocks. Blocks within a CFC are directly linked by
interconnections.

Blocks
In the modularly constructed user program of process control software, control functions are
implemented with the help of technological blocks. The inner workings of such a block remain
hidden to the user.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-2 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Block types and block instances

Ready-made control functions are offered as block types in process control libraries.
For example, a motor can be controlled in PCS 7 by a MOTOR motor block from the standard
library or by a MotL motor block from the Advanced Process Library (APL). They differ in the
range of available control functions (e.g. interlocks) and their graphical representation for
operator control and monitoring.

Block type and block instance

Block type contains: Block instance:

• The algorithm • Generated from the block type
• The type name • Any number of block instances possible
• The data interface (these are • Can be connected and assigned
the input and output parameters in charts
parameters) • Central synchronization of all instances
• Made available in libraries with the underlying block type
• Centrally managed in the
master data library

DB x DB y DB z

Instance data blocks:

• Created for every block instance

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-3 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.3 CFC editor

7.3.1 Functions of the CFC editor

In the CFC editor, the automation program is created in the form of charts or CFCs. Blocks are
placed, configured and interconnected in the CFC. The libraries contain ready-made blocks for
a variety of tasks, e.g. mathematical functions, logical operations or blocks for controlling
technical equipment such as drives or valves. Many functions also include a block icon and a
faceplate for visualization at the operator station.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-4 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Charts in the CFC editor

After opening a new CFC inserted in the chart folder, you initially see a chart partition consisting
of six sheets in the CFC editor.
Each CFC consists of up to 26 chart partitions containing 6 sheets each. In the overview (sheet
view), you can view all the sheets.

Sheet 1 Sheet 4

Sheets

Sheet 2

Sheet 5
Chart partitions,
at least one chart
partition, starting
with A, max. 26 to Z

Sheet 3 Sheet 6

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-5 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

List box for

Sheet view
sheet selection

Text box for

comments
Sheet bar
Sheet bar

• You can change between the sheet view and the overview by clicking the button in the
toolbar or by double-clicking on the white background in a sheet.
• Alternatively, you can expand the list box.
• The sheet bars contain cross-references to interconnections outside the sheet.
• Use a text box to enter comments. You can insert a text box in the chart like a block.

CFC editor – Toolbar

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

1. Catalog 5. Download the S7 program

2. Runtime editor 6. CFC test mode
3. Avoid implicit dead times 7. Chart reference data
4. Compile charts 8. Sheet view

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-6 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.3.2 Catalog of blocks, charts, libraries and templates

Using the catalog in the CFC, you have access to all blocks and installed libraries in use. The
catalog contains the 3 tabs: Blocks, charts and libraries.
Via the tab bar of the catalog, you can choose between 4 different catalog views.

• The "Blocks" tab displays all blocks that are already used in the block folder of the current
S7 program. The blocks are sorted in block families.
• The "Charts" tab shows all configured CFCs and they can be opened from there.
• The "Libraries" tab shows all libraries installed on the system and also the master data
library of the project. You can also insert blocks from these libraries into the open chart.

References
See [302] PCS 7 V9.0 CFC for SIMATIC S7 - Function Manual, section 8.2.2 for more details.

Manual

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-7 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.3.3 Templates

Templates are prepared charts for device control functions. They can be found in the chart
folder (called "Templates") of a PCS 7 library.

Templates can be used in various ways:

• By copying to a project (in a hierarchy folder in the plant view) and then adapting signals
and parameters.
• By copying to the master data library of a multiproject. There, they can be used as so-called
"process tag types". Details of this later in the course.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-8 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.4 Inserting blocks into a CFC

7.4.1 Instantiating blocks

To insert function blocks into the charts, you can drag-and-drop the blocks from the catalog into
the CFC. For function blocks (FB), this procedure reserves the number of an instance data
block. The instance data block is used to store the data of the block instance inserted in the
chart. Functions (FC) like the logical OR have no instance data block and therefore no memory.

PCS 7 AP Library
Dosage
Drives
Interlock
MotL Intlc MotL
VlvL DB64 DB65
Generator
Interlock
Run
Intlk02
Or
Intlk04
Math
Logic OR logic
And
Or

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-9 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.4.2 Block properties

When you drag blocks from the catalog into the CFC, the blocks are assigned to an OB
according to the runtime group of the chart currently being edited (in the figure below for
example in OB35).

Block name Calling OB

Block type (icon)

Insert position in the CFC

Block comment
Insert position of the
runtime group (CFC) in
the OB

• Block name (name of the block instance): CFC assigns the block a number as a name
when it appears in the chart. The name can be changed in the dialog of the block
properties.

Note The block name must not exceed 16 characters and is displayed in the block header.
Prohibited characters are: / \ ." %.

• Block type: This name cannot be changed in the CFC editor.

• Block comment: The comment, a user-specific text, appears in the block header. The
block header can display up to 16 characters of the comment. If the display width is set to
"Narrow", the block comment is displayed shortened to max. 8 characters in the block
header.
• Insert position and run sequence: In one block of a chart, the runtime properties will
always be displayed in a field in the block header. This marks this block as the predecessor
for new blocks in the run sequence. A new block to be inserted is placed after this
predecessor in the run sequence.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-10 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

"Properties – Block" dialog

After double-clicking on the block header the "Properties - Block" dialog appears with the
"General" tab open.

Block properties

Block parameter

Operator control and

Information on the type
monitoring

Messages
Additional calls of the
block

• The name box has a simple number entered in it. This is normally replaced by a more
meaningful name.
• The comment box contains a brief description. The content can be changed.
• Some boxes in this dialog do not apply to block types. These objects are then grayed out.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-11 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Block I/Os
A table lists the properties of all inputs and outputs of the block:

7.4.3 I/O properties

1 2
3

1. After double-clicking on an input or output, the "Properties - Input/Output" dialog opens.

2. If an input is intended for interconnection with structures, the dialog for selecting the
structure element is displayed first.
3. The "Input/Output Properties" dialog opens. The main text box is the "Value" field. If the
input is not interconnected, a value can be entered.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-12 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.4.4 Interconnections

Blocks can be linked by interconnecting the I/Os. Only one output can be connected to one or
more inputs of the same data type. To do this, you can draw lines between the I/Os or select an
output and an input one after the other.

Basically, the following variants of interconnections are available:

Between blocks Chart-spanning

To invisible I/Os To hardware signals

An interconnection can be generated as follows:

• Click on an output and then on an input (or the other way round).
• As an alternative, you can drag the output to the input (or the other way round).
• A block output can have several interconnections to different inputs.
• A block input can only be interconnected with one block output.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-13 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Textual interconnection
Textual interconnections are interconnections to a target that does not yet exist at the time of
configuration.
To be able to configure a textual interconnection, the name of the subsequent CFC, the block
name and the I/O name must be known. An open textual interconnection is visualized by a
yellow triangle.
If the target I/O is available, the textual interconnection can be closed.

Hidden interconnections

Indicator for an invisible I/O,

but still interconnected

If interconnected block I/Os are hidden, this is indicated by a light blue triangle in the block
header.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-14 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.4.5 Graphic representation of blocks in the CFC editor

The graphic representation of blocks in the CFC editor was revised. The use of different colors
at the block I/Os and their labeling provide a better overview of changes since loading the last
time.
• Gray value at the I/O • Color black for
means: • Runtime group in the block
header
Preset default value
• Parameter in the block
means:
Block or values were downloaded to
• Color change for the AS
• Runtime group in
the block header
• All parameter
labels in the block • Color change for parameter labeling
means: • Blue value at the I/O means:
New block instance means: Changed parameter assignment or
since the last download Parameter assignment by user interconnection since the last
download

Color changes in the graphic representation of block I/Os in the CFC

• With I/Os that have been changed since loading on the target system the last time and that
have not been loaded again, the color of the I/O name is changed.
• After the modified block is loaded onto the target system, these color changes are reset
again.
• "Black" lettering means that the block I/O is loaded on the target system with the current
parameter assignment / interconnection.
• The color "gray" for a parameter value at an I/O means that this value is a default of the
block.
• The color "blue" for a parameter value at an I/O means that this value was set by the user
and no longer corresponds to the default.

Color changes in the graphic representation of blocks in the CFC

The load status is indicated by the color of the lettering in the block header:
• "Black" lettering means that the block is loaded on the target system.
• Lettering e.g. "light gray" (configuration-dependent) means that the block is not yet loaded
on the target system.
In this case, all other labels of the block I/Os have different colored lettering.
The color of the lettering in the field for runtime properties is only indicated when the block is not
yet loaded on the target system.
The following changes do not affect this status display:
• Changes made to the block, e.g. changes to block I/Os
• Changes to the corresponding chart or moving the chart to a different runtime group are
indicated on the chart or chart folder.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-15 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Adapting the colors in the block layout

The colors of the block properties can be changed in the "Color settings" dialog.
In the following figure, the color "red" was set.
In the CFC editor: Options -> Customize -> Colors ...

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-16 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.5 Compile and download

7.5.1 Dataflow of the configuration in the CFC

After creating the required functions in the charts, these are sent to the CPU in 2 steps:

Block
library
Block instances CFCs
CFC editor
Block types Parameter

Compile

Code generation

SCL source

Compilation

S7 user program

Download

S7 target system
Machine code

7.5.2 Compile

The CFC program is compiled in two steps. In the first step, a temporary source program, "SCL
source", is created and this is directly further compiled into an executable program in the form of
blocks in MC7 machine code and stored offline in the block container.
With the Scope option, you can determine whether the entire program is to be compiled or only
changes are compiled. When compiling the AS program for the first time, only the "Entire
program" option is available.

1
2

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-17 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.5.3 Download

Download copies the program to the automation system.

With the Download mode, you can define whether the entire program is copied to the CPU or
only changes are transferred. Again, only the "Entire program" option is possible for the initial
download. With a complete download, the CPU is inevitably set to the "STOP" operating state.

Programs created in CFC must also always be downloaded to the target system from within
CFC since only the download function of CFC guarantees the consistency of the configuration
data with the target system data.

Exception:
In the SIMATIC Manager, the CFC download function is also available in the following
situations:
• With a chart folder selected with the menu command PLC > Download
• With a (multi)project or a station selected with the menu command PLC > Compile and
Download Objects.

CAUTION Actions in the block folder offline and online

To ensure that the AS program can be processed correctly, you may only
perform configuration and loading in the chart folder. PCS 7 manages the block
folder itself.
Selecting the block folder or individual blocks and the menu command PLC
> Download and copying the blocks to the "Block folder offline" to insert them in
the "Block folder online" is not allowed.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-18 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Compile and download

If you click the "Download" button without first compiling the program, a message window opens
and after confirming it you can compile and download in one session:

1
2

1. Click the "Download" button.

2. A message window expects your confirmation for compiling and downloading.
3. Check the options for the compilation.
4. Check the options for the download.

What you need to know about downloading changes

If the ongoing plant operation must not be interrupted by a CPU stop, the possibility for
downloading changes must be maintained at all costs.
Note If you want to make sure that the option of downloading changes is retained, you should create
a backup copy of your project after every complete download.

References
See [302] PCS 7 V9.0 CFC for SIMATIC S7 - Function Manual, sections 13.3 and 13.4 for
further details on how the system supports avoidance of a CPU STOP.
Manual

Downloading a modified program to a test CPU

With the option of downloading to the test CPU in the "S7 Download" dialog, you can download
modified programs to a CPU other than the original CPU, for example in PLCSIM. In this case,
the original ID, the time stamp of the download and therefore the option of downloading
changes later to the original CPU are retained.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-19 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.5.4 Selective download

In PCS 7, it is possible to download individual CFCs from the CFC folder of the S7 program, or
individual plant sections from the plant hierarchy.

Selection of CFC to be
selectively downloaded

• CFC changed

• CFC loaded

• CFC compiled

• Dependent CFC

You can use "Selective Download" to download one

or more modified CFCs or SFCs to a target system.

With the selective downloading of individual CFCs, you can select which of the configured
changes are transferred to the target system and activated. This makes it possible to configure
several units on a target system at the same time because precisely the changes to a unit can
be compiled, downloaded and tested.

References
See [302] PCS 7 V9.0 CFC for SIMATIC S7 - Function Manual. section 13.6 for further details
on "Selective Download".
Manual

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-20 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.6 Test mode

7.6.1 Settings for test mode

For test mode, you can still make some settings in the CFC editor in the "Test" menu.
• Test settings: Here you determine how often the values at the visible I/Os are updated.
Minimum cycle is 1 second.
• Process mode: Here, the communication of the online dynamization is limited. The
monitoring of blocks and I/Os must be explicitly enabled.
• Laboratory Mode: All I/Os registered for monitoring are displayed immediately after test
mode is started. Online dynamization is not limited and may have a considerable influence
on the communication load.
Use the "Test mode" button to start the connection to the AS.
The "Watch on" and "Watch off" buttons are only needed in process mode.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-21 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.6.2 General settings for I/Os

You can log on and off individual I/Os for monitoring. To do this, open the properties of an I/O
and set the "For test" parameter.
Alternatively, you can also click on the I/O during test mode while holding down the CTRL key or
right-click on the I/O to have the value displayed continuously.
You can change values at non-switched inputs online. Note, however, that you can then directly
influence productive operation.
If a value is not displayed in test mode, use the "Tooltip" function to display the value in a field.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-22 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.6.3 Dynamic display

You have the option of configuring a dynamic display to analyze process values.
In this window, the values of I/Os from different CFCs of a CPU can be displayed, monitored
and changed. The relevant CFC does not need to be open for this.
You can open the editor with the menu command "View > Dynamic Display".
To add values to the display, drag-and-drop individual I/Os into the table and select whether the
complete structure is to be monitored or only a single element within it.
You can create and manage several value tables.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-23 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.6.4 Trend display

The trend display offers you the possibility to display process values graphically.
You open the display with the menu command "View > Trend Display". Again, you can create
and manage several trend displays. A maximum of 12 channels, i.e. 12 trends, are available to
you for each trend display.
Drag-and-drop I/Os to free channels and configure the limits of the channel. You can also set
the displayed time range.
Recording of values must be started explicitly in addition to test mode.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-24 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.7 Exercise and checkpoint

7.7.1 Exercise: Create a logical function

Task
Configure a logical function in CFC.

Procedure
1. Create a new hierarchy folder "Demo" (level 1) in the project.
2. Create the "Logic" CFC in this folder.
3. Insert the following blocks from the "PCS 7 AP Library V91" library into the chart:
– "LogicDI > And04"; Name "And"
– "LogicDI > Or04"; Name "Or"
– "LogicDI > FlipFlop"; Name "SR"  I/O "Mode" = 0
– "LogicDI > FlipFlop"; Name "RS"  I/O "Mode" = 1
4. Interconnect the blocks as shown in the figure. Ensure that the blocks are in the correct run
sequence.
5. Move the chart to OB33 (execution every 500ms).
6. Compile and download the program in PLCSIM.
7. Start test mode in CFC.
8. Test the function by changing the values at the inputs of the OR and AND blocks.

Result
In test mode, you can observe the behavior of the differently configured FlipFlops.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-25 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.7.2 Checkpoints

What interconnections are possible in the CFC?

A. Between block I/Os in the same chart
B. Chart-spanning between block I/Os
C. To invisible block I/Os
D. Only between technological blocks

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-26 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.8 Organization blocks

Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between CPU operating system and the user
program. Various OBs (with numbers) are available.
Every OB has a trigger from the operating system. Every OB therefore represents a start event
controlled by the operating system of the CPU.
Blocks are assigned to at least one OB.

7.8.1 Program processing in the automation system

To understand how the program of an automation system is organized, you need to get an
overview of how a CPU works.
The CFC and its blocks are called by organization blocks from the operating system of the CPU.
Organization blocks are processed depending on a certain event and its priority. Higher-priority
OB interrupts the processing of lower-priority OB.

Operating system OB1 Free cycle, lowest priority 1

of the CPU
OB10 … 17 Time-of-day interrupts 2

OB20 … 23 Time-delay interrupts 3...6

OB30 … 38 Cyclic interrupts 7...15

OB40 … 47 Hardware interrupts 13...23

OB70 … 73 Redundancy error 25

OB80 … 87 Asynchronous errors 26, 28

like error-
OB121 … 122 Synchronous errors generating
OB

OB100 … 101 Startup, warm restart 27

• OB1 is permanently called cyclically with lowest priority, if no other OB is being executed.
• In PCS 7, the AS program is mainly configured in the cyclic interrupt OBs. These interrupts
are called cyclically at an interval of between 10 ms and 5 sec.
• The startup OBs are called once when the CPU starts up. Blocks with certain startup
characteristics are automatically inserted there.
• The error OBs are called on corresponding hardware errors.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-27 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

When the CPU is started, the startup OB100 is called once at the beginning with high priority.
The program in OB32 is executed cyclically at 1 second intervals.
OB1 is then called until it is the turn of another OB with higher priority.

OB1 - Cyclic

OB32
OB32 -- Interval
Interval 1s
1s

OB100
OB100 -- CPU
CPU startup
startup

7.8.2 Cyclic interrupts

Our most important group of OBs are the cyclic interrupts OB30…OB38. They represent cyclic
execution on a defined time base.

OB10 OB20
... 17 ... 23

OB1 OB30
... 38
S7
OS

OB121, OB40
122 ... 47

OB100, OB80
101 ... 87

* User/process-specific start event

** CFC/block-specific start event

Inserting a PCS 7 block in one of these cyclic interrupt OBs achieves a defined time response of
the block.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-28 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.8.3 Startup behavior

In a warm restart, execution of the program restarts at the beginning of the program with a
"basic setting" of the system data and user address areas. Non-retentive timers, counters, and
bit memory are reset. All data blocks and their contents are retained.

CAUTION Do not perform a cold restart when restarting the CPU; the default is a
warm restart.
If a cold start takes place for a CPU restart, important process data is lost.
Default setting for PCS 7 and standard application: Restart = warm restart

In some situations, the block behavior at startup must differ from the normal cyclic behavior. For
example, it may be necessary to suppress certain alarms and messages for a number of cycles
after startup.
In this case, the block must not only be called in the cyclic interrupt OB but also in a startup OB
(OB100) so that its startup code can be processed. Its placement is performed automatically.
When you restart (warm restart) an S7-400 CPU (for example by changing the mode selector
from STOP to RUN or by turning the power ON), organization block OB100 is processed before
cyclic program execution begins (OB32 - OB38). By default, all the PCS 7 blocks that have a
special startup behavior are incorporated in OB100.

7.8.4 Assignment OBs / cyclic interrupts

You can view the different cyclic interrupt settings as follows:

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-29 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.9 Run sequence

7.9.1 Basics

The run sequence determines the data flow of the signals in the program. If possible the
processing of a signal should always be done from input to output to avoid potential dead times.
In the worst case, e.g. if the last block in the row is executed first, the program needs several
cycles to calculate the result. A small black symbol in the I/O indicates when the input is
processed before the connected output.
If the processing is performed in the correct order, the result can be calculated within one cycle.

Unfavorable configuration
4 3 2 1
The program needs 4 cycles to
process the signal.

Optimized run sequence 1 2 3 4

The program needs 1 cycle
to process the signal.

7.9.2 Changing the run sequence

The runtime editor (a view in the CFC editor) can be opened as follows:

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-30 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Insertion position pointer

In the run sequence for every chart, a separate runtime group is created that contains the
blocks from the chart. The runtime group is assigned to a cyclic interrupt OB (task). This is very
important in PCS 7 because this ensures that channel drivers and technological blocks are
executed with the same cyclic interrupt in a run sequence.
Blocks are also installed more than once in tasks (=OBs) depending on the entry in the task list
assigned to the block type by the system attribute (S7_tasklist). Blocks with startup
characteristics are, for example, also installed in OB100.
The green background color indicates an insertion pointer that controls the insert position (after
this pointer) for the next new chart.
The insertion pointer can be moved with the menu options shown.

Task (corresponds to
OB)

Current insertion
position pointer

Determines new predecessor for

the insertion position

Runtime groups can be moved by dragging them with the mouse, both within an OB and to
another OB.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-31 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Setting insertion pointers

Insertion pointers determine the insert position for the next unit to be installed in the run
sequence. These are the different pointers:
• Chart insertion pointer
• Block insertion pointer

Chart insertion pointer Block insertion pointer

Before specifying as After specifying as

predecessor predecessor

You can modify the insertion pointers as follows:

• Chart insertion pointer (default OB35)
In the runtime editor, select the required OB or a block from the OB level (not within a
runtime group) or a runtime group within the OB. In the runtime editor, select the menu
command
Edit > Predecessor for Insertion Position
• Block insertion pointer
You cannot set the block insertion pointer in the runtime editor.
In the CFC editor, select the block after which all other blocks are to be installed.
In the chart, select the menu command
Edit > Predecessor for Insertion Position
If the block specified as the predecessor for insert position is deleted, the block insertion
pointer is set to the block installed before the deleted block. This also applies if the block is
moved to a different chart. The block insertion pointer in the destination chart is not
changed. The moved block retains the insert position it had in the previous chart.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-32 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.9.3 Optimization of the run sequence

You can change the run sequence according to which the program code of the blocks is
executed.

Manual configuration

Automatic optimization

Avoid implicit dead

times

Manual configuration
You can move blocks and charts in the runtime editor to the desired position or also to another
OB with a pressed mouse button.

Automatic optimization with the "Optimize Run Sequence..." command

This function uses an algorithm to determine the optimal arrangement of the blocks and runtime
groups. Note that the changes cannot be reversed afterwards. However, you can control the
automatic optimization of the run sequence by excluding single runtime groups or entire OBs
from the optimization.

Implicit dead times

This option can be activated in the CFC editor. If a new connection is then made between two
block I/Os, the insert position is immediately checked

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-33 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.9.4 Excluding runtime groups from automatic optimization

The Optimize Run Sequence option is available for all blocks of all charts of the relevant chart
folder.
Individual charts or even entire tasks can be excluded from the optimization:

Optimize the full task

including all enabled
runtime groups

Optimize all enabled

runtime groups of a task

Exclude individual Exclude the task including all the

charts from the runtime groups it contains completely
optimization from the optimization

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-34 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.10 Runtime properties

When inserted, each block is assigned default runtime properties. It is inserted into a task within
a run sequence. In S7, a task is an OB (organization block)
Runtime groups are used to structure or group organization blocks. They are created
automatically when a CFC is generated.
In the block header there is a colored rectangle with the runtime properties. By double-clicking
on this rectangle, you open the runtime editor to display or change the position of the block in
the run sequence.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-35 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.10.1 Enabling / disabling runtime groups

Result in the CFC editor: Symbol indicating

that these instances are not executed

Clear this option if blocks installed in this

runtime group should not be executed Result in the runtime editor: Symbol
indicating that these instances are not
executed

By selecting and deselecting the check box, the runtime group can be activated/deactivated for
processing as long as it is not interconnected. An interconnection always has priority.
In the details window of the runtime editor, the mode of the runtime group is displayed in the
"Inactive" column.
• The name corresponds to the runtime properties box of a block.
• The "!" character indicates that the relevant runtime group is inactive.
• The "?" character indicates that the "EN" parameter of the runtime group is interconnected
to a CFC or that the "EN" parameter is accessed by a CFC. For this reason, the runtime
group is not in the static process mode (can be active or inactive).
You can select or clear the option for the selected runtime group without needing to call up the
object properties with the shortcut menu commands:
Switching runtime groups on and off

Process object view

Runtime groups can also be activated/deactivated in the process object view of the SIMATIC
Manager. This option can be accessed using the "General" tab.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-36 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.10.2 Switching runtime groups on and off dynamically (during operation)

Symbol in the runtime editor

Symbol in the CFC editor

References
See [103] PCS 7 V9.1 Engineering System, section [Link] for further information about
adapting runtime properties.
Manual

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-37 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.11 Chart-based runtime group management for blocks of the CFC

Introduction
During configuration, the blocks of a CFC are automatically installed in a cyclic task for the so-
called standard program. In addition to this, the blocks are installed in the relevant runtime
groups according to the task list of the block type.
The CFC and runtime groups are defined separately from each other because the runtime
groups in which the block calls are programmed have no unique reference to a CFC.
This non-unique reference applies even when during creation of a CFC a corresponding runtime
group is generated automatically and a so-called insertion pointer is set to this runtime group or
to a block in this group.
With the so-called chart-based runtime group management, the blocks of a CFC are managed
automatically chart-based in their own runtime groups. This means that the blocks of this CFC
are organized in runtime units that are assigned permanently and exclusively to this CFC.

Rules

With the "Chart-based runtime group management"... Naming the runtime group of a CFC

The blocks of a CFC are automatically managed in their own runtime The runtime group of the standard program in the cyclic task is
groups based on the chart. given the name of the CFC.

The blocks of this CFC are organized in runtime units that are The runtime groups of the acyclic tasks are given the name of the
assigned permanently and exclusively to this CFC. standard program with the next free number added, e.g. "(1)".
The runtime group for the so-called "standard program" has the
same name as the CFC. The name of the assigned CFC is shown in
brackets in the runtime group in the runtime editor. When a CFC integrated in the chart-based runtime group
management is renamed, the runtime groups belonging to it are
No block of another CFC can be contained in the runtime groups of also renamed.
this CFC.
The runtime group of the CFC in OB100 automatically receives the
The runtime groups belonging to it are generated depending on the next free name based on the name of the CFC.
blocks used in the CFC.

If a CFC that is integrated in the chart-based runtime group

management is deleted, all block instances and all runtime groups
belonging to it are deleted.

Coexistence
In a project, CFCs integrated in the chart-based runtime group management can coexist with
CFCs that are not integrated.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-38 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Integration of new CFC: Chart-based insertion of runtime groups in OB100

With the option "Chart-based insertion" enabled...

• Each newly created CFC is automatically integrated in

the chart-based runtime group management
• When instantiating blocks with startup behavior, a
corresponding runtime group is created automatically
for each chart in OB100.
• All block instances with startup behavior in a chart are
inserted into the cyclic runtime groups and the runtime
group assigned to this chart in OB100.

• In PCS 7 projects created with V8.1 or higher, the option "Chart-based insertion" is enabled
automatically in the properties of the chart folder.
• With an upgraded project created with an earlier version than V 8.1, this option only affects
charts newly created after the option was enabled. Enabling the option does not influence
existing charts and their configuration.
To enable this function, select the relevant chart folder of the S7 user program in the component
view of the SIMATIC Manager and select the shortcut menu Object Properties >
Advanced.

Changing to the chart-based runtime group management

Migration of existing CFCs

• Existing CFCs are not automatically integrated in the

chart-based runtime group management.
• During migration, the associated runtime groups are
automatically adapted.
• This means that the entire chart folder or several
selected charts can be integrated.
Shortcut menu for the • Beforehand, you should determine whether reducing
chart folder or dependencies for selective downloading justifies the
individual charts effort required for re-sorting the existing runtime groups
in OB100.

References
See [302] PCS 7 V9.0 CFC for SIMATIC S7 - Function Manual,
section 10.11.8 for more information on adapting the runtime groups.
Manual

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-39 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.12 Exercise and checkpoints

7.12.1 Optional: "Calculation of an average" exercise

Task
Configure the calculation of an average value with subsequent smoothing of the calculated
value.

Then test the calculation using the trend display.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-40 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Procedure
1. Set the insertion position pointer for new runtime groups at OB32 (1000 ms).
2. Create the "Average" CFC in the "Demo" folder. Insert the following blocks from the "PCS 7
AP Library V91" library into the chart:
– Math > Add04; Name "Add" (The I/Os "In3" and "In4" are not needed)
– Math > Div02; Name "Div"
– Math > Lag; Name "PT1"
3. Interconnect the blocks as shown in the figure.
4. Configure the "Div.In2" I/O with the value "2" to create the average.
5. Configure the "[Link]" I/O with the value "5".
6. Add the following I/Os to a new trend display:
– Add.In1
– Add.In2
– [Link]
– [Link]
7. Compile and download the program in PLCSIM.
8. Start test mode in CFC.
9. Start the acquisition in the trend display.
10. Test the function by changing the values at the "Add.In1" and "Add.In2" inputs.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-41 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7.12.2 Checkpoints

How can you change the run sequence in the user program?
A. By manual moving in the runtime editor.
B. By automatic optimization in the runtime editor
C. By using the "Avoid implicit dead times" function in the CFC
editor.
D. By graphical overlapping of blocks in the CFC editor.

The organizational blocks of an AS ...?

A. Are the interface to the operating system.
B. Are divided into groups like cyclic interrupts, error OBs, startup
OBs and cyclic operation.
C. Have different priorities.
D. Are the same in every S7-400 CPU.

What do you have to consider when selectively downloading CFCs?

A. "Selective download" is only possible with CPU S7-410.
B. You can select which configured changes are transferred to the
target system and activated.
C. You can only load one chart into the target system at a time.
D. You can only use this function for migrated systems.

7 Basics of CFC and blocks 7-42 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

8 Connection to the process

Learning objectives
8.1 Learning objectives

• How are driver blocks used properly?

• How are symbolic names parameterized and I/O signals interconnected?
• How is a process simulation connected?

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

8 Connection to the process 8-1 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

8.2 Different block groups

The figure below shows the essential block groups required in the charts:
Different block groups
ES OS client OS client

OS server
Plant bus

Automation system (CPU)

PII Operator control and PIQ

monitoring

Process image output

Process image input

Input driver Signal processing Output drivers

Input Sensor Process Actuator Output

module module

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

Input drivers
... read the values from the process image input (PII) and make these process values available
at their outputs prepared for further processing by other blocks.

Signal processing
Processing of values without intervention from the outside.

Operator control and monitoring

Operator control and monitoring functions including the interface to the operator station. Block
icons and faceplates on the OS provide information about operating modes and allow the
process to be controlled.

Output drivers
... write the values (resuLIAs of signal processing, process commands) to the process image
output (PIQ).

Process images
The process image input (PII) and process image output (PIQ) form the interface between the
signals of the I/O modules and the user program of the CPU of an AS.

Updating
The transfer of the process values between the I/O modules and the process image is defined
by the settings in the properties of the CPU and the I/O modules.
The updating of the process values should be adapted to the speed of the signal processing.

8 Connection to the process 8-2 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

8.3 Driver blocks

8.3.1 General

Drivers form the interface between the process signals and the application. They are an
important part of a control loop.
Driver blocks

ES OS client OS client

OS server
Plant bus

Chart

PII PIQ
Pcs7DiIn MotL Pcs7DiOu
4 5 6 7
PV_In PV_Out FbkRun Start PV_In PV_Out

3 8

M
2 1

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

1. The control signal of a channel of the output module is wired to the motor (or its control
logic).
2. The feedback signal of the motor (or its control logic) is wired to a channel of the input
module.
3. The signals of the input module are transferred to the process image input (PII) on the
CPU.
4. The input driver reads the signal from the PII and transfers it to the chart in order to be
evaluated by technological blocks. It converts it to a process value.
5. A control block (technological block) receives the process value from the input driver. The
logic of the control block generates one or more control signals.
6. The output driver receives the control signal from the control block.
7. The output driver writes the control signal to the process image output (PIQ) on the CPU.
8. The control signals are transferred to the output module. The output module converts them
to suitable electrical signals.

8 Connection to the process 8-3 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

8.3.2 Digital and analog input and output driver blocks

Channel driver blocks are used in PCS 7 to process process signals from the plant in the AS
program. They are the interface between the hardware and the automation program and ensure
that input signals can be processed by the input modules in the AS program and output signals
Digital and analog input and
are transported fromoutput driver blocks
the AS program to the output modules.
A distinction is hereby made between digital and analog input and output driver blocks.

Digital input Digital output Analog input Analog output

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

8 Connection to the process 8-4 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

[Link] Digital input driver block "Pcs7DiIn"

Digital input driverThe
block
digital"Pcs7DiIn"
input driver block "Pcs7DiIn" processes signals that are read in from DI modules.
They can then be further processed in the automation program.
The "Pcs7DiIn" input driver block has the following important I/Os:

Signal from PII

Invalid process value

Simulation
Process value
Substitute value in including signal status
case of poor signal
status

Module out of service

I/Os for automatic
interconnection with
the module drivers

Process value including signal status

The digital value of the process image (partition) is output at the output parameter PV_Out with
the status of the module or channel (e.g. 16#80 = Good).
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

Retain last value if raw value is invalid

If the block is to retain the last valid value if the raw value is invalid, you need to activate this
function for Feature bit 30 "Output last valid value if raw value is invalid".

Output substitute value if raw value is invalid

If the block is to output a substitute value (SubsPV_In) if the raw value is invalid, you need to
activate this function for Feature bit 29 "Output substitute value if raw value is invalid".

Output invalid value if the raw value is invalid

If the block is to output an invalid value (PV_Out = PV_In), you need to activate this function for
Feature bit 28 "Output invalid raw value".
This function is the defauLIA setting.

Signal status for PCS 7 channel blocks

This block has the standard function "Form and output signal status for PCS 7 channel blocks".

Simulating signals
The block has the standard function "Simulate signals".

8 Connection to the process 8-5 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Digital output driver Digital

[Link] blockoutput
"Pcs7DiOut"
driver block "Pcs7DiOut"

The output driver block "PCS7DiOut" is used to set control signals in the plant. It has the
following important I/Os:
Process value
including signal
status
Invalid process signal
Simulation

Process signal to PIQ

I/Os for automatic

interconnection with
the module drivers

Module out of service

Formation of an I/O value

The digital value is written to the process image (partition). The signal status of the process
value (PV_ChnST) is set to "good" (16#80) depending on the diagnostic status of the respective
channel or module.
Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

Simulating signals
The block has the standard function "Simulate signals".

Flutter suppression
This block provides the standard function flutter suppression for channel blocks.

Signal status of the output channel

The output parameter PV_ChnST transports the signal status of the output channel as a
Display of structure
the signalandstatus of an
the value output driver
of PV_Out to return this information to the relevant technological block.
This requires an additional interconnection (e.g. PV_ChnST > StartChn).

Technological block, preview Technological block Output channel block

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

8 Connection to the process 8-6 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

[Link] Analog input driver block "Pcs7AnIn"

Analog input driverThe
block
analog"Pcs7AnIn"
input driver block "Pcs7AnIn" processes raw data values generated by AI modules
and scales them so that they can be further processed in the automation program. It has the
following important I/Os:
Input signal
from PII
Invalid process value
Scaling and unit of
measure
Process value
Simulation including signal status

Substitute value in Scaling and unit of

case of poor signal measure for further
status processing

I/Os for automatic Module out of service

interconnection with
the module drivers

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

8 Connection to the process 8-7 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course
Process value
Formation of thescaling
normal value

Measurement Distributed I/O AS

(4-20 mA)

12.96 mA 16#3C7B

PII Channel driver block Monitor block

20 mA (Pcs7AnIn) (MonAnL)

16#6C00

12.96 mA
5m 16#3C7B 16#3C7B 2.8 PV
(15483) IW512=
2.8 m
16#3C7B
2.8 m
m Unit

16#0000
4 mA
0m 5m
16#0000 16#6C00 [Link] [Link]
0m
(0) (27648)

The physical quantity is determined using a transducer; which in this case has a measuring
range of 4 to 20 mA. The analog input module converts the electrical signal to a raw data value
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

from 16#0 to 16#6C00 (unipolar measuring range). The input driver block, in turn, scales the
raw data value into a process value.
Depending on the module used, the Mode parameter is parameterized accordingly during the
compiling (e.g. 16#203 → measuring range 4-20 mA). In the measuring type, the I/O value for
4 mA is output for PV_In =[Link] and for 20 mA for PV_In = [Link].

The block writes input parameter Scale directly to the output parameter ScalOut and then
directly interconnects with a technological block. This can be the input parameter MV_Opscale
of a controller block, for example.
The normal value (physical quantity) is formed from the raw value using the parameters Scale
and Mode. Specify two scale values for the structured parameter Scale:
• High scale value ([Link])
• Low scale value (Scale Low)
The settings of the parameter Scale are copied to the output parameter ScaleOut. The output
parameter can be interconnected with a suitable input parameter of a technological block (e.g.
PV_OpScale).
The normal value is obtained using a linear characteristic curve. [Link] is the lowest
physical value the process variable can adopt, [Link] the highest.

8 Connection to the process 8-8 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Retain last value if raw value is invalid

If the block is to retain the last valid value if the raw value is invalid, you need to activate this
function for Feature bit 30 "Output last valid value if raw value is invalid".
You can also influence this function via the input parameter DeLIAaVal:
• DeLIAaVal ≤ 0: last value is retained, there is no influence
• DeLIAaVal > 0: last value or one before last is output

If you set DeLIAaVal > 0, the last PV_Out (k - 1) or one before last PV_Out (k - 2) valid output
value is output. PV_Out (k) is the current value, k the current time.
With the parameter DeLIAaVal you can specify a permitted process value change (PV_Out)
between two calls. The following options are available:
• For invalid raw values and DeLIAaVal > 0:
– When |PV_Out (k - 1) - PV_Out (k - 2)| > DeLIAaVal, then PV_Out = PV_Out (k - 2)
(one before last valid output value is output)
– When |PV_Out (k) - PV_Out (k - 1)| ≤ DeLIAaVal, then PV_Out = PV_Out (k - 1) (last
valid output value is output)
• For valid raw values and DeLIAaVal > 0:
– When |PV_Out (k) - PV_Out (k - 1)| > DeLIAaVal, PV_Out = PV_Out (k - 1) is output
for one cycle, i.e. DeLIAaVal is used to limit changes to the valid raw value. The signal
status at the output parameter PV_Out is additionally set to 16#60 and the output
parameter Bad is set to = 0.
The value of DeLIAaVal should be selected carefully. If it is too low, the signal status
can jump back and forth between 16#80 and 16#60 aLIAhough the raw value is OK.

Output substitute value if raw value is invalid

If the block is to output a substitute value (SubsPV_In) if the raw value is invalid, you need to
activate this function for Feature bit 29 "Output substitute value if raw value is invalid".

Output invalid value if the raw value is invalid

If the block is to output an invalid value (PV_Out = PV_In), you need to activate this function for
Feature bit 28 "Output invalid raw value".
This function is the defauLIA setting.

Delay of the value acceptance

After a successful restart or when the output parameter Bad changes its value from 1 to 0, the
signal status and value of the output parameter PV_Out are not updated until the number of
cycles for delay of the value acceptance (input parameter CountLim) have elapsed. During the
delay of the value acceptance, the signal status at the output parameter PV_Out = 16#00 and
Bad = 1. The last value is retained during the delay of the value acceptance.
When CountLim = 0, the function is disabled.

Signal status for PCS 7 channel blocks

This block has the standard function "Form and output signal status for PCS 7 channel blocks".

Simulating signals
The block has the standard function "Simulate signals".

8 Connection to the process 8-9 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

LowCutOff
The output value PV_Out is set to the lower value of the measuring ranger if the value falls
below the value set at the interface LowCutOff.
This function is released by Feature bit 5.

[Link] Analog output driver block "Pcs7AnOut"

Analog output driver block "Pcs7AnOut"
The output driver block "PCS7AnOut" is used to write process values in a plant. It has the
following important I/Os:

Process value
including signal
status Invalid process signal

Scaling and unit of

measure
Process signal to PIQ

Simulation
Scaling and unit of
measure for further
processing
I/Os for automatic
interconnection with
the module drivers Module out of service

Formation of an I/O value

The I/O value PV_Out is formed from:
• Scaling value (input parameter Scale)
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process
• Process value (input parameter PV_In)
• Measuring type (in/out parameter Mode)

Example of the measuring type 4 ... 20 mA

If this measuring type is to be used, the parameter Mode is set accordingly to 16#203 when
compiling. In the measuring type, the I/O value for 4 mA is output for PV_In =[Link] and
for 20 mA for PV_In = [Link].
The block writes input parameter Scale directly to the output parameter ScalOut and then
directly interconnects with a technological block. This can be the input parameter MV_Opscale
of a controller block, for example.

Limiting the process or I/O value

The I/O value can be limited in two ways:
• Limitation to the range limits
• Limitation to the scaling values

Limitation to the range limits (physical limits of the module)

If you want to limit the I/O value (PV_Out), you need to enable this function with the parameter
ScaleOff = 1.

8 Connection to the process 8-10 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

The I/O value is now limited to the following range limits:

• High: 16#7EFF (32511 dec.)
• Bottom unipolar: 0 or
• Bottom unipolar (4 - 20 mA; 1 - 5 V): 16#E500 (-6912 dec.)
• Bottom bipolar: 16#8100 (-32512 dec.)
Violation of the high or low limits is indicated by the output parameters PV_HiAct = 1 (high)
or PV_LowAct =1 (low). The signal status of the output parameter PV_ChnST is set to 16#78.

Limitation to the scaling values

If you want to limit the I/O value (PV_Out) to the scaling values, you need to enable this function
with the parameter ScaleOff = 0. You specify the scaling limits in the Scale parameter for
the high and low limits. If one of the limit values is exceeded, the limit value you entered at the
output parameter PV_Out is output. This is displayed at the output parameters PV_HiAct or
PV_LoAct = 1. The signal status of the output parameter PV_ChnST is set to 16#78.

Simulating signals
The block has the standard function "Simulate signals".

Flutter suppression
This block provides the standard function "Flutter suppression" for channel blocks.

Signal status for PCS 7 channel blocks

This block has the standard function "Form and output signal status for PCS 7 channel blocks".

References
For more information on the signal status of PCS 7 channel blocks, see
[113] PCS 7 V9.1 Advanced Process Library, section [Link].
For more information on simulating signals, see
Manual
[113] PCS 7 V9.1 Advanced Process Library, section [Link].

8 Connection to the process 8-11 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

8.4 Module drivers

The module drivers are required to determine errors in the modules, the state of a signal and to
parameterize the channel driver according to the hardware used. The charts with the module
drivers are automatically generated when the program is compiled and connected to the
channel driver blocks. For this purpose, the "Generate module drivers" option must be enabled
during compiling.
The module drivers are taken from the "PCS 7 BasisLibrary" and created in system charts
Module drivers
marked with an @ symbol. Do not make any changes in these automatically generated charts.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

The driver generator …

• … identifies the I/O module that belongs to the I/O address that is connected to the VALUE
input of the channel driver.
• … generates the charts "@(1) … @(7)" with driver blocks to allow diagnostics capability if
there are fauLIAs in the I/O circuitry.
Module drivers
• … creates interconnections between the module drivers and the channel driver blocks to
supply the channel driver blocks with information from the I/O modules.

Module driver block Channel driver block

Signal interconnection

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

8 Connection to the process 8-12 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

The interconnections provide the channel driver block with diagnostic information that can be
evaluated in the user program.

No changes are allowed in the system charts

No changes are allowed in the system charts since these involve system functions (indicated
CAUTION by "@").
This also applies to changes to the installation in OBs or runtime groups.

The content of runtime groups created by the driver generator ("Generate module drivers"
function) (@......) is not optimized since the correct order is already set here.
If optimization is executed after creating the module drivers, there is no guarantee that the
Note
runtime groups of the driver blocks are in the order specified by the driver generator.
Therefore, the module driver is restarted during the next compilation (the "Generate module
drivers" check box is selected).

8 Connection to the process 8-13 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Channel drivers and signal status

After the module drivers have been generated, each channel driver block is interconnected with
a module driver. As a resuLIA of this interconnection, the channel driver has access to
Signal status
diagnostic information.
The most important output of an input driver, the process value PV_Out is designed as a so-
called structure. This structure bundles the current process value and its signal status.

Signal status

Signal status of the code table

The signal status can assume various values, which entail a representation of the process value
with different symbols on the OS:

Description
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process
Priority Code OS symbol
Good 6 16#80

Maintenance demanded 5 16#A4

Uncertain, process-related 4 16#78

Uncertain, device-related 3 16#68

Bad, process-related 2 16#28

Bad, device-related 1 16#00

Manipulated value 0 16#60

Note that, after changes to the parameter assignment of signal groups in the hardware
configuration (e.g. measuring range), the Mode input of the channel driver block requires a
Note new value. In such cases, the driver generator needs to be run through again when compiling
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process
charts.

Signal status
You will find a table with the list of all possible mode settings for signal modules in the following
manuals:
• [112] PCS 7 V9.1 Basic Library, appendix 9.2
• [113] PCS 7 V9.1 Advanced Process Library, section 16.20

8 Connection to the process 8-14 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

8.5 Symbolic names for hardware addresses

Depending on the type of module, each signal module requires a defined address range in the
process image of the CPU.
As soon as an I/O module is configured in HW Config, absolute addresses are assigned to its
I/O signals.
A symbolic name will be assigned to each input/output address (for short: symbol). Each S7
program (each CPU, each AS) has a unique symbol table for storing this relationship between
symbolic names and addresses or blocks.

8.5.1 Parameterizing symbolic names

However, as several thousand signals often have to be processed in average-sized PCS 7

systems, this process impairs clarity during the configuration and maintenance of the AS
program.
To optimize
Parameterizing clarity,
symbol hardware addresses can be parameterized with symbolic names.
names
Parameters can be assigned on the hardware module or in the symbol table.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

Procedure
1. Open the hardware configuration for the automation system.
2. Select the I/O rack containing the modules whose symbolic addresses you want enter.
3. Select the module of the distributed I/O that you want to parameterize with symbolic
addresses.
4. Select "Edit Symbols...".
5. Enter symbols and, optionally, comments. Confirm with OK.
The symbolic names are added to the symbol table.

The symbol table is the central location of the symbolic names of all objects. In addition to the
hardware addresses, these can also be the symbols for block types, functions and user data
types.

8 Connection to the process 8-15 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course
Parameterizing
Eachsymbol names
S7 program, e.g. that of an automation system, contains exactly one symbol table.

You can also edit symbolic addresses directly in the symbol table. However, to do this, you
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process
need to know the hardware address and data type of the connection.

8.5.2 Interconnecting symbols

Interconnecting symbols
It is recommended to use symbolic names for all I/O signals.

1. In this example, a digital output driver is to be interconnected with an address. Open a

shortcut menu by right-clicking on the PV_Out output and select the "Interconnection to
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN
Address" | 08 Connection to the process
command.
2. A table shows the available Boolean symbols. Select the required symbol.
3. The interconnection is displayed in CFC as a line to the sidebar where all information from
the symbol table for this address is displayed.

8 Connection to the process 8-16 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

8.6Process
Process
image image partitions
partitions –
Examples of settings

3 CPU: OB32 > PIP2 OB33 > PIP3

4
4
PII Pcs7AnIn PIDConL Pcs7AnOu PIQ PIP2

T PIP2
I

AQ4
AI8 1
Chart OB32 (1 s)
5 5
PIP3 Pcs7DiIn VlvL Pcs7DiOu PIP3

Pcs7DiIn
DI16 DQ16
2
Chart OB33 (0.5 s)

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

1. Assuming that a chart for a temperature control is to be processed with a cycle of 1 second.
The chart is installed as a runtime group in OB32.
2. Assuming that a chart for opening/closing a valve is to be processed with a cycle of
0.5 seconds. The chart is installed as a runtime group in OB33.
3. In the properties of the CPU, settings must be made to enable a process image partition
PIP2 in OB32 and a further PIP3 in OB33.
4. The process image partition PIP2 must be activated in the properties of the input and output
modules whose signals need to be transferred from and to the process image triggered by
PIP2 (linked to OB32).
5. The process image partition PIP3 must be activated in the properties of the input and output
modules whose signals need to be transferred from and to the process image triggered by
PIP3 (linked to OB33).

8 Connection to the process 8-17 SITRAIN

Process image partitions –
Examples of settings
SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

OB1

OB32 300 ms 100 300 ms 100

1000 ms

OB33 200 ms 200 ms 200 ms 200 ms

500 ms

0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms Time 1500 ms 2000 ms

The time sequence diagram above indicates, with the same colored arrows as the picture
before, the time at which the values are transferred between the I/O modules and the process
image.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

Setting
Process forimage
CPU and I/O modules
partitions –
Setting forThe
CPU and I/O
following modules
figure shows the settings affecting the process image partition that need to be
made in the properties of the CPU and the I/O modules in HW Config.

The block @CPU_RT always requires the current values

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process
If there is a change in the cyclic interrupt times, the new values must also be
CAUTION available in the @CPU_RT.
Therefore, the program must be compiled after each change to the cyclic interrupt
times of a CPU.

References
See [103] PCS 7 V9.1 SP2 Engineering System, section [Link] for more details.

Manual

8 Connection to the process 8-18 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

8.7 Trend and dynamic display

8.7.1 Trend display

The CFC editor has a buiLIA-in tool for representing trends. It allows the recording of short-term
trends during commissioning and troubleshooting.
Trend display
A maximum of 12 values can be recorded within a trend display.

1. Select the View > Trend Display menu command in the CFC editor.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process
2. The window for the trend display shares the working area of the CFC editor with the
windows for the charts. Add, delete or rename a trend display. Arrange a suitable layout of
the windows.
3. Select suitable recording parameters: Number of values (10... 16000), recording cycle
(1...9 sec, 10...90 sec) and recording mode.
4. Drag the desired block I/Os with the mouse onto one of the 12 channels in the trend display.
You can assign values from different blocks and from different charts.
5. You can set the high limit and low limit for the display parameters (y axis) for each selected
channel with a numerical data type. If Boolean values need to be recorded, a pre-defined
area of the vertical axis is reserved per channel to display the values "False" and "True".
You specify the number of the measuring points to be displayed (x axis) for each specific
channel.
6. The "Start" button is only available in test mode. After starting, this button is replaced by a
"Hold" button. With this, you can stop the recording at any time.
7. Export the recorded data to a CSV file. Check the export settings with the menu command
Options > Customize > Export Trend Data.

8 Connection to the process 8-19 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

8.7.2 Dynamic display

Similar to the trend display, the dynamic display can also be used in CFC test mode. It is a table
Dynamic with
display
values of I/Os of blocks from different charts of a CPU. In the window, the values can be
displayed and monitored, and values of non-interconnected I/Os can be changed.

1. Select the View > Dynamic Display menu command in the CFC editor.
2. The window for the dynamic display shares the working area of the CFC editor with the
windows for the charts. Arrange the windows suitably and drag each of the desired block
I/Os
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 with
Connection to thethe
processmouse to a line in the dynamic display.

3. Add, delete or rename a dynamic display.

8 Connection to the process 8-20 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

8.8 Exercises and checkpoints

8.8.1 Exercise: Configuring symbolic names for hardware addresses

Parameterize the symbols on the I/O modules.

SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

Procedure
1. Open the hardware configuration for the automation system.
2. Select the I/O rack (e.g. ET 200M, ET 200SPHA) containing the modules whose symbolic
addresses you want enter.
3. Select the relevant signal module and select the "Edit Symbols" command in the shortcut
menu.
4. Refer to the following tables:

8 Connection to the process 8-21 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Type Address Symbol Comment

Digital input I0.0 Relay_NO Relay position opened
I0.1 Relay_NC Relay position closed
I0.2 EMS_Off Emergency Stop Off
I0.3 EMS_On Emergency Stop On
I1.0 T1 Button T1 on signal box
I1.1 T2 Button T2 on signal box
I1.2 T3 Button T3 on signal box
I1.3 T4 Button T4 on signal box
I1.4 S1 Switch S1 on signal box
I1.5 S2 Switch S2 on signal box
I1.6 S3 Switch S3 on signal box
I1.7 S4 Switch S4 on signal box

Type Address Symbol Comment

Digital output Q0.0 Relay_C Relay Control Signal
Q0.1 H1 Lamp H1 on signal box
Q0.2 H2 Lamp H2 on signal box
Q0.3 H3 Lamp H3 on signal box
Q0.4 H4 Lamp H4 on signal box

Type Address Symbol Comment

Analog input IW512 POT01 Potentiometer 1 on signal box
IW514 POT02 Potentiometer 2 on signal box

Type Address Symbol Comment

Analog output QW512 SP01 Analog output 1 on signal box
QW514 SP02 Analog output 2 on signal box

Results
You have assigned symbolic names for hardware addresses. You can now connect driver
blocks to the signal without having to know the exact hardware address.

8 Connection to the process 8-22 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

8.8.2 Exercise: Configuring driver bocks for acquiring signals and process values

Task
ask Create CFC with the driver blocks for acquiring signals and process values.

SignalboxDiIn SignalboxDiOu

SignalboxAnIn SignalboxAnOu

Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

Procedure
1. Create a CFC in each "Signalbox" folder of the TH with the names "SignalBoxAnIn" and
"SignalBoxAnOu".
2. Insert the required channel driver blocks PCS7AnIn (for analog inputs) and PCS7AnOu (for
analog outputs) from the APL library into the charts.
3. Connect the inputs (PV_In for the input driver blocks) and the outputs (PV_Out for the
output driver blocks) with the required symbolic addresses.
4. Adapt the values of the parameters "[Link] = -10" to "[Link] = +10" of all driver
blocks. The module is parameterized with the bipolar measuring range (-10/+10V). The unit
of the measured value is voLIAs (PV_InUnit = 1240)
5. Move the runtime groups of these charts to the task with the update cycle of 1000 ms
(OB32).
6. Follow the same procedure for 2 new CFCs "SignalBoxDiIn" and "SignalBoxDiOu", which
have to be called as runtime groups in the task with 500 ms (OB33).
7. Ensure that the correct digital input and output driver blocks PCS7DiIn and PCS7DiOu are
inserted and connected with the correct symbols from the symbol table.
8. The average of the 2 analog inputs is to be calculated in the "SignalBoxAnIn" chart. Also
add a delay block for the mean value (Lag block of the Math group) and set the LagTime
parameter to 10.
9. Perform an initial compile and download.

8 Connection to the process 8-23 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

10. In the "Test" menu of the CFC editor, activate Laboratory mode and set a watch cycle of
1 second.
11. Enable CFC test mode.
12. Test the new functions using the signal box or PLCSIM.
(See: 8.8.3 Optional exercise: Signal simulation with PLCSIM)
13. Create a dynamic display in the CFC editor with the name "Digital signal box" and add the
following signals of the digital I/O drivers to it:
– PV_Out of the input driver
– PV_In of the output driver
14. Observe the input signals in the value table and modify the values to be output.
15. Create a new trend display and add process values of the two potentiometers, as well as
the average value formed from these values. Observe the values while changing the
process values via the potentiometers.

Results
You have configured the first CFC and tested it. You used the associated engineering tools and
test options in this process. Here we have created the CFC charts ourselves, but there are also
ready-made templates for motors, valves, controllers, etc. We will use these for the process
tags in our Johnsson plant.

8 Connection to the process 8-24 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

8.8.3 Optional exercise: Signal simulation with PLCSIM

If you use the PLCSIM as an aLIAernative AS to test the program, you do not have the option of
working with real signals.
However, PLCSIM also offers the possibility to display or set process values and signals directly
using different input/output fields.
Task
Task
Simulate process signals and process values using PLCSIM.

1. Insert some input and output fields and enter the address range that is to be displayed. The
view changes depending on the address entered. For example:
– IB 1 → Input Byte 1 → Address: I1.0 to I1.7
–
Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process
QB 0 → Output Byte 0 → Address: Q0.0 to Q0.7
– IW 512 → Input Word 512 → Address: I512 to I513 (2 bytes)
– QW 512 → Output Word 512 → Address: Q512 to Q513 (2 bytes)
2. For process values, you can customize the display of the value. For example: Binary,
hexadecimal, integer or integer with slider.
Process values are always processed as raw data values in the process image of the
PLCSIM.
3. ALIAernatively, bits can also be displayed vertically. The advantage of this display is that
the symbolic name of the signal can be displayed.
4. You can read the symbolic names using the "Find Symbols" function. Navigate to the
symbol table of the project and confirm the selection.

Start the CFC test operation, change the process signals and process values of the inputs in
PLCSIM and compare the values on the input driver blocks.
In CFC test mode, change the values at the output driver blocks (PV_In) and compare them
with the displayed values in PLCSIM.

Results
You can now adapt and display process signals and process values with PLCSIM.

8 Connection to the process 8-25 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Why8.8.4
do @(..)Checkpoints
charts appear in the chart folder?

Why do @(..) charts appear in the chart folder?

A. These charts are used for the diagnostics on the
individual hardware components such as I/O modules,
IMs, subnets and CPU
B. Using these charts, diagnostics is carried out down to
the channel drivers and thus on the technological
blocks
C. From these charts, control messages are sent to the
OS
D. The number of @ charts may differ depending on the
hardware configuration

What are the @ charts needed for?

What are the @ charts needed for?

A. The diagnostics of I/O modules must be carried out
independently of the channels
B. This provides a central point where the hardware is
diagnosed and no unnecessary multiple diagnostics
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

C. Only the PA CPU needs these charts

D. This diagnostics is only possible with the conventional
CPU 400

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

8 Connection to the process 8-26 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

8.9 Connection of process simulation in this course

8.9.1 Positioning of process simulation in the course

For various reasons, we cannot provide a real process for training purposes. Instead, we offer a
process simulation for the inputs and outputs that simulates the process characteristics of a
plant.
The following figure shows the relationship between the user program running on the
automation system, the inputs and outputs of the process and the simulation replacing the real
Positioning
[Link] process simulation in the course

Hardware Software
I/O modules Driver blocks

Process image
AI
Controller
Pcs7AnIn block
AQ

Process Pcs7AnOu
DI
Process value
Name Pcs7DiIn Motor
DQ
block

Pcs7DiOu
Johnsson

Process
simulation

Symbol table

The process simulation (running as a function block on the CPU) uses the original process
image as interface to the user program on the AS. This allows you to configure the AS functions
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

with the aid of channel driver blocks in exactly the same way as with real applications.
The symbol table contains the signal names for the process values in the process image and
their addresses. These addresses should not overlap with those of the real hardware.

8 Connection to the process 8-27 SITRAIN

 –
Process simulation in the courseSIMATIC PCS7 System Course
Example of the simulated valve V311
Example of simulated valve YS311

CFC: @Johnsson 1

Johnsson

4
YS311
YS311_FBO

YS311_FBC
CFC: YS311 2 3
YS311_C
Pcs7DiIn VlvL Pcs7DiOu
YS311

Pcs7DiIn

Process image Process image

input (PII) output (PIQ)

Task
Task
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 08 Connection to the process

1. CFC with the name "@Johnsson", which contains the "Johnsson" simulation block. The
block calculates all process values (fill levels, temperatures, valve motor positions) of the
system. The chart exists only in the chart folder of the AS project, not in the technological
hierarchy.
2. A chart with the minimum number of blocks to monitor and operate the valve. This chart is
located in the plant hierarchy.
3. Control signal to the valve. The simulation block reads the value of the control signal
"YS311_C" and calculates the current position of the valve.
4. The simulation block writes the resuLIA to the input signals of the valve feedback
monitoring:
– "YS311_FBO" = open
– "YS311_FBC" = closed

8 Connection to the process 8-28 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

8.9.2 Overview

The number of inputs/outputs (I/Os) is based on the process devices (process tags) and their
required signal supply in the plant. The following table provides an overview of the process tags
and the corresponding I/Os:

Number DI DQ AI AQ
Open/close valves 25 50 25
Status valves 5 5
Motors/drives 11 11 11
Fill level 13 13
measurements
Temperature 4 4
measurements
Control valves 4 4 4

Total 62 66 36 21 4

Number of channels 16 16 4 4
per module
Number of modules 5 3 6 1

Lowest address I100.0 Q100.0 IW 208 QW 208

Highest address I110.5 Q105.1 IW 258 QW 214

8 Connection to the process 8-29 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

8.9.3 Digital inputs (DI)

Signal Address Data type Description

name
YS111_FBO I100.0 BOOL M110 Material tank inlet valve feedback
opened
NS113_FBR I100.1 BOOL M110 Material tank outlet pump feedback
on
YS112_FBC I100.2 BOOL M110 Material tank outlet valve feedback
closed
YS112_FBO I100.3 BOOL M110 Material tank outlet valve feedback
opened
YS121_FBO I100.4 BOOL M120 Material tank inlet valve feedback
opened
NS123_FBR I100.5 BOOL M120 Material tank outlet pump feedback
on
YS122_FBC I100.6 BOOL M120 Material tank outlet valve feedback
closed
YS122_FBO I100.7 BOOL M120 Material tank outlet valve feedback
opened
YS131_FBO I101.0 BOOL M130 Material tank inlet valve feedback
opened
NS133_FBR I101.1 BOOL M130 Material tank outlet pump feedback
on
YS132_FBC I101.2 BOOL M130 Material tank outlet valve feedback
closed
YS132_FBO I101.3 BOOL M130 Material tank outlet valve feedback
opened
YS211_FBC I102.0 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 1 feedback
closed
YS211_FBO I102.1 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 1 feedback
opened
YS212_FBC I102.2 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 2 feedback
closed
YS212_FBO I102.3 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 2 feedback
opened
YS213_FBC I102.4 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 3 feedback
closed
YS213_FBO I102.5 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 3 feedback
opened
YS221_FBC I103.0 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 1 feedback
closed
YS221_FBO I103.1 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 1 feedback
opened
YS222_FBC I103.2 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 2 feedback
closed
YS222_FBO I103.3 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 2 feedback
opened
YS223_FBC I103.4 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 3 feedback
closed
YS223_FBO I103.5 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 3 feedback
opened
YS231_FBC I104.0 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 1 feedback
closed
YS231_FBO I104.1 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 1 feedback
opened
YS232_FBC I104.2 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 2 feedback
closed

8 Connection to the process 8-30 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Signal Address Data type Description

name
YS232_FBO I104.3 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 2 feedback
opened
YS233_FBC I104.4 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 3 feedback
closed
YS233_FBO I104.5 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 3 feedback
opened
YS241_FBC I105.0 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 1 feedback
closed
YS241_FBO I105.1 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 1 feedback
opened
YS242_FBC I105.2 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 2 feedback
closed
YS242_FBO I105.3 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 2 feedback
opened
YS243_FBC I105.4 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 3 feedback
closed
YS243_FBO I105.5 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 3 feedback
opened
YS311_FBC I106.0 BOOL R310 Reactor inlet valve feedback closed
YS311_FBO I106.1 BOOL R310 Reactor inlet valve feedback opened
NS313_FBR I106.2 BOOL R310 Reactor outlet pump feedback on
YS312_FBC I106.3 BOOL R310 Reactor outlet valve feedback closed
YS312_FBO I106.4 BOOL R310 Reactor outlet valve feedback opened
NS316_FBO I106.5 BOOL R310 Reactor stirring motor feedback on
YS321_FBC I107.0 BOOL R320 Reactor inlet valve feedback closed
YS321_FBO I107.1 BOOL R320 Reactor inlet valve feedback opened
NS323_FBR I107.2 BOOL R320 Reactor outlet pump feedback on
YS322_FBC I107.3 BOOL R320 Reactor outlet valve feedback closed
YS322_FBO I107.4 BOOL R320 Reactor outlet valve feedback opened
NS326_FBR I107.5 BOOL R320 Reactor stirring motor feedback on
YS331_FBC I108.0 BOOL R330 Reactor inlet valve feedback closed
YS331_FBO I108.1 BOOL R330 Reactor inlet valve feedback opened
NS333_FBR I108.2 BOOL R330 Reactor outlet pump feedback on
YS332_FBC I108.3 BOOL R330 Reactor outlet valve feedback closed
YS332_FBO I108.4 BOOL R330 Reactor outlet valve feedback opened
NS336_FBR I108.5 BOOL R330 Reactor stirring motor feedback on
YS341_FBC I109.0 BOOL R340 Reactor inlet valve feedback closed
YS341_FBO I109.1 BOOL R340 Reactor inlet valve feedback opened
NS343_FBO I109.2 BOOL R340 Reactor outlet pump feedback on
YS342_FBC I109.3 BOOL R340 Reactor outlet valve feedback closed
YS342_FBO I109.4 BOOL R340 Reactor outlet valve feedbackopened

8 Connection to the process 8-31 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Signal Address Data type Description

name
NS346_FBR I109.5 BOOL R340 Reactor stirring motor feedback on
YS411_FBC I110.0 BOOL B410 Buffer tank inlet valve feedback closed
YS411_FBO I110.1 BOOL B410 Buffer tank inlet valve feedback opened
YS412_FBO I110.2 BOOL B410 Buffer tank outlet valve feedback opened
YS421_FBC I110.3 BOOL B420 Buffer tank inlet valve feedback closed
YS421_FBO I110.4 BOOL B420 Buffer tank inlet valve feedback opened
YS422_FBO I110.5 BOOL B420 Buffer tank outlet valve feedback opened

8.9.4 Digital outputs (DQ)

Signal Address Data type Description

name
NS113_C Q100.0 BOOL M110 Material tank outlet pump
YS112_C Q100.1 BOOL M110 Material tank outlet valve
NS123_C Q100.2 BOOL M120 Material tank outlet pump
YS122_C Q100.3 BOOL M120 Material tank outlet valve
NS133_C Q100.4 BOOL M130 Material tank outlet pump
YS132_C Q100.5 BOOL M130 Material tank outlet valve
YS211_C Q101.0 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 1
YS212_C Q101.1 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 2
YS213_C Q101.2 BOOL D210 Dose tank inlet valve 3
YS221_C Q101.3 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 1
YS222_C Q101.4 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 2
YS223_C Q101.5 BOOL D220 Dose tank inlet valve 3
YS231_C Q102.0 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 1
YS232_C Q102.1 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 2
YS233_C Q102.2 BOOL D230 Dose tank inlet valve 3
YS241_C Q102.3 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 1
YS242_C Q102.4 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 2
YS243_C Q102.5 BOOL D240 Dose tank inlet valve 3
YS311_C Q103.0 BOOL R310 Reactor inlet valve
NS313_C Q103.1 BOOL R310 Reactor outlet pump
YS312_C Q103.2 BOOL R310 Reactor outlet valve
NS316_C Q103.3 BOOL R310 Reactor stirring motor
YS321_C Q103.4 BOOL R320 Reactor inlet valve
NS323_C Q103.5 BOOL R320 Reactor outlet pump
YS322_C Q103.6 BOOL R320 Reactor outlet valve
NS326_C Q103.7 BOOL R320 Reactor stirring motor
YS331_C Q104.0 BOOL R330 Reactor inlet valve
NS333_C Q104.1 BOOL R330 Reactor outlet pump
YS332_C Q104.2 BOOL R330 Reactor outlet valve
NS336_C Q104.3 BOOL R330 Reactor stirring motor

8 Connection to the process 8-32 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

Signal Address Data type Description

name
YS341_C Q104.4 BOOL R340 Reactor inlet valve
NS343_C Q104.5 BOOL R340 Reactor outlet pump
YS342_C Q104.6 BOOL R340 Reactor outlet valve
NS346_C Q104.7 BOOL R340 Reactor stirring motor
YS411_C Q105.0 BOOL B410 Buffer tank inlet valve
YS421_C Q105.1 BOOL B420 Buffer tank inlet valve

8.9.5 Analog inputs (AI)

Signal Address Data Description Low High Unit

name type limit limit
LIA114_PV IW 208 WORD M110 Material tank level 0 6000 kg
LIA124_PV IW 210 WORD M120 Material tank level 0 6000 kg
LIA134_PV IW 212 WORD M130 Material tank level 0 4000 kg
LIA214_PV IW 216 WORD D210 Dosing level 0 400 kg
LIA224_PV IW 218 WORD D220 Dosing level 0 400 kg
LIA234_PV IW 220 WORD D230 Dosing level 0 400 kg
LIA244_PV IW 222 WORD D240 Dosing level 0 400 kg
LIA314_PV IW 224 WORD R310 Reactor level 0 700 kg
TT315_PV IW 226 WORD R310 Reactor temperature 0 200 °C
YC315_FB IW 228 WORD R310 Reactor temperature 0 100 %
control valve feedback position
LIA324_PV IW 232 WORD R320 Reactor level 0 700 kg
TT325_PV IW 234 WORD R320 Reactor temperature 0 200 °C
YC325_FB IW 236 WORD R320 Reactor temperature 0 100 %
control valve feedback position
LIA334_PV IW 240 WORD R330 Reactor level 0 1100 kg
TT335_PV IW 242 WORD R330 Reactor temperature 0 200 °C
YC335_FB IW 244 WORD R330 Reactor temperature 0 100 %
control valve feedback position
LIA344_PV IW 248 WORD R340 Reactor level 0 1100 kg
TT345_PV IW 250 WORD R340 Reactor temperature 0 200 °C
YC345_FB IW 252 WORD R340 Reactor temperature 0 100 %
control valve feedback position
LIA414_PV IW 256 WORD B410 Buffer tank level 0 12000 kg
LIA424_PV IW 258 WORD B420 Buffer tank level 0 8000 kg

8.9.6 Analog outputs (AQ)

Signal Address Data Description Low High Unit

name type limit limit
YC315_C QW 208 WORD R310 Reactor temperature control 0 100 %
valve
YC325_C QW 210 WORD R320 Reactor temperature control 0 100 %
valve
YC335_C QW 212 WORD R330 Reactor temperature control 0 100 %
valve
YC345_C QW 214 WORD R340 Reactor temperature control 0 100 %
valve

8 Connection to the process 8-33 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS7 System Course

8.10 Exercise: Installing process simulation

Task
Implement the process simulation for the Johnsson facility in this training session.

Procedure
1. Copy the "@Johnsson" chart from the chart folder of the course library into the chart folder
of your AS.
2. Apply the symbols of the Johnsson plant into your project. Copy them from the course
library and don't forget to save your new symbol table.
The symbols with the following addresses are required:
– "I100.0" to "I116.3"
– "IW 208" to "IW406"
– "Q100.0" to "Q109.3"
– "QW 208" to "QW 238"

Results
Our process simulation is installed and now we can configure the automation functions for
the plant.

8 Connection to the process 8-34 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9 Basic automation with the APL

9.1 Learning objectives
Learning objectives

• You know the basic functions of APL modules as well as the chart templates that
are available as a basis for creating the basic automation.

• You can parameterize APL blocks in their most important properties and carry out
initial tests of the basic automation in CFC test mode.

• You can configure and test the functions of the basic automation for the process
tags on the basis of the APL templates.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-1 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.2 Introduction to the APL blocks

9.2.1 The system library integrated in the standard: Advanced Process Library

The system library

SIMATIC integrated
PCS 7 provides in the
standardized and standard: Advanced
modular software Process
functions for process controlLibrary
and
visualization. In the standard engineering software, these ready-made and tested blocks,
faceplates and symbols for motors, valves, controllers and monitoring tasks are organized in
control libraries. The Advanced Process Library (APL) is installed by default.
Technological functions of APL

Timer
Counter Monitoring

Motors
Valves Alarming
Advanced
Process Library

PID Locking
Control

Dosing Operating

The APL contains blocks of the following categories (list not exhaustive):
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

Block family Automation functions

Comm Communication functions for AS-AS communication
Control Controller functions (PID)
Convert Converting data types
Count Counter blocks
Dosage Dosing
Drives Drives and valves
Interlock Interlock functions
LogicAn Logical functions (analog)
LogicDi Logical functions (digital)
Maint Maintenance functions (status evaluations)
Monitor Process monitoring
Operate Input blocks (signal or setpoint)
Report Alarm and message blocks
Timer Timers

Introductory information about APL can be found here:

The standard integrated system library: Advanced Process Library

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-2 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course
General functions of APL blocks
9.2.2 General functions of APL blocks

APL functions

• Operating modes (manual, automatic, local External Manual,

Error Automatic,
operation, out of service)
Local
• Evaluation of the signal status
• Evaluation of feedback signals
• Interlocks (Interlock, Protect, Permit)
• Configurable block behavior (Feature bits) Feature
• Parameterization of units of measure according Feedback
Bit
to standard
• Output of alarms and messages
• Processing of external errors
MotL
Alarms
Interlock
Permit
Protect Signal status

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

The APL contains some general functions to enable consistent configuration and operability.
For this purpose, standardized functions have been implemented in the blocks of the APL.
The general functions include:
• Operating modes (manual, automatic, local, out of service)
• Evaluation of the signal status
• Evaluation of feedback signals
• Interlock functions (Interlock, Permit, Protect)
• Configurable block behavior (Feature bits)
• Parameterization of units of measure according to standard
• Output of alarms and messages
• Processing of external errors

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-3 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.2.3 Compatibility of the libraries in PCS 7 V9.1

The PCS 7 Advanced Process Library (APL) is a block library for PCS 7 that was introduced
with PCS 7 Version 7.1. It covers all blocks and functions of the earlier PCS 7 Standard Library,
while of
Compatibility adding
the additional
librariesfunctions
in PCS to 7 blocks
V9.1 and completely new blocks.
The PCS 7 Standard Library is still available, however. It is also possible to use both libraries
simultaneously in a project (e.g. in a chart).

PCS 7 basic library V9.1

PCS 7 Advanced
PCS 7 Library V7.1 Diagnostic drivers Process Library V9.1
e.g. MOD_1 (version 9.5)

Only the correct

Technological functions
versions can work
Technological functions
ChnBlocks for PCS 7 V8 together! Channel driver (Version 9.5)
Operator control and monitoring Operator control and monitoring

Because the PCS 7 Standard Library and the PCS 7 APL can be used individually as well as
together, shared functions are contained in a PCS 7 Basis Library. These shared functions are
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL
primarily the module drivers.
With the release of PCS 7 V8.2, however, the PCS 7 Standard Library is not available in
Version 8.2 but rather only in its last version V7.1.3. As of PCS 7 V8.0, the standard library is no
longer installed automatically. If needed, it must be additionally installed manually.

Entry ID 109480136: Downloadable previous versions of SIMATIC PCS 7 libraries:

SIMATIC PCS 7 Libraries Updates

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-4 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.2.4 APL structures

Structures are a new feature of the APL. Every interconnectable parameter of a block is a
structure-type parameter. As a structural element, a structure contains the value of the signal
(Value) and the associated Signal Status (ST). Depending on the data type of the signal, the
structure consists of a certain number of bytes (at least 2 bytes).

• Analog Value: PV [STRUCT]: Value [REAL] + ST [BYTE]

• Binary Value: In [STRUCT]: Value [BOOL] + ST [BYTE]
APL structures and signal status (ST)
The figure below shows examples of interconnectable parameters and their structure

Analog value

Binary value

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-5 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.2.5 Signal status in the APL

Symbols and values

The concept of the signal status (symbols, values, priorities) meets the specification of the
international standards for the PA Profile PROFIBUS & PROFINET.
APL structures and signal status (ST)
The signal status (ST) is represented by symbols in the OS and by hexadecimal values in the
structure:

Symbols of the signal status

Symbol Prio Value (Hex) Signal status

0 16#60 Simulation

1 16#00 Bad, device-related

2 16#28 Bad, process-related

3 16#68 Uncertain, device-related

4 16#78 Uncertain, process-related

5 16#A4 Maintenance demanded

6 16#80 Good

For technological blocks, a group status is formed from input parameters (see description of the
corresponding blocks) according to a table.
This group status is shown in the status bar of the faceplate and the block icon.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL
Priority "0" has the highest priority. Priority "6" has the lowest priority.

If "Keep last value" or "Substitute value" was configured for the channel driver and a channel
Note error occurs, the signal status receives the value 16#60 instead of 16#00. The operator then
sees the symbol for "Simulation" instead of "Bad, device related" on the OS.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-6 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.2.6 Effect of the signal status

If process values are directly connected to the technological function block (e.g. MotL) via a
channel driver (Pcs7AnIn, Pcs7DiIn, Pcs7DiOu, etc.), the signal status is displayed directly in
the faceplate.
For other blocks, such as And04 or Or04, the signal status is inherited at the output according to
a logic.
The formation of the signal status of the outputs is based on the following premise:
• If any input at a gate causes a signal change at the output, the worst signal status of the
input must be taken, because every signal can influence the output.
• If several inputs equally ensure that the output cannot change, the best signal status from
these is taken because the output is definitively fixed by this signal.

Formation of the signal status of the outputs on AND and OR logic blocks
Formation Logic
of theblocks
signal status
have of the priority
a changed outputs on AND and
arrangement ORsignal
of the logicstatus
blocksat the output. The signal
status "Simulation" moves back two places.

Changed priority of logic blocks Comparison of signal status between AND and OR

Symbol Priority Value (Hex)

Legend: Worst signal status
Highest priority, Best signal status
0 16#00
worst status

1 16#28
In1 In2 In3 In4 Out AND Out OR
2 16#60 0 0 0 0 0 0
16#80 16#80 16#28 16#00 16#80 16#00
3 16#68
1 1 1 0 0 1
16#80 16#80 16#80 16#28 16#28 16#80
4 16#78
0 0 0 1 0 1
5 16#A4 16#80 16#80 16#80 16#28 16#80 16#28
Lowest priority, 1 1 1 1 1 1
6 16#80 16#80 16#80 16#28 16#00 16#00 16#80
best status

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

The signal status on logic blocks is subject to the following rules:

AND operation
If the signal state of the output is "1", the signal status of the output receives the worst status of
all inputs.
If the signal state of the output is "0", the signal status of the output receives the best status of
all inputs with the value "0".

OR operation
If the signal state of the output is "1", the signal status of the output receives the best status of
all inputs with the value "1".
If the signal state of the output is "0", the signal status of the output receives the worst status of
all inputs.

Inputs which are not interconnected are not taken into account.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-7 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course
Formation of the signal status of the outputs on AND and OR logic blocks:
Example of the signal status of the outputs on AND and OR logic blocks: Example
Formation

Best status

The result is "1" → The best status of all inputs with a value of
"1" determines the status of the output.

Worst status

The result is "0" → The best status of all inputs

determines the status of the output

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

Special cases
For the Trip parameter and the three interlock parameters (Permit, Intlock, Protect), the signal
status has a direct effect on the function of the technological block.
If a bad signal status (16#00 or 16#28) exists in these cases, it has the same effect as a
process value = 0.

See [113] PCS 7 Advanced Process Library V9.1, section 2.1.5 for more details on the
formation of the signal status.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-8 SITRAIN

Feature parameter SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.2.7 Feature parameter

In the APL, most of the technological blocks have the Feature input parameter. This parameter
allows the manufacturer to implement different industry-specific customer requirements and to
© Siemens 2022 add functional
| SITRAIN | 09 Basicenhancements later.
automation with the APL

The parameter is a structure and contains 32 Boolean elements that can be used to set different
technological behavioral patterns and enable additional block functions. Not all elements of the
Feature parameter are assigned at present. The unassigned reserve bits can be assigned for
functional enhancements later by the manufacturer (Siemens).
The parameter assignment of the individual bits of the Feature parameter is done by double-
clicking the Feature input of the block (offline/online, see figure above). It is recommended that
the "Feature" bits in the templates be configured in the master data library to ensure
consistency within the multiproject.

Change of the block behavior without stopping the AS

The manufacturer can introduce functional enhancements in which additional feature bits are
assigned. If no additional parameters are added, such a modified block can be loaded without
stopping.
The original block behavior can continue to be used.

See [113] PCS 7 Advanced Process Library V9.1, section 2.1.9 for
Parameterizable behavior via the feature connection (assignment of feature bits).

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-9 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.2.8 Feedback monitoring

The feedback messages from devices can be issued via one or more binary signals, or via an
analog signal, such as the setting position of a valve. For this purpose, corresponding inputs are
provided at the technological blocks. Through these inputs, the block can recognize the
effectiveness of a switching command and react accordingly.

Deactivation of monitoring
You can activate or deactivate the feedback monitoring. Monitoring is parameterized via the
"Monitor" input.
Monitor = 0 -> Monitoring disabled
Monitor = 1 -> Monitoring enabled (default setting)

Static and dynamic errors are reset by deactivating the monitoring (Monitor = 0). If you
reactivate the monitoring while the plant is running, only the dynamic monitoring
("MonTiDynamic") will be performed.

Deactivating feedback
You can operate a block without feedback.
You can set the "NoFbkRun = 1" parameter for the "MotL" block.
You can parameterize the two feedback signals "NoFbkOpen = 1", "NoFbkClose = 1"
independently for the "VlvL" block.

The operating status ("Stop" or "Run", "Opened" or "Closed") is then tracked according to the
control signal.

Note that the monitoring time parameters must be assigned as follows:

"MonTiDynamic" ≥ "MonTiStatic" and "MonTiDynamic" ≥ "SampleTime"
Note
If the parameters are assigned outside these limits, the block returns the respective limit value
to the input.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-10 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course
Feedback monitoring (MonTiDynamic)
Feedback monitoring (MonTiDynamic)

Valve position Open

Fault !
Close

Ctrl = 1
0

FbkOpen = 1
0

Feedback error
FbkClose = 1
0

MonTiDynamic 5 s
0s

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

The monitoring of the startup behavior for motors or the runtime of valves is implemented via
the "MonTiDynamic" parameter. The monitoring time specifies the period in which the
corresponding feedback value, e.g. "FbkRun" for the motor, must be present on a control signal.
If this is not the case, an error message is triggered on the block.
The block then goes to its safe position. For motors, this is always the stop state. For other
blocks, it is a safe position specified by you ("SafePos" parameter). The block signals this at the
relevant output parameter of the error message with 1, e.g. for the motor with "MonDynErr = 1".
The parameters are assigned in seconds and apply to the opening and closing of the valve. If
required, the monitoring time for the "MonTiDynamic" startup and the "MonTiDyStop" outlet can
be set separately for the motor.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-11 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course
Feedback monitoring (MonTiStatic)
Feedback monitoring (MonTiStatic)

?
Valve position Open
Close

Ctrl = 1
0

FbkOpen = 1
! Signal failure Feedback error

FbkClose = 1
0

MonTiStatic 5 s
0s

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

The monitoring of the running behavior for motors or the holding of valve positions is
implemented with the "MonTiStatic" parameter. The monitoring time specifies the period in
which the feedback value can briefly change its value without an error message being output.
The feedback signal should be static according to the control.
If the value change takes longer than the set value, an error is output and the block then goes to
its safe position. For motors, this is always the stop state. For other blocks, it is a safe position
specified by you (SafePos parameter). The block signals this at the relevant output parameter of
the error message with 1, e.g. for the motor with "MonStaErr = 1".
The parameter is assigned in seconds.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-12 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.2.9 Error handling

Channel blocks and technological blocks have an error handling function. The following areas
must be differentiated here:
• Error numbers
• External control system fault (CSF)
• Process-related errors
Error handling
• Invalid signal states
• Mode switchover errors
• Errors in channel blocks

Group error

External error Error number

External control
system fault

External alarms

External error
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

External errors are hardware errors at the field and control level, such as motor torque or
overtemperature. These errors are usually detected via a signal at the I/O and connected to the
"FaultExt" input. If there is an external error, the safe position is triggered.
A message is not output. However, if required, this can be generated and parameterized via the
inputs "ExtMsg1", "ExtMsg2" and "ExtMsg3".

External control system fault (CSF)

An external control system fault is always located outside of the process. It takes the form of
device or other hardware faults. If a valve operating time error occurs, for example, a fault can
exist in the pneumatics.
The control system fault is output when an external fault is supplied via the CSF input.
For example, you interconnect the Bad output of the channel block to the CSF input of the
technological block for this purpose. The fault has no further effect on the block algorithm.
Multiple sources (e.g. bad outputs of multiple channel driver blocks) can be logically combined
using digital logic (e.g. OR04).

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-13 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

Error numbers
Most blocks have output parameter ErrorNum, which is used to output the possible block-
internal error states as an error number.
If the block algorithm recognizes invalid combinations of input signals, an error number
(ErrorNum) is output as a function of the block type.
This error is output if inconsistencies between associated I/Os occur. In this way, for example, a
valve will not simultaneously receive the commands for opening and closing.

Outputting a group error

Output parameter GrpErr groups the faults of a block and makes them available to you.
The group error is made up of the following error information:
• Feedback errors (static or dynamic feedback monitoring)
• External errors
• Motor protection (for motors only)
• Module errors (for hardware controllers only)
• I/O access error (for hardware controllers only)
• Parameter assignment error (for hardware controllers only)
The block type determines how the group error is formed.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-14 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course
Units of measure in the APL
9.2.10 Units of measure in the APL

Extract from the unit table

Value Symbol Description

1001 °C Degrees Celsius

1038 L liters

1077 Hz Hertz

1088 kg Kilograms

1137 bar Bar

1138 mbar Millibars

Output of the unit for 1342 % Percent
interconnection with
Cubic meters per
other blocks 1349 m³/h
hour
1422 pH pH value

For a complete list of available units, see the online help "Select unit of measure"

The procedure for setting the unit for analog signals will be explained using an example with the
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

Pcs7AnIn (input channel driver) and MonAnL (monitoring block) blocks.

The unit is represented by a code number at the PV_InUnit input.
The code number "1342" stands for the unit "%", for example. The input channel driver forwards
the unit of PV_InUnit to its PV_OutUnit output. Through the interconnection to input PV_Unit of
the monitoring block, the unit "%" is displayed in the faceplate of the monitoring block.

If the PV_Unit input of MonAnL is configured with 0, the unit can also be specified using the
conventional method ("S7_unit", or in the CFC in the block properties ("I/O" tab) of the
Note MonAnL in the "Unit" column for this input). This method can be used for units that are not
listed.

Customer-specific units
It is possible to use units that differ from the IEC 611582 standard. You can specify your own
units in the range between 1 to 199 in an XML file. The name of the XML should be
[Link] and should be stored in the project path in the "GraCS" folder on both
the server and the client.

See [113] PCS 7 Advanced Process Library V9.1, section [Link] for more details on units of
measure in the APL.
Alternative:
For information on data type and possible code numbers, see help for the "MonAnL" block
and then use search term "Select unit of measure".

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-15 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.3 Brief description of selected APL blocks

9.3.1 MonAnL – Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)
PV01
MonAnL OB35
Analog measurement monitoring
4 -
/ Large
1
PV MS_Release Release for maintenance active
Measured value and hysteresis
PV_Hyst PV_Out Process value output for forwarding
PV_AH_Lim PV_Grad
Gradient and
PV_WH_Lim PV_GradPP
Max/Min gradient
Limits for monitoring of the process value PV_TH_Lim PV_GradNP
Alarm - Warning - Tolerance PV_TL_Lim PV_AH_Act
PV_WL_Lim PV_WH_Act
PV_AL_Lim PV_TH_Act
Limit violation active
GradHUpLim PV_TL_Act
Limits for monitoring the GradHDnLim PV_WL_Act
process value change and attenuation GradLLim PV_AL_Act
LagTime PV_AH_Out
PV_OpScale_High PV_WH_Out
Scaling of the display (M&C), PV_OpScale_Low PV_TH_Out Output of the limit values
Unit and zero point suppression PV_Unit PV_TL_Out for forwarding
DeadBand PV_WL_Out
PV_A_DC PV_AL_Out
PV_A_DG OosAct
Out of service / On active
Delay times for incoming/outgoing PV_W_DC OnAct
Limit violation alarms PV_W_DG
PV_T_DC
PV_T_DG
PV_AH_En
PV_WH_En
PV_TH_En
Enables for limit value monitoring
PV_TL_En
PV_WL_En
PV_AL_En
GradHUpEn
Enables for monitoring
GradHDnEn
of the process value change
GradLEn
"Out of service" per link OosLi
PV_AH_MsgEn
PV_WH_MsgEn
Limit monitoring messages PV_TH_MsgEn
enable PV_TL_MsgEn
PV_WL_MsgEn
PV_AL_MsgEn
Time unit (seconds, minutes, hours) TimeFactor
UserAna1
Associated values and their unit UA1Unit
display on the faceplate UserAna2
UA2Unit
SimLiOp
Simulation mode and
SimOnLi
Simulation value
SimOn
External error CSF
Step function to blocks, SelFp1
which are interconnected here SelFp2
OS_Perm
Operator control enables
OpSt_In
Parameters for features Feature

The block is used for the following application areas:

• Monitoring of an analog process value, e.g. pressure, temperature, flow, level, etc.
• Monitoring of increases of an analog process value

How it works
The MonAnL block is used for monitoring an analog process tag with monitoring for limits. In
addition, the increase of the signal is monitored. If limits are violated or if the signal increase
does not conform to requirements, messages are generated and output.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-16 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.3.2 MotL – Motor (Large)

The block is used for the following application areas:

• Control of simple motors with a control signal or via start/stop pulse signals
• Feedback monitoring (Feedback)

Manual - Automatic switchover

The operator can make the switch on the OS, or the switchover can occur automatically via the
circuitry in the CFC/SFC. For the switchover in the CFC/SFC, the ModLiOp, AutModLi and
ManModLi inputs are available on the MotL block.
The selected operating mode is shown to the operator in the faceplate on the OS. The AutAct
and ManAct block inputs are available for querying the operating mode in a CFC/SFC logic.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-17 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

On - Off control in automatic mode

If automatic mode is preselected (AutAct =1), the drive can be switched on and off using logic in
the CFC or via the SFC. The two block inputs StartAut and StopAut are available for the control.
Whether both inputs or just the StartAut input is used is specified with the Feature bit 4 "Switch
or pushbutton operation":
• Pushbutton operation (Feature bit 4 = 0), preselected:
In pushbutton operation, the motor is switched on using input StartAut = 1. The motor is
switched off using input StopAut = 1. The two inputs must not have signal state "1"
simultaneously. A "1" at both inputs is displayed on the OS and indicated at the ErrorNum
output of the MotL block with "51".
• Switch operation (Feature bit 4 = 1):
In switch operation, the drive is switched on and off using input StartAut. The StopAut input has
no function in switch operation.
However, the drive can only be switched on and off when the corresponding enables are
present and no interlocks (Permit, Interlock, Protect) are present.

Warning times
Warning times can be configured for the function block for motors. Using the WarnAct output, a
signal light or a horn can be controlled, for example. These warning signals enable operators to
be informed about the impending start of the corresponding drive.
Warning times can be configured separately for manual and automatic modes:
• Manual operation: Input parameter WarnTiMan (in unit of seconds)
• Automatic mode: Input parameter WarnTiAut (in unit of seconds)
If WarnTiMan or WarnTiAut is configured with 0, the WarnAct output is not controlled in the
corresponding operating mode and thus no warning is output.
The configuration of warning times delays the actual start command by the configured warning
time.

Restart lock after switching off the motor

The IdleTime input parameter is used in the motor block as a waiting time (in seconds) for a
restart. If a running motor is switched off, it can only be restarted after this time has elapsed.
This starting interlock is active in manual and automatic operation and with StartForce.
If the drive is controlled in local operation by the block and directly by the switchgear, the
starting interlock is also active here.

Forcing start or stop

For drives, unfavorable process conditions (e.g. overpressure) can arise that require drives to
be switched on or off even without enables or despite interlocks.
Two force inputs are available for this:
• Force motor ON: StartForce = 1
• Force motor OFF: StopForce = 1

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-18 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.3.3 VlvL – Valve (Large)

Valve01
VlvL OB35
Valve - Large 4 / 1
OpenAut MS_Release Release for maintenance active
Open and close commands CloseAut MonDynErr
(Manual and Automatic mode) OpenMan MonStaErr Feedback error
CloseMan LockAct (interlock, group error)
ModLiOp GrpErr
AutModOp RdyToStart
Ready to open or reset
ManModOp RdyToReset
Prewarning active (WarnTiMan, WarnTiAut)
Mode selection AutModLi WarnAct
"Manual", "Automatic", "Local", "Out of service" ManModLi Ctrl
Control of the valve
Via interconnection (Li) or operator (Op) LocalLi P_Open
(static or pulse signal)
LocalOp P_Close
OosOp LocalAct
OosLi AutAct
Output of the active mode
Open and close commands OpenLocal ManAct
(Local operation) CloseLocal OosAct
Settings for local operation LocalSetting FbkOpenOut
FbkOpen FbkCloseOut
FbkClose Opened Output of the feedback signals
NoFbkOpen Closed Status of the valve (closed, opening, open or closing)
Monitoring feedback
NoFbkClose Opening
Setting the monitoring times
Monitor Closing
MonTiStatic ST_Worst Worst signal status
MonTiDynamic
Enables safety position in case of feedback error MonSafePos
and defines the safety position SafePos
WarnTiMan
Prewarning time for valve movement
WarnTiAut
RstLi
Permit
Interlock functions Intlock
Protect
OpenForce
Force opening and closing of the valve
CloseForce
UserAna1
Associated values with unit UA1unit
(Display on the faceplate) UserAna2
UA2unit
Signal status of the output channel "Start" StartChn
FaultExt
External error, control system fault
CSF
Step function to faceplates SelFp1
here interconnected blocks SelFp2
OS_Perm
Operator control enables
OpSt_In
Feature
Parameters for additional functions
Feature2

The VlvL block is used to control a valve in two positions (OPEN/CLOSED) with configurable
safety position.
This valve is open or closed using a control signal. The control is monitored by means of the
position signals OPEN/CLOSED (feedback). If feedback is not available, it can be derived from
the control in the block.
Some of the block I/Os of the valve block are described below.

Manual – Automatic operation

The operating mode switchover is equivalent to that of the motor block. In CFC / SFC, the
ModLiOp, AutModLi and ManModLi inputs are available.

Open – Closed control

The two block inputs OpenAut and CloseAut are available in automatic mode for the control.
Whether both inputs or just the OpenAut input is used for the control is specified, as with the
motor block, via Feature bit 4 (pushbutton / switch operation).
However, the valve can only be opened and closed when the corresponding enables are
present and no interlocks (Permit, Interlock, Protect) are present.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-19 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

Warning times and monitoring times

Warning times can be configured separately for manual and automatic modes for the valve
block just like for drive blocks:
• Manual operation: Input parameter WarnTiMan (in unit of seconds)
• Automatic mode: Input parameter WarnTiAut (in unit of seconds)
If WarnTiMan or WarnTiAut is configured with 0, the WarnAct output is not controlled in the
corresponding operating mode and thus no warning is output.
The configuration of warning times delays the actual command by the configured warning time.
The monitoring times familiar from the motor block are also available for the valve.

Forcing of operating states

Like for motors, it may also be necessary to open or close valves regardless of enables and
interlocks. Two force inputs are available for this:
• Force value OPEN: OpenForce = 1
• Force valve CLOSED: CloseForce = 1

Safety position
The safety position (open or closed) can be configured using the SafePos parameter:
• SafePos = 0: When Ctrl = 0, the valve drive closes, and when Ctrl = 1, the valve drive opens
(de-energized position "Closed").
• SafePos = 1: When Ctrl = 0, the valve drive opens, and when Ctrl = 1, the valve drive closes
(de-energized position "Open").

Note It is contrary to the philosophy of PCS 7 to place other blocks between the drive block and
the output driver.
If you deviate from this principle, you must ensure that all blocks that influence the control
signal that are located between the control output of the drive block and the channel driver
are also in the same OB.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-20 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.3.4 PIDConL – Continuous PID controller (Large)

PIDConl
The block is a PID controller with continuous output signal (manipulated variable). It is used to
"Main circuit"
control an actuator with continuous action input.
The block works according to the PID algorithm with delayed D component and an integrator
with double precision.

PIDConL

Logic for
internal/external
setpoint setting
Deadband
External Gain
SP_Ext TI
Internal TD
SP_Int
…….
+
PV PID
- Auto MV

Man Manual

PIDConl "Main circuit"

Logic for
manual/automatic
switchover

Logic for Logic for

internal/external setpoint setting manual/automatic switchover

SP_LiOp ModLiOp

SP_ExtLi AutModLi
S S
SP_ExtOp AutModOp
1
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL 1

SP_IntLi ManModLi
R R
SP_IntOp ManModOp

Feature.Bit4: Feature.Bit4:
0 = Pushbutton operation 0 = Pushbutton operation
1 = Switch operation 1 = Switch operation

Manual and automatic operation for controller blocks

In manual operation, the device is manually controlled by the operator. The operator decides
how the manipulated variable (output signal) is changed for the block. The manipulated variable
can be an analog or binary value.
In automatic operation, the block algorithm calculates the control of the controller.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-21 SITRAIN

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL
 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

Switching between operating modes

The switchover between manual and automatic operation is carried out according to the
following scheme:
• Switchover using faceplate (ModLiOp = 0):
The switchover between the operating modes is carried out in the standard view of the
faceplate. The ManModOp parameter of the function block is used for "Manual mode", and
the AutModOp parameter for "Automatic mode".
If both signals are set (ManModOp =1, AutModOp = 1), ManModOp = 1 has the higher
priority.
• Switchover using interconnection (CFC or SFC instance) (ModLiOp = 1):
The switchover between the operating modes is by means of an interconnection on the
function block. In pushbutton operation, the ManModLi parameter is used for manual
operation and the AutModLi parameter for automatic operation. In switch operation
(requirement: Feature bit 4 = 1), only the ManModLi I/O is used. If both signals are set
(ManModLi =1, AutModLi = 1), ManModLi = 1 has the higher priority.

Internal and external setpoint setting

First, you always specify whether the setpoint is to be set by a CFC/SFC program or using the
faceplate. In the next step, you specify whether the internal or external setpoint is to be used.
• Setpoint setting via faceplate or interconnection
You use the SP_LiOp parameter to specify whether the setpoint is to be set by a CFC/SFC
program or using the faceplate.
– Set parameter Sp_LiOp = 0 if the setpoint is to be set using the faceplate.
– Set parameter SP_LiOp = 1 if the setpoint is to be set by a CFC/SFC program.
• Internal and external setpoint setting
Depending on how the setpoint is to be set, you must set the corresponding parameters.
If the setpoint is set using the faceplate (SP_LiOp = 0), you must set parameters as follows:
– SP_IntOp = 1 to set an internal setpoint using the faceplate.
– SP_ExtOp = 1 to set an external setpoint using the faceplate.
If both signals are set, SP_IntOp = 1 has the higher priority. If the setpoint is set by a
CFC/SFC program (SP_LiOp = 1), you must set parameters as follows:
– SP_IntLi = 1 to set an internal setpoint via a CFC/SFC program.
– SP_ExtLi = 1 to set an external setpoint via a CFC/SFC program.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-22 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

Program mode for controllers – Interface for higher-level control functions

The interface for higher-level control functions (external Advanced Control software packages)
enables higher-level control functions that run on an external PC as OPC client to take over the
control of the controller function block and to externally set the setpoint or manipulated variable.
This mode of operation is referred to as program mode.
Using Feature bit 19 (enable program mode), you specify whether the controller block is to be
made available for program mode.
Program mode requires an enable signal (input parameter AdvCoEn = 1) from a central control
block. If the enable signal is reset from 1 to 0, e.g. due to OPC communication errors, the
controller block reverts back to the operating mode it was in before program mode.
Selection of the type of program mode
There are two types of program mode:
• Program mode with setpoint setting (in automatic operation only)
If you set input parameter AdvCoModSP = 1, the analog value supplied by the OPC client
(AdvCoMV) is used as the external setpoint for the controller. Otherwise, the controller and
faceplate behave the same as in automatic operation with external setpoint. See also the
section on internal and external setpoint setting.
Requirements for program mode with setpoint setting are:
– AdvCoModSP = 1,
– AdvCoEn = 1,
– Controller is in automatic operation
• Program mode with manipulated variable setting (in manual operation only, not for step
controller without position feedback)
If you set input parameter AdvCoModSP = 0, the analog value supplied by the OPC client
(AdvCoMV) is used as the external manipulated variable setting for the controller. The
algorithm of the PID controller is bypassed. Otherwise, the controller and faceplate behave
the same as when tracking (MV_TrkOn = 1).
Requirements for program mode with manipulated variable setting are:
– AdvCoModSP = 0,
– AdvCoEn = 1,
– Controller is in manual operation

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-23 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course
PID01
PIDConL OB35
Continuous PID Controller - Large
4 / 1
NegGain MV
Manipulated variable
Gain MV_HiAct
Limit violation of the manipulated variable
TI MV_LoAct
Control parameter
TD RbkWH_Act
Output of the manipulated variable feedback
DeadBand RbkWL_Act
and the limit violation
ConZone LockAct
SP_LiOp MS_Release Release for maintenance active
Setpoint source and setpoint: SP_ExtLi GrpErr Output of group error and
Internal/external setpoint SP_IntLi RdyToStart Ready to power up
Via interconnection or operator SP_Ext OosAct
(Inputs for the operator are hidden) SP_ExHiLim ManAct
SP_ExLoLim AutAct Output of:
PV LoopClosed - Operating mode
PV_AH_Lim SP_ExtAct - Setpoint source
PV_WH_Lim AdvCoAct - Setpoint used
Process value (controlled variable)
PV_TH_Lim AdvCoRdy - Status of the control loop
Limits for monitoring
PV_TL_Lim SP - Readiness for program mode
Input for additive disturbance variable activation
PV_WL_Lim SP_ExtOut
PV_AL_Lim SP_IntOut
FFwd PV_Out
MV_TrkOn PV_AH_Act
Inputs for manipulated variable tracking Output of:
MV_Trk PV_WH_Act
- Actual value
ModLiOp PV_TH_Act
- Control deviation
AutModLi PV_TL_Act
Mode selection: - Limit violations
ManModLi PV_WL_Act
"Manual", "Automatic", "Local", "Out of service" - Controller error
AdvCoEn PV_AL_Act
Via interconnection or operator
AdvCoMod ER
(Inputs for the operator are hidden)
AdvCoMV PV_UnitOut
Units of setpoint and manipulated variable
OosLi MV_UnitOut
OptimEn P_Part
Inputs for control quality monitoring CPI_In I_Part Output of P, I and D components
RefStdDevIn D_Part
MV_HiLim DynDeadBand
Active dynamic dead band
Limits of the manipulated variable MV_LoLim PhaseDeadBand
Forcing of the setpoint (force) MV_ForOn
MV_Forced
SafePos
Safety position of the manipulated variable
SafePos2
Input for interlock signal
MV_SavePos
Intlock
Feedback from the manipulated variable Rbk
Limits of the manipulated variable RbkWH_Lim
RbkWL_Lim
SimLiOp
SimOnLi
Inputs for simulation of
SimOn
Process value and manipulated variable feedback
SimPV
SimRbk
PV_OpScale_High
PV_OpScale_Low
Scaling of the display on the faceplate MV_OpScale_High
Units for process value and manipulated variable MV_OpScale_Low
PV_Unit
MV_Unit
Signal status of output channel of MV MV_ChnST
Time unit (seconds, minutes, hours) TimeFact
Control system fault CSF
OS_Perm
Operator control enables OS1Perm
OpSt_In
Feature
Feature parameter
Feature2
Step function to faceplates SelFp1
here interconnected blocks SelFp2

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-24 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course
Comparison of L (large) and S (small) blocks
9.4 Comparison of L (large) and S (small) blocks

Configuration with "MotL" Configuration with "MotS"

"Large" blocks offer the full range of functions, but "Small" building blocks have fewer functions and
require more resources. require fewer resources.

Memory Cycle Time Memory Cycle Time

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

There are two versions of some technological functions in APL. Using the example of motor
control, there are the variants "MotL" and "MotS". The "L" variant always includes the complete
functionality. The "S" variant, on the other hand, is reduced in functionality, but these blocks
save memory space and runtime resources in the CPU.
It is not always necessary to use the blocks with full functionality to solve the automation task.

See [113] PCS 7 Advanced Process Library V9.1, section 5.1 for more details on the
comparison of large and small blocks.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-25 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.5 Templates
Templates (standard types, standard solutions) support you when configuring recurring
technological functions in a PCS 7 system.
The PCS 7 libraries (PCS 7 Advanced Process Library, PCS 7 Basis Library) contain templates
Templates
for basic technological functions (e.g. motor control, valve control, standard PID controller) as
well as for advanced closed-loop control functions (PID controller with safety logic and control
loop monitoring).

A template is a prepared chart that contains all the blocks required for a process tag, i.e. not
only the technological block for a control function but also the driver blocks and additional
processing logic.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

ValveLean example
9.5.1 ValveLean example

Invalid process value "Release for

Valve block maintenance" status

Input driver for

feedback Textual
Output driver for interconnection
control signal
Interlock
blocks

"Out of service"
status

Textual
Logic for generating a control
interconnection system fault

Logic for aggregating

"Out of service" status

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-26 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.5.2 Working with templates

Here is one possible procedure for working with templates:

1. Copy the desired template to the master data library of your multiproject and adapt it there
as needed.
2. Drag the adapted template from the master data library to the desired hierarchy folder that
is to contain the process tag.
3. Rename the chart (e.g. with the name of the process tag).
4. Open the resulting chart and replace the open textual interconnections with
interconnections with references from the symbol table in order to connect signals from the
hardware.

Typical adaptations made to templates

• Different interlock blocks
• For closed-loop controllers: Configuration of different reactions to a measured value loss
• For closed-loop controllers / analog controllers: If no position feedback is available, delete
the associated analog input channel block of the MV_Rbk parameter in the CFC chart. This
makes the corresponding display elements invisible in the standard view of the faceplate.

Templates without control loop monitoring

If you want to omit control loop monitoring to save license costs or CPU resources, you can use
the corresponding simplified process tag types, which can be recognized from the ending
"Lean" in the name.

Use as process tag type or control module type

For more detailed information on the use of templates as a process tag type or on conversion to
control module types, refer to section 14 "Engineering of bulk data".

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-27 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.6 Textual interconnections

A textual interconnection is a connection to a block I/O …
• that does not yet exist, or
Inserting•textual interconnections
that is located in a chart that was moved to another chart folder (in other words a different
AS!).

The target of the inter-

connection does not yet exist

Inserting textual interconnections

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL
Representation and format

ChartName\BlockName.I/Oname

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-28 SITRAIN

Closing textual interconnections
SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

When a block is available again ...

Closing textual interconnections

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

Individual textual interconnections cannot be closed.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

Log file
A log is generated in which all closed and all still open textual interconnections are listed. You
can open the log from the CFC editor with:
Logs > "Textual interconnections" tab
If one or more textual interconnections are not closed, a corresponding note is made in the log.
You see the note using the menu command
Logs > "Compile" tab
The compilation takes place and a substitute value is generated for the relevant input (default
value of the block type). An interconnection at the output is ignored.

See [302] PCS 7 CFC for SIMATIC S7 V9.0 SP7 - function manual, section 10.8.8 for more
details.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-29 SITRAIN

 Alarm blocks SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.7 Alarm blocks

Monitoring of a signal with 1 to 10

ALARM SFB 33
associated values with acknowledgment display

Monitoring of up to 8 signals with acknowledgment

ALARM_8 SFB 34
display

Monitoring of up to 8 signals with 1 to 10 associated

ALARM_8P SFB 35
values with acknowledgment display

Monitoring of a signal with 1 to 10

NOTIFY SFB 36
associated values without acknowledgment display

Monitoring of up to 8 signals with 1 to 10 associated

NOTIFY_8P SFB 31
values without confirmation prompt

In PCS 7, process messages are always generated in the AS. For this reason, they are also
acknowledged centrally in the AS, i.e. an OS acknowledgment is sent to the triggering block,
which accepts the acknowledgment and sends the acceptance to all logged-on operator
stations.
Ready-made alarm blocks are provided as SFBs (system function blocks) in both the PCS 7
APL and the PCS 7 Standard Library.
Alarm blocks

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

Note Typically, only the ALARM_8P and NOTIFY_8P blocks are used in PCS 7.

The message generation and acknowledgement behavior and the transfer of associated values
is specified in the CPU properties ("Diagnostics/Clock" tab, "Acknowledgment-triggered
reporting of SFB 33-35") and on the integrated alarm block.

Message numbers
The message number is unique within the CPU for PCS 7. When the OS is compiled, the
numbers required for the individual messages for the PCS 7 OS are derived from this message
number. It is automatically assigned at the MsgEvId input, which is not visible, interconnectable,
or parameterizable in the CFC.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-30 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

Integration in multi-instance blocks

Functions can be composed of various subfunctions. Blocks that execute these subfunctions
Integration
can be combined toinform
multi-instance blocks
a multi-instance block that represents the overall function. This is the
case, for example, for a technological block with a control function that contains an alarm block.

Alarm-enabled Alarm-enabled
block type A block instance

DB x
ALARM_8P ALARM_8P

Alarm-enabled Alarm-enabled
block type B block instance

DB y
ALARM_8P ALARM_8P

For blocks with code that call other blocks (multi-instance blocks), the applicable version of
these lower-level blocks must also be copied. Missing lower-level FBs can be identified later
Note by the engineering. Missing FCs, however, cannot be detected during compiling or
downloading.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

The message characteristics of the technological blocks in PCS 7 are based on ready-made
alarm blocks such as ALARM_8P, which are already integrated in the technological block.
Two ALARM_8P blocks are even embedded in some cases.

AV – Display and monitor additional value

The PCS 7 APL provides an AV block for integrating an additional ALARM_8P instance in an
instance of a technological block. This block is used to monitor an additional analog value in a
technological block (e.g. motor, valve).
Interconnect the AV_Tech output of the AV block with the AV input of a technological block in
the CFC. The AV block and the technological block must be included in the same cyclic interrupt
OB.
The PCS 7 APL also provides a "Motor with an additional analog value and time-stamped
signals" template as a possible application example for this block.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-31 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.8 Exercise and checkpoint

9.8.1 Exercise: Material tank M110
Task
Task

Configure the following automation functions in the AS for material tank M110 based on
templates from the library:

• Tank level measurement

• Switching the feed pump on/off LIA
114
• Opening/closing the outlet valve M110
6000 kg

YS112
4s

NS113
2s

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

Procedure
1. Open "PCS 7 AP Library V91" in the SIMATIC Manager and go to the "Templates" folder
(Component View).
2. Copy 4 process tag types to the "Process tag types" folder of your master data library (plant
view):
– AnalogMonitoring
– Motor_Lean
– PIDControl_Lean
– Valve_Lean
3. Close the window with the library.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-32 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

4. Before copying the charts to your user program, you need to make some adjustments to
these charts in the master data library that deviate from the standard:

Chart\block I/O visible and for test Parameter change

mode
AnalogMonitoring\MonAnalog PV_AH_Act
PV_AH_En
PV_AH_Lim
PV_AL_Act
PV_AL_En
PV_AL_Lim
PV_WH_Act
PV_WH_En
PV_WH_Lim
PV_WL_Act
PV_WL_En
PV_WL_Lim
Motor_Lean\Motor Run Feature.Bit4 = 1
StartMan MonTiDynamic = 7.0
Stop
StopMan
PIDControl_Lean\PID AutModOp Feature.Bit4 = 1
ManModOp
PV_AH_Lim
PV_AL_Lim
PV_WH_Lim
PV_WL_Lim
Rbk
RbkOut
SP_Int
Valve_Lean\Valve Closed Feature.Bit4 = 1
Closing MonTiDynamic = 7.0
CloseMan
LockAct
Opened
Opening
OpenMan

5. Close all charts and switch to the plant view to copy the following 3 charts into your
multiproject:
– Ensure that the charts are included as runtime groups in OB32.
– From the "Process tag types" folder of the master data library
– Into the hierarchy folder of the plant hierarchy: "Johnsson\Materialtanks\M110"
– Charts: AnalogMonitoring, Motor_Lean, Valve_Lean
6. Since we initially want to use simple CFCs, remove the "Process tag" property from these 3
copied charts.
– Use the "Properties CFC chart" dialog box and click the "Clear" button in the "Process
tag type" tab.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-33 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

7. Rename the charts:

– AnalogMonitoring: LIA114
– Motor_Lean: NS113
– Valve_Lean: YS112
8. In the LIA114 chart, configure:
– PV_In: Interconnection to the operand: "LIA114_PV"
– Scale: 0 … 6000
– PV_InUnit: 1088 (kg)
9. In the NS113 chart, configure:
– Addresses: "NS113_FBR" for the feedback, "NS113_C" as control output
– Delete (temporarily) the Intlk02 interlock blocks.
10. In the YS112 chart, configure:
– Addresses: "YS112_FBO" and "YS112_FBC" for the feedback, "YS112_C" as control
– Delete (temporarily) the Intlk02 interlock blocks.
11. In order for material 1 to flow into the dosing tank D210, we have to override our simulation
and open the YS211 dosing valve, which has not yet been configured.
– Create a temporary "tempV211" chart in the hierarchy folder.
– Johnsson\Reactors\R310\Dose
– In this temporary chart, insert a copy of the output driver block from the YS112 chart.
– Interconnect this driver to the address "YS211_C" and set the two inputs SimOn and
SimPV_In to the value 1.
12. Transfer these changes to your real AS (compile and download).
– If you are working in a virtual practice environment, load your program into PLCSIM.
13. Test your configuration:
– Now open the 3 charts of M110, arrange their windows next to each other and switch to
test mode.
– The content of the tank is initially 5700 kg. After the valve is opened and the pump is
started, the container content should be reduced by about 3 kg per second.
– End this exercise by stopping the pump and closing the valve.
– If you are working in a virtual practice environment, save your PLCSIM.

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-34 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System course

9.8.2
Why are thereCheckpoint: APLtemplates?
OR gates in the Templates

Why are there OR gates in the templates?

A. These OR gates provide not only the binary signal, but also the
signal quality
B. The I/Os of these OR gates are structures
C. If a measuring point is to be switched off completely, the Oos
outputs of the driver blocks can be linked via these OR gates and
guided to the technological block
D. The "bad" outputs of the driver blocks are interconnected, which
leads to shutdown in the event of an error

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 09 Basic automation with the APL

9 Basic automation with the APL 9-35 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process

object view
Learning objectives
10.1 Learning objectives

• You are familiar with the process object view in SIMATIC Manager as well as advantages and
limits for engineering in this view.

• You can adapt and filter the representation of the data in the process object view in order to
efficiently perform spreadsheet-based engineering.

• You can edit signals and parameters on APL blocks in the process object view.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view

10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view 10-1 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

10.2 Process object view

10.2.1 Efficient engineering

In the process object view, all data of the basic automation can be displayed throughout the
project in a process-oriented view. A multiproject then comprises the data of all projects it
contains.
The process object view is mainly used during FAT and commissioning. These tasks require
efficient editing of a large amount of data at a central location. The process object view offers
the advantage that all editable process tags/values of an object (displayed on a white
background) can be edited centrally.
When process tags and CFCs are edited, all aspects (automation, I/Os, messages, operator
control and monitoring) can be consistently displayed and documented. By jumping to CFCs,
SFCs, hardware configuration and the OS, you can edit process tags/values that cannot be
edited in the table (e.g. picture content, etc.).
The process object view is opened in SIMATIC Manager using the menu command:
ProcessView
object viewobject view
> Process

The green checkmarks indicate that the current data has been read in according to the selection
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view
in the hierarchy tree.

10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view 10-2 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

10.2.2 Configuring columns

Configuring columns
In SIMATIC in can
Manager, you theuseprocess
the followingobject viewto open a dialog where you
menu command
can select and arrange the desired columns of the process object view: Options > Settings >
Columns.

3
2

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view

1. Select the desired tab of the process object view.

2. Use the check boxes to control the visibility of the relevant column.
3. Change the order of columns.

10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view 10-3 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Adapting the order of columns

Adapting the
The order
order ofofthe
columns
columns in the process object view can be changed as described above or
simply by selecting the entire column and dragging it to the desired position (see below).

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view
1. Click in the area of the column header.
2. Use drag-and-drop to move the selected object to the desired location.

Defining your own columns

Defining your own columns

You can use the View > Define Columns… menu command to define other separate columns
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view
on the "General", "Blocks", "Parameters" and "Signals" tabs of the process object view.
In this way, you can add important supplemental information, such as the operator name or
maintenance interval, to the following objects:
• Process tags
• CFCs/SFCs
• Parameters and signals of process tags and CFCs
10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view 10-4 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

10.2.3 Specifying the contents of the "Parameters" and "Signals" tabs

In the CFC, you specify whether a block I/O is displayed in the process object view as a
parameter or signal (see below).
Parameters are block I/Os for which parameter configurations or interconnections between the
process tags or CFCs have been selected.
SpecifyingSignals
the contents
are blockofI/Os
thethat
"Parameters"
are or will be and "Signals"
connected tabsoutside of CFCs/SFCs (CPU
to signals
memory, but mostly inputs and outputs of the AS).

In the block properties Via the "Options" menu

2
2

1. Selection when there is an individual block I/O in the CFC

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view

2. Selection in a filter dialog of SIMATIC Manager under Options to set the desired filters
To avoid having to open the individual CFCs, the I/Os for the project object view can be
selected from the process object view itself (see above and below). Here you open a dialog box
that lists all I/Os of the selected hierarchy folder. From this list, you can select the parameters
and signals that you would like to edit in the process object view.
Specifying the
A dialog boxcontents of the
for the filter settings can"Parameters" and
be opened via the dialog box"Signals" tabsYou
for the I/O selection.
can use this filter to limit the data set for particular columns and thus the time required for
reading (example: display "BOOL" data type only).

I/O in tab
Make "Signals" available

I/O in tab
Make "Parameters" available

10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view 10-5 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

10.2.4 Defining
Defining the "Parameters"
the "Parameters" or "Signal"
or "Signal" attribute
attribute for multiple
for multiple I/Os I/Os

Group I/Os by sorting

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view

Through the use of suitable filter and sorting settings, you can group the block I/Os in such a
way that you can select an I/O area and completely set/reset this area. In the above example,
only the block I/Os whose name begins with "SimOn" will be displayed, and therefore only these
will be set up as parameters for the process object view.
plitting tables

10.2.5 Splitting tables

You can split the window in half (left and right) with each half having its own scroll bar. You may
mens 2022 | SITRAIN | 10 Spreadsheet-based engineeringwith
be familiar with the process
this object view
function from
other programs such as Excel.

10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view 10-6 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

10.2.6 Filters
Filters
The filters for limiting the data in the table are freely programmable.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view
You can configure up to four filter criteria and link them logically with the AND or OR operators.
A space character has a special meaning: the empty rows in this column will be displayed.
The process object view also has functions for managing and activating filters:
Button Description
Use this button to filter the data with the configured filter criteria. The filter criteria are
only applied when you click this button.
This button is only enabled when the current filter is configured.
Use this button to clear all filter settings.
Use this button to load previously saved filter settings.
Use this button to save the current filter settings to a file.
Use this button to show the next filter setting below the current one.
This button is only enabled when the current filter is configured.
Use this button to hide all filter settings except the first one.
This button is only displayed when multiple filter settings are configured.

The filter settings made on the "General" tab affect other tabs (exceptions: hierarchy folders,
equipment properties, shared declarations):
Note Only the objects displayed on the "General" tab are then displayed on the other tabs. This
filter setting remains visible for the other tabs under "Filter general" (see the example at the
top left in the figure).

10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view 10-7 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
Copying and pasting from and to Microsoft Excel
10.2.7 Copying and pasting from and to Microsoft Excel

1 2

Data from the engineering system can be exported using copy & paste, duplicated, edited in an
external program (such as MS Excel) and then imported back to the engineering system. This
functionality allows you to optimize the configuration of recurrent or similar plant information.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view

See [103] PCS 7 V9.1 Engineering System, section [Link] for further information on
exchanging data with MS Excel or Access.

10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view 10-8 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

10.2.8 Importing and exporting data using the process object view

By exporting and importing attributes, you can perform the following actions on parameter,
signal and message information: export to a file, edit with standard applications and re-import.
These functions are especially useful when you want to edit large amounts of data. You do not
have to edit the individual charts with the CFC editor in order to modify the I/Os because the
I/Os of all charts in the hierarchy folder are automatically imported.
Charts in the selected hierarchy folder and all subordinate hierarchy folders are edited
(according to the selection in the process object view).
Importing and exporting data using the process object view

Selected hierarchy
folder

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view

See [103] PCS 7 V9.1 Engineering System, section [Link] for further information on
importing/exporting blocks, I/Os and messages.

10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view 10-9 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Opening exported data in Microsoft Excel

Opening exported data
The best way in Microsoft
to open Excel
an export file (e.g. exported messages) is to create a new Excel
spreadsheet and import the external data.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view

10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view 10-10 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

10.3 Exercise and checkpoint

10.3.1 Exercise: Everything about D210, R310 and B410
Task
Task

Configure the basic automation (manual mode) for all process tags of D210, R310 and B410.

YS211
YS212 TICA YC315
YS213 315 21 s
0.25 s NS316
M 2s
LIA
214
D210 TT
400 kg LIA
315 414
R310
LIA B410
700 kg
314 12000 kg

YS311
4s

YS312 YS411
5s 5s

NS313
2s

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view

Procedure
1. Delete the temporary charts "tempYS211".
2. Open the "PIDControl_Lean" process tag type in your master data library to make a few
adjustments.
3. Copy a PCS7AnIn driver block into the free area at the bottom left of sheet 1 of this chart
and rename it "Rbk".
– Change the text of the interconnection with the PV_In input to "Read back".
– Correct the PV_InUnit parameter to the value 1342 for "%".
4. Interconnect the PV_Out output of the new driver block with the "Rbk" input of the controller
block.
5. Make the two "Or04" blocks at the "In2" input visible and add the correct interconnections to
the new driver block.
6. Now close the chart and copy it from the master data library into the plant hierarchy:
Johnsson\Reactors\R310\Heat.
7. Rename it to TICA315.
8. Open the "Properties" dialog for this chart and click the "Clear" button in the "Process tag
type" tab.
9. In the TICA315 chart, interconnect the following I/O addresses:
– Input for PV: TT315_PV
– Input for Rbk: YC315_FB
– Output: YC315_C
10. Assign the controller block parameters.
– Set the TI input parameter to the value 30 on the controller.
– Scale the process value to the range 0 ... 200.
11. Close the TICA315 chart.

10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view 10-11 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

12. Open the process object view in SIMATIC Manager and use the tree structure in the left
window pane as well as the "General" tab in the right window pane to create copies of the 3
charts from the M110 hierarchy folder:

Source chart Destination path and new chart name

LIA114 …R310\Dosing\LIA214
…R310\Draining\LIA314

…Storage\B410\LIA414

YS112 …R310\Dosing\V211 (and delete the chart tempYS211)

…R310\Dosing\YS212
…R310\Dosing\YS213
…R310\Dosing\YS311 (and delete the chart Temp_YS311)
…R310\Draining\YS312

…Storage\B410\YS411

NS113 …R310\Mixing\NS316
…R310\Draining\NS313

13. In the right window pane, switch to the "Signals" tab and divide the table so that the "Chart"
and "Signal" columns are arranged next to each other.
14. In the "Signal" column, change the I/O addresses to the correct values. To do this, select
hierarchy folders B410, Dosing, Draining and Mixing.
15. Go to the "Blocks" tab in the right window pane.
16. Select the Johnsson folder in the left pane (tree view).
17. Enter the value 2 in all white fields of the Block icon column.
18. Filter the table contents according to the "Block icon" column with the value 2 and sort by
charts ("Chart" column) in ascending order.
– There should now be 15 rows.
19. Open the symbol table of your AS in the SIMATIC Manager and sort the contents according
to symbols in ascending order.
20. Copy the content of the "Comment" field of suitable I/O addresses from the symbol table
and insert it into the "Block comment" field in the process object view to obtain
representative names for the operator control and monitoring blocks. These names appear
later in the OS.
21. Adapt the Scale input parameter on the input driver block to the correct measuring range for
the 3 new LIA... charts.
22. Finally, do not forget to optimize the runtime properties before you transfer the changes to
the AS.
23. Test each individual device. Use the TICA315 as a "TICA315" trend display.

10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view 10-12 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Why10.3.2 Checkpoint
are all parameters in the "Parameters" tab not displayed
in the process object view?
Why are all parameters in the "Parameters" tab not displayed in the process object view?
A. The number of all block I/Os in a project is so large that it would be
too slow to form the view.
B. The number of displayed parameters depends on the licensing of
the PO view.
C. Only the I/Os marked as parameters are displayed in the
"Parameters" tab of the PO view.
D. The clarity and efficiency of editing in the PO view would otherwise
be limited.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view

10 Spreadsheet-based engineering with the process object view 10-13 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

Learning
11.1 objectives
Learning objectives

• You are familiar with the basic functions of an OS

• You understand the importance of the OS-AS connections and the plant hierarchy

• You are familiar with the mechanism for creating/updating block icons

• You can configure an OS with the basic functions for

operator control and monitoring and activate it
(with default settings for operation, layout, window etc.)

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-1 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.2
ngineering Tools for OS engineering
WinCC is used together with several WinCC options and supplementary tools in SIMATIC
Manager to form a key component of a PCS 7 configuration: the operator station.

Motor ON
Valve closed
Gate closed

Alarm logging
(alarm system) number ()
float cou
begin

Process
Tag logging visualization Programming
(archiving) interface

Report system Process

(reports) communication

Logging

Standard
interfaces

asic functions for operator control & monitoring

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-2 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.3 The architecture of the OS

11.3.1 Multiple-station system
Multiple-station system
An OS can be configured as a multiple-station system.

OS OS OS
OS terminals 1 client … client 40 client

Terminal bus

ES
OS server OS OS
1 18
server server

Plant bus

Controllers AS01 ASx

• The servers are responsible for communication with the AS, for screens and for archiving
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring
tags and messages.
• The client(s) provide the user interface.

In a multiple-station system, one or more OS servers supply up to 40 operator stations

(OS clients) with data (project data, process values, archives, alarms and messages) via a
terminal bus. The terminal bus can share the transmission medium with the plant bus or be
implemented as a separate bus (Ethernet with TCP/IP).
In the case of more stringent availability requirements, the OS servers can also be operated
redundantly. Critical applications are monitored for software errors via a health check. If an error
is detected, a redundancy failover is made if necessary. Synchronization of the redundant
OS servers takes place automatically and at high speed.
The broad colored arrows in the above figure symbolize the information exchange between the
AS and OS or between servers and clients.
The OS runtime is executed on the OS servers and OS clients.

Central engineering
Whatever the system architecture looks like, the engineering station is always the source for the
complete configuration. All configuration data is downloaded from the ES to the target system.

OS simulation
The OS runtime of a server must not be activated on an ES! To ensure the possibility of testing
an OS configuration on the ES in runtime without disturbing the active OS server, an OS can be
simulated on the ES.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-3 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.3.2 Single-station system

Single-station system
An OS can be configured as a single-station system.

OS

Terminal bus

ES

Plant bus

AS01 AS64

© Siemens 2022In
| SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions
a single-station for operator
system, control & monitoring
all operator control
and monitoring functionality for a project
(plant/unit) is concentrated in one station. This OS single station can be operated on the plant
bus together with other single-station systems or in parallel with a multiple-station system.
Redundant operation of two OS single stations is also possible (SIMATIC PCS 7 single station
redundancy).

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-4 SITRAIN

 Special case: Combined
SIMATIC ES/OS
PCS 7 System Course

11.3.3 Special case: Combined ES/OS

An OS can be configured together with the ES as combined station.

Terminal bus

ES/OS

Plant bus

AS01 AS64

The single-station system is the smallest possible configuration. A PC station that represents
both the ES and the OS is created in the PCS 7 project.
If the OS and ES are operated on one computer, you do not have to download the OS because
all the necessary data is already available. Here it's enough to run the "Compile OS" function.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-5 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.3.4 Flat system architecture

For small and medium-sized plants, implementation is now also possible in a very flat system
configuration without an OS server. In this case, only OS single-station systems are used, and
the number can be expanded up to a maximum of 8 single-station systems.
• The normal separation into a plant bus and terminal bus in an OS server/OS client structure
does not happen in this case, which means that each single-station station is connected
directly to the AS.
Flat system architecture
• With such a configuration, configuring can be streamlined by duplicating a basic project.

OS single OS single OS single Engineering

station station station System

1 2 3
….. ES

Plant bus

Process Historian
S7-400H

The "flat system architecture" was previously released for PCS 7 Version V8.0 SP1 for small to
medium-sized project sizes with up to 8 OS single-station systems and including a redundant
OS single station system.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring
This architecture can be expanded to include a web server and web clients (up to 3 web
clients), OPC communication (with OpenPCS 7 license) and SIMATIC Batch.

Display of operator and process control messages

• Locally generated operator messages and local process control messages are displayed on
an OS single-station station.
• A system-wide overview of the operator and process control messages is provided with the
help of the Process Historian / Information Server.
• The operator messages of the individual OS single-station systems are added back into the
local archive segments of all OS single-station systems with the help of the PH and can
thus be displayed in all OS single-station systems.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-6 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.3.5 Configuration limits for OS stations

OS configuration limits exist at each level of a PCS 7 multiproject:

• Number of stations
Number of stations

Max. 4 per OS station

Max. 8 per multiproject Max. 40 per system Max. 40 per multiproject Max. 100 per PCS 7 web server

OS single OS client OS web

station Monitor client

Terminal bus
MS server OS server
ES

1 per Max. 18 per

multiproject multiproject
Plant bus

AS

Max. 64 per
OS server

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

• Number of process objects, process tags and configurable messages

Number of PO, process tags and messages

OS single Max. 8,500 PO OS client

station
approx. 4,500 tags

Terminal bus

ES OS server
MS server
OS Max. 12,000 PO
server
Approx. 7,000 tags
Max. 200,000 configurable
messages
Plant bus

AS

Max 2,600 PO Max. 21,600 PO per project

per CPU410-5H Max. 128,000 tags per multiple-station system

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-7 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.4 Engineering in WinCC Explorer

11.4.1 Storage location of the OS project

After insertion of a PC station with a WinCC application into the multiproject, the OS project is
stored in a subfolder of the project path, as shown in the figure:
Storage location of the OS project

The path to the storage location depends on the

structure of the multiproject and how it was created.

All pictures of an OS
project are located here.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring
Note The GraCS subfolder contains all process pictures as well as all graphics of an OS project.
Custom graphics can be created and managed in the folder "GraCS >
PCS7CustomPictures".
To enable use of graphics from different multiprojects in your own current OS project, these
must first be copied to the GraCS folder! Process pictures can be copied into the OS project
of the SIMATIC Manager.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-8 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.4.2 Opening an OS project

To edit the contents of an OS, the OS must be opened from the component view of the
Opening an OS project
SIMATIC Manager: WinCC Explorer then starts.
SIMATIC Manager WinCC Explorer

Detailed window with

the objects that are
edited by the editor

List of editors:
Each editor opens its own
application window or is part of
the Configuration Studio

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-9 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Engineering with the editors in WinCC Explorer

Here is a brief explanation of the WinCC editors that are used for configuration work.

Editor Description
Graphics Designer In the Graphics Designer, you create process pictures that are
displayed for the plant operator on the operator station and
that are used for controlling the process.
PCS 7 provides a function for use when creating process
pictures that automatically inserts all the block icons into the
process picture. Block icons are clear, graphical
representations of a PCS 7 block for which operator control
and monitoring is enabled.
You can insert and dynamize additional graphics objects.
Tag logging The "Tag Logging" editor is an important tool for archiving
measured values.
You can change the parameters for the system archive in Tag
Logging. You can create new archives individually and assign
the process values that you want to archive to these archives.
In this way, you can define a process of archiving that is
tailored precisely to your needs.
The archived values can also be displayed in process mode.
Picture Tree Manager In the Picture Tree Manager, you calculate or update the
hierarchy of the group displays again.
User Administrator In the "User Administrator" editor, you define higher-level user
groups and individual users for which you can define certain
rights.
You define these rights for the OS areas that you have
specified in the plant hierarchy in SIMATIC Manager.
Block list editor The block list editor shows you all blocks that you inserted into
CFCs during ES configuration. Requirements: The OS is
compiled.
You can assign a special picture to a block in the block list
editor. This enables the plant operator to switch directly from
the message list to this picture via the "Loop-in-Alarm"
function.
If you do not assign a special picture, the corresponding
faceplate is automatically called in the "Loop-in-Alarm"
function.
"Process Historian" You can select the data required for the Process Historian.
editor Use the "Process Historian" editor in the WinCC Explorer for
this function.
The "Process Historian" editor is only available if the "Process
Historian Ready Component" is installed.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-10 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.4.3 Setting the project type

A WinCC application is preset as a multiple station project in the original state, just as it was
inserted in the PC configuration.
Setting the project type
If the system is to be used as a single-station system, this change must be made in the project
properties:

Do not delete the

startup list when the
project type changes!

Note Only members of the SIMATIC HMI user group can edit WinCC projects.

References
See [104] PCS 7 V9.1 Operator Station – Configuration Manual, section 7.3.2 for more details
on OS project properties.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring
Manual

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-11 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.5 Settings in the plant hierarchy

11.5.1 Settings in the SIMATIC Manager

The settings for the plant hierarchy affect the content and display of data in the OS. They are
Settingsrelevant
in thetoSIMATIC
the structureManager
of the picture hierarchy and the tag names.

Included in| HID

© Siemens 2022 (HID
SITRAIN = plant
| 11 Basic designation)
functions for operator control & monitoring

You can select which levels are to be included in the HID through their hierarchy folder names.
Only the hierarchy folders marked for inclusion in the HID have their names included in the HID.
Hierarchy folders that are not selected for inclusion in the name can be used to create additional
"drawers" (for example for supplementary documents such as plant descriptions, process tag
sheets, etc.).

With separator
With this option, you insert a separator in the HID after the names of hierarchy folders of this
level. Separators are used in the textual representation of the hierarchy path to better
differentiate between the names of the hierarchy folders. The "\" character is used as the
separator.
Note: the last hierarchy folder included in the HID is always followed by a separator that cannot
be deselected.

OS area
With this option, you can decide which hierarchy level is to be regarded as the OS area level.
Only the top 3 levels can be OS area levels. The default setting is the 1st level. The definition of
an OS area is necessary for area-specific messages in process mode.

Note When assigning the name, ensure that the tag name does not exceed 128 characters. This
is a requirement for compiling the OS. The name consists of the following elements:
"HID\ChartName\BlockName.I/OName".

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-12 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.5.2 Picture hierarchy in the Picture Tree Manager

The manner in which pictures are arranged within the OS areas (picture hierarchy) can be seen
in the Picture Tree Manager. This tool is a component of WinCC Explorer and is integrated in
WinCC Configuration Studio as of PCS 7 V9.0.
The "Picture tree" is generated during OS compiling, depending on the selected settings of the
plant
Picture Tree hierarchy.
Manager

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

11.5.3 Area buttons in OS runtime

The area buttons are also defined in the settings of the plant hierarchy. The OS area can be
selected from levels 1 to 3. The OS area defines the area buttons.
Effects of the plant hierarchy on the OS areas

OS area

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring
The picture hierarchy as is seen in the Picture Tree Manager is reflected in the layout of
selection buttons within the OS areas.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-13 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.5.4 Names of structure tags and tags

The names of structure tags (blocks) and tags contain the plant designation (HID):
Derivation of the tag structure
Components of the tag name
2
3

1 2 3 4
HID CFC name Block name I/O name

M110/LIA114/MonAnalog.PV_Out#Value
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

When the OS project is compiled, the tags that are required for the data exchange between
AS and OS are created. The resulting tag names are composed of the following elements:
1. Plant designation (HID). This can optionally be defined in the settings of the PH and can be
composed of one or more levels of the PH.
2. The name of the CFC in which operator control and monitoring blocks are configured.
3. The name of the operator control and monitoring block.
4. The name of the operator control and monitoring I/O.

The connection that contains all tags is given the name of the S7 program of the automation
system.

References
See [104] PCS 7 V9.1 Operator Station – Configuration Manual, section 6.4.3 for more
details.
Manual

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-14 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.6 OS-AS connection

An S7 connection must be configured and loaded for communication with the
OS-AS connection
"[Link].1" PCS 7 standard communication setting to take place between an AS and
an OS.
OS OS
client client

Terminal bus

ES

OS
server

Plant bus

AS01 AS02

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

A connection is configured between the

• WinCC application of the PC station (starting point of the "Insert New Connection" dialog)
and
• CPU as connection partners in the AS.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-15 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.6.1 Configuring connections in NetPro

A connection is configured between the

• WinCC application of the PC station (starting point of the "Insert New Connection" dialog)
and
New connection in NetPro
• CPU as connection partners in the AS.

1
2

3
4

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

Connections are always configured between WinCC applications (OS) and the CPU modules
(AS).
1. Select the object of the WinCC application.
2. Select the connection partner. If you have begun with a WinCC application, the CPU of the
desired AS is the connection partner.
3. Named connection: Instead of the default connection ID, assign a symbolic name as a
placeholder for network parameters of the connection between the OS and AS. Use a
descriptive name.
4. All connections of the object are displayed in the connection table.

Named connection
This principle is referred to as the "named connection". It is also relevant to redundant OS
servers and OS simulation operation.
Recommendation: Assign the name of the AS involved to the connection. Once the OS has
been compiled, the name appears in the "SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite" of the WinCC Tag
Management.

References
For further details, see:
[103] PCS 7 V9.1 Engineering System, section 9.14.3 and
See [104] PCS 7 V9.1 Operator Station – Configuration Manual, section 6.2.2
Manual Information configuration of an OS network connection:
SIMATIC Process control system PCS 7 Operator Station
- How to configure an OS network connection

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-16 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.6.2
CompilingCompiling andconnections
and loading loading connections

Download

1. Use the "Save and Compile" button in the element bar of NetPro to start compiling the
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

network configuration.
2. You can load new connections without stopping the AS, select the command "Connections
and Gateways". When the whole HW configuration is loaded, the CPU goes to stop.
3. For OS stations, the loaded connections are displayed in the Station Configuration Editor.

No CPU stop required

If only connections are being loaded, the CPU of the station does not switch to stop.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-17 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.7 Compiling the OS

11.7.1 Settings
Compiling settings
The dialog box of a wizard enables the following settings to be made for the compile operation:

Assign OS areas of the

PH to an OS server.

Assign an S7 program
to an OS server.

• Area-oriented: With this setting, you can assign an OS area from the plant hierarchy to an
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

OS server. The advantage of this approach is that PCS 7 itself checks which data pertains
to the corresponding OS server and only compiles this data. Starting with PCS 7 V6.1, this
setting is the default setting.
• AS-oriented: With this setting, you can assign an S7 program to an OS server. In this way,
you specify which OS is supplied with data of which AS. In this mode, all the data of an AS
is assigned to an OS server. This was the default setting in PCS 7 V6.1 and earlier.

References
See [104] PCS 7 V9.1 Operator Station – Configuration Manual, section 6.5.3 for more
details.
Manual

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-18 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.7.2 Wizard for compiling the OS

A large part of the OS data structure is specified in SIMATIC Manager and the configuration
tools for the charts. This data is stored in the project database.
A compile operation transfers all the data that is relevant for the OS to its own OS database:

References
See [104] PCS 7 V9.1 Operator Station – Configuration Manual, section 6.5.3 for more
details.
Manual
Wizard for compiling the OS

1. Start the wizard for compiling the OS for the desired OS.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring
2. The assigned plant areas are displayed.
3. Select the AS program to be compiled.
4. Open the "Select Network Connection" dialog. Select the WinCC unit "Named connection"
in the dialog.

What happens during compiling?

• Tags: The tags are created below the named connection that was configured for
communication between the OS and AS.
• Messages: Message texts are stored in a text library. The number of columns in this text
library is based on the "Language for display devices" setting.
• Units of measure, etc.: The strings for units of measure, identifiers, and block comments are
located in the "Internal tags" subfolder.
• Structure types: Block types whose instances are inserted into CFCs are stored in the OS
as structure types.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-19 SITRAIN

Wizard for compiling the OS
SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

However, the wizard needs additional information for the compilation scope:

The OS runtime must be 3

closed during compilation.
4

The OS servers remain in

runtime during compilation. 1 5

1. Delete all AS data present in the operator station.

2. With the "Minimum acquisition cycle" setting, you define the shortest acquisition cycle for
the archiving of tags. The AS-OS engineering derives an acquisition cycle for a newly
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring
created archive tag from the processing cycle of the block and the "Minimum acquisition
cycle".
3. This function enables the screen jump function in WinCC Runtime. In addition, the OS
comments are supplemented to include the interconnection partner. The function extends
the mapper runtimes significantly.
The check box is only visible when SFC visualization has been enabled.
4. "Create server data":
For a client in a distributed system to display the process data of different servers, it needs
information about the corresponding data. To this end, server data (packages) is created in
order to make this data available to the clients. The client requires the server data from all
servers whose process information it is to visualize.
The server data is automatically created/updated by the system when the OS is compiled
and downloaded. It can also be generated manually in the shortcut menu of SIMATIC
Manager under "Create server data".
5. "Language settings" area
You can use the button in this area to open a dialog box showing the languages installed in
the PCS 7 multiproject. Each installed language affects the duration of the OS compilation.
You can therefore delete any unneeded languages in the project here.
Review your settings before starting the compilation. The result of the compilation is
summarized in a log file.
Note If you delete an unneeded language in the PCS 7 multiproject, it will be difficult to restore the
language later because even the standard texts (system texts) of this language are removed
from all language tables.

References
See [121] PCS 7 Compendium Part A – Configuration Guidelines, section 9.4 for more details.

Manual

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-20 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.7.3 Deriving / updating block icons

Based on the configuration in the plant hierarchy, the technological relationships between the
AS and OS components are already known. This information can be used in the plant hierarchy
to automatically place and interconnect the ready-made block icons in the OS pictures selected
for this purpose. Changes affecting the block icons can be updated directly in the plant
hierarchy. block icons
Deriving / updating

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

1. In the properties of the process picture, you can define whether block icons are created in
this picture.
2. Start the "Create/Update Block Icons" function in the shortcut menu of a hierarchy folder.
3. You make the following settings in the dialog:
– Generation of the displayed process tag name at the block icon. You have various
options for versioning.
– Number of included lower-level hierarchy levels. If CFCs with blocks that can be
operated and monitored are configured on lower levels, these icons are also created in
the picture.
– The zoom factor determines the displayed size of the icon.
– With automatic positioning, icons are arranged on the top left. If the option is disabled,
positions of already existing icons are preserved.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-21 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
Einbezogene unterlagerte Ebenen
Included subordinate levels

Bild R310
Die Pläne liegen in
der 4. TH-Ebene.

Das Bild liegt in der

3. TH-Ebene.
TH-Ebene: 1 2 3 4

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Basisfunktionen für das Bedienen & Beobachten

In the "Lower hierarchy levels included" combo box, you set the number of AS hierarchy levels
to be taken into consideration when creating/updating block icons.
The background to this setting is the different description depths between the AS and OS.
On the AS side, the charts are configured at the level of the process tags. The charts are
therefore inserted at the lowest level and only contain the control blocks with the drivers for
process interfacing. In our example, the charts are at level 4.
On the OS side, the objective is different. The pictures do indeed describe the plant for the
lower levels in increasing detail, but not as far as the process tag level. In our project, the lowest
level of the pictures is level 3.
As there are no pictures on the chart level, no block icons would be inserted by the
Create/Update Block Icons wizard either. This problem can be solved by setting "Lower
hierarchy levels included" to 1. The block icons are then simply inserted in the pictures that are
one level up.
The default setting is 1.

Scalability of block icons

The size of the block icons can now be scaled with the "Create/Update Block Icons" function.
You can thus respond to special requirements of the customer regarding workstation
ergonomics and different screen resolutions.
• A uniform setting applies to all block icons that are introduced into the plant pictures by the
"Create/Update Block Icons" function.
• Your project-specific setting is kept even after a PCS 7 software update.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-22 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.8 Launching OS runtime

Activating OS runtime
You can start OS runtime in WinCC Explorer:

Starting OS runtime on the ES

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

In a distributed PCS 7 system, OS projects are created on the ES, transferred to the OS
computer after completion and then OS runtime is started there. By default, activating OS
runtime on the ES is not allowed, because this can have an undesired effect on the OS project.
You can find the settings in the WinCC Explorer in the properties of the OS project.
However, if you want to start OS runtime on the ES for test purposes, the "Start OS simulation"
option is available in the SIMATIC Manager. This creates a copy of the OS project and then
starts it. The copy is deleted again after closing.
For combined ES/OS stations, the "Allow activation on ES" option is active by default and
cannot
Starting OS be disabled.
runtime on the ES

By default, the direct

start of the OS runtime
on the ES is not
allowed

Activation of an OS
runtime copy on the ES

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-23 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.9 Layout of OS runtime

11.9.1 User interface
User interface
The screen is divided into three areas in OS runtime (WinCC Runtime):

MessageMessage
line line

Overview area

Work area / Process pictures

Button area

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

Note The name of the start screen (the first screen after runtime starts) is @[Link].

Button area
Two sets of buttons with standardized operator buttons are defined for process control from the
OS. When you start process mode, button set 1 is displayed. You switch between the button
sets using operator buttons.

Plant-specific button sets

Starting with PCS 7 V8.2, you can design button sets of the PCS 7 OS on a plant-specific basis.

References
See [231] PCS 7 V9.1 OS Process Control, section 3.8 for a description of the operator
control functions in the button area.

Manual
See [104] PCS 7 V9.1 Operator Station – Configuration Manual, section 6.3.8 for global
adaptation of the button sets in a PCS 7 OS.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-24 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.9.2 Settings for WinCC Runtime design

Settings for the WinCC Runtime design –
Global design settings for the project
Global design settings for the project

If you change the setting for the WinCC design, check the
appearance of customized objects and adapt them if
necessary.

Define your
project color
palette.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

Select the following design for the appearance of the user interface in process mode:
WinCC 3D.
The following WinCC designs are not supported by PCS 7:
• WinCC Classic
• WinCC Glass
• WinCC Simple
• WinCC Dark
Ensure a uniform setting for the design for all projects of a plant. If you change the setting of the
design, check the display of custom objects and adapt them if necessary.
Keep the setting in the case of a software update. If the setting for the appearance of the user
interface in process mode is changed when a software update is performed, this can cause
more extensive changes.

Note The central color palette and the global design settings can alternatively be called directly in
the Graphics Designer under "Menu > Options" as of PCS 7 V9.0.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-25 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
Design restrictions in the computer properties
Design restrictions in the computer properties

You define settings for process mode on the "Runtime" tab:

• If you are using VB scripts: settings for a VBS debugger in process mode
• Definition of a cache memory for process pictures
• Appearance of the mouse pointer for certain actions by the plant operator
You can specify all settings that are to apply to the display in process mode on the "Graphics
Runtime" tab. You generally do not have to make any settings on this tab.
As long as you are in test mode, you can, for example, activate the "maximize" and "minimize"
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring
window attributes. The enables you to quickly change from the runtime display to other
applications while in test mode.

Note Always deactivate these settings when the project is used in real operation.
You can make additional settings for the display in the "OS project editor".

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-26 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
Design settings in the object properties
Design settings in the object properties

Object properties of the

selected button

Customized color setting

As long as different settings are not made in the individual object properties, the global design
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring
settings act on all graphic objects in the project.

Note As long as an attribute is determined by the global design, it is static and can no longer be
dynamized. Only a previously made dynamization is preserved and not affected by the
global design.

References
See [104] PCS 7 V9.1 Operator Station – Configuration Manual, section 7.3 for an overview of
the global and specific settings of a PCS 7 OS.
Manual

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-27 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.10 Block icons and faceplates

11.10.1 Difference between block icons and faceplates

Block icons
Block icons represent AS functions in the OS.
Generally, the main information (operating states, process values) of a function/process tag
(motor, valve, etc.) is displayed in a block icon. For this reason, PCS 7 provides corresponding
block icons for technological blocks (blocks for which operator control and monitoring is
possible).
The block icons are automatically installed in the process pictures according to the plant
hierarchy and interconnected with the relevant process tags.

Faceplates
Faceplates are used for operator control and monitoring of process values with uniform
visualization.
With a single mouse click on the block icon, a faceplate appears to show more details and to
DF((CSCKK56
enable operations (input of setpoints, limits, etc.).
Faceplates are displayed in a separate window in process mode and can be opened using
Bausteinsymbole – OS Runtime
picture selection buttons, the process tag list, block icons, etc.

Beispiel für die APL (Advanced Process Library)

Example for the APL (Advanced Process Library)

Bildbaustein, zeigt Standardsicht

Sichtenauswahl

Bausteinsymbol

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Basisfunktionen für das Bedienen & Beobachten

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-28 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.10.2 General information on faceplates of the APL

Faceplate
The faceplates are shown in full on the screen with a resolution of 1280 x 1024. The full-screen
mode (press the F11 key) must also be activated on the Web client.

Display and operator controls

Commands and operating modes

Status displays
Interlocks

Jump to other faceplates

Max. 2 associated values

Operating area

Faceplate – Display and operator controls

The upper operator control and display bar in faceplates is standardized for all PCS 7
Faceplate – Display and operator controls
faceplates.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

13 2 4 6 8 14 12
Views

Standard view
1 3 5 9 10 11 Alarm view
7
Limit view
1. Group display
2. Alarm interlock via faceplate Trend view
3. Alarm suppression via function block (FB) Right-click to open
view in a new Ramp view
4. Alarm acknowledgment
5. Worst signal status window Parameter view
6. Batch display
7. Not used Preview
8. Maintenance request and release
Memo view
9. Memo display
10. Open block views Batch view
11. Back to block icon
12. Pin block
13. Name of block instance
14. Help button

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

• Left-click: Replacement of the current view with the desired view.

• Right-click: Additional opening of the desired view.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-29 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Status displays
In this area, the status (motor, valve symbol, etc.) is displayed in symbolic form at the top.
Below this, there is additional information and there are jump functions (buttons to call a
faceplate of a different block).
The additional information is intended to help the operator and provides information about the
status of the process instrumentation, for example whether a motor is being simulated or is
undergoing maintenance.

Buttons for additional faceplates

By clicking on user-configurable buttons in the faceplate, the user can open additional
faceplates as desired.

Commands and operating modes

Operating mode and command are shown in this area and can be changed under certain
conditions (e.g. with adequate operator authorization).
Depending on the block, the "Manual", "Automatic", "Program mode", "Local" or "Out of service"
modes can be selected. The commands "Start", "Stop", "Open", "Close" etc. can be selected.
Operating modes and commands can be selected in a separate operating area below the
faceplate. This action can be with or without acknowledgment. This depends on the setting.

Interlocks
Here, the various interlock types are displayed.

Associated values
In the default view of some technological faceplates, up to two additional auxiliary analog values
can be displayed. For example, these can be used to display the motor current and winding
temperature for a motor.

Scaling of faceplates
You can scale the faceplates from 50% to 200%. The value to be scaled is specified with
internal tag "@APLFaceplateScaleFactor", type: 32-bit value without sign. The default scaling
value is 100.
You can scale the faceplates from 101% to 200% by defining a value in the range from 101 to
200 for the internal tag. You can also scale the faceplates from 50% to 99% by defining a value
in the range from 50 to 99 for the internal tag.
The reference for the calculation is the preset faceplate size of 100%.

References
See [113] PCS 7 V9.1 Advanced Process Library, section 2.3 for more details on the
faceplates.
See [120] PCS 7 V9.1 APL Operator Guide for a description of the main functions of the APL
block icons and faceplates.
Manual
This description is also available by pressing the Help button of an APL faceplate in OS
runtime – appropriate for the open faceplate.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-30 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.10.3 Display of block icons

Display of block icons
An extensive selection of block icons is located in the @[Link] picture:

Analog display block Valve block VlvL

MonAnL

In @[Link]

In OS runtime Normal operation Normal operation,

valve open

Normal operation,
alarm high limit Malfunction, with
violation additional status
information

11.10.4 Operator input in faceplates and block icons

Faceplates
Commands – Commands / Operating
/ Operating mode selection
mode selection

Operating mode selection with @APLCommandExecutionSteps = 3

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

Operating mode selection with @APLCommandExecutionSteps = 2

Start command with @APLCommandExecutionSteps = 3

Start command with @APLCommandExecutionSteps = 2

Value = 3: Operating steps with acknowledgment (default setting)

Value = 2: Operating steps without acknowledgment

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

The setting for one of the two variants (with or without confirmation) is made project-wide via the
properties of the internal WinCC tag @APLCommandExecutionSteps, which is available in
"Split Screen Manager" category under "Internal tags" of the Tag Management of the OS.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-31 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
Value display
Value display

Operation possible
Value bad

Value passivated

External simulation

Message can be
disabled/enabled by the
operator.
Message locked. Internal simulation
Message temporarily disabled.

Operation is enabled.
The operation is not enabled based on the configuration (OS_Perm). Operation not possible
Operation based on the process state is not enabled. (no authorization)

Values, limits, etc. can be changed in faceplates. An APL-specific function is the graphic display
of enabled operations and access control. The operator can distinguish between values that can
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring
and cannot be changed. The following can be distinguished:
• Whether operator control is generally disabled for the block
• Whether operator control is disabled for process-specific reasons
• Whether an operator has the required authorization
The value is also input in a separate operating area below the faceplate. You can open this
operating area by clicking on a modifiable value (value with white background). The value can
be changed in the operating area in three ways:
• The value can be changed in discrete increments (e.g. -2.5) via direct operator input with
the buttons.
• A desired value can be set with the slider.
• A value can be directly entered in the entry field. The modified value takes effect at the
block with "OK".

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-32 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
Operator authorization levels
11.10.5 Operator authorization levels

Level 2
Assigned to the
operator function
"Higher process
control"

Level 1
Assigned to the operator function
"Highest process control"

Level 3

Assigned to "Process control" operator

function

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

The following operator authorization levels from User Administration are used in the APL:
• Operator authorization level = 0
No process control, only monitoring.
• Operator authorization level = 1 (level 5 in the User Administrator)
Process control (e.g. switching between "Manual"/"Automatic", change setpoints and tags).
• Operator authorization level = 2 (level 6 in the User Administrator)
Higher process control (e.g. changing limits, control parameters and monitoring times).
• Operator authorization level = 3 (level 1100 in the User Administrator)
Highest process control (simulation of process values). The operator authorization enables
the following inputs:
– Turning the simulation on and off in the parameter view, simulation of values already
requires Operator authorization level 1
– Turning the release for maintenance on and off in the parameter view
• Operator authorization level = 4 (level 1101 in the User Administrator)
Advanced operation 1 (user-defined project-specific operator authorization)
• Operator authorization level = 5 (level 1102 in the User Administrator)
Advanced operation 2 (user-defined project-specific operator authorization)

Instance-specific authorizations can be assigned depending on the user management and the
access authorization. For example, controllable blocks have the input parameter "OS_Perm",
which enables you to implement customized control strategies for operators by specifying
enabled operations for them.

References
See [113] PCS 7 V9.1 SP2 Advanced Process Library, section 2.3.3 Operator control
permissions.
Manual

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-33 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.10.6 Associated values and direct jump to other faceplates

From a faceplate, it is possible to open other faceplates. Buttons are available for this purpose
(in the standard view and preview). The relationship between the button and faceplate is
established using input parameters "SelFp1" (button in the standard view) and "SelFp2" (button
in the preview). The buttons are visible and activated as soon as these input parameters are
interconnected with any output parameter of the faceplate to be opened. The labeling is done
for input parameter "SelFp1" or "SelFp2" in the CFC.
In the standard view of some faceplates, you can have up to two auxiliary values displayed,
e.g. motor speed. The value that is to be displayed on the OS must be interconnected with input
"UserAna1" or "UserAna2" in the CFC. The signal status of the associated values is used to
control the visibility of the display fields.
Associated values
You specifyand direct jump
the labeling in the to
CFCother
in thefaceplates
object properties (I/Os > Identifier) of the
[Link] units of the associated values have their own input parameters.

Button for direct Label for Associated value

Configuration
jump of associated
direct jumpvalue button
with unitand associated values in the faceplate

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

Specification of source,
label and unit of the associated
value

Definition of the jump target

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-34 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
Direct
11.10.7 control via the
Direct control via block icon
the block icon

Direct setpoint setting Open faceplate (left-

via the block icon click anywhere on
(right-click on the block icon)
corresponding value)

References
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

See [120] PCS 7 V9.1 APL Operator Guide for more details on operator control of APL
faceplates and block icons.
Manual

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-35 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.10.8 Create/update block icons

Block icons are installed in the process pictures with the help of the "Create/Update Block
Icons" function.
You can call this function as:
• A sub-step when compiling the OS
• An independent function from the plant hierarchy
Create/update block icons –
A brief description of the sequence of this function:
sub-steps of this function

Identifying the OS-relevant blocks in the charts

Identifying the right Typicals file as the "library" for the

block icons

Identifying the relevant block icons

Copying these block icons to the process picture

Assignment of specific information for the block icon

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring
@PCS7Typicals: "Library of block icons"
The "Create/Update Block Icons" function creates copies of block icons whose originals are
contained in the following template picture:
"Typicals" @[Link]
file

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-36 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Variants of block icons

There can be multiple variations of block icons for a block type. For example, this supports the
vertical/horizontal installation in a graphic flow diagram on the OS. You can assign the desired
variant of the block icon in the CFC for the block instance using the block properties ("General"
Variants oftab).
block icons

Block properties in the

CFC

"Library" of block icons in

WinCC

The OS compiler (more precisely: the "Create/Update Block Icons" function) finds the right
block icons based on their number.

@PCSTypicals and @PCS7Templates

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

When block icons are created/updated automatically, all block icons in a process picture that
exist in template picture @[Link] but are not derived via the plant hierarchy
are deleted.
For this reason, the same set of ready-made block icons is provided in a @[Link]
file. In this case, the "Type" property is assigned differently in these block icons. From here, you
can copy
@PCSTypicals and the@PCS7Templates
block icons yourself into any picture and connect them to a structure tag (AS block
instance) using the "Connect faceplate to process tag" dynamic wizard.

Note the @ character in the

Type property.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-37 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.11 Exercises and Checkpoints

11.11.1 Exercise: First creation of the OS
First creation of the OS
Task
Create an executable OS based on the AS functions configured up to this point.

Procedure
1. Create an OS-AS connection based on MAC- or TCP/IP-addresses.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

2. Rename the connection to ASxx (xx = your training station number).

3. Download the connection to both stations.
4. Select the OS in the component view and delete all the process pictures contained in it.
5. Copy the 6 included process pictures (background pictures) from the course library (OSLib)
into the corresponding folders of the plant hierarchy (simply use drag-and-drop).
6. Insert a new process picture into the Signal box hierarchy folder and rename it Signalbox.
7. For the 3 process pictures on the 3rd hierarchy level, the "Derive block icons from the plant
hierarchy" option must be selected in the "Properties" dialog.
8. Edit the settings of the plant hierarchy.
– Open the shortcut menu Plant Hierarchy > Settings… of one of the hierarchy folders.
– Select only level 3 as HID.
– Select level 2 as the OS area.
9. Compile the OS.
10. Move the block icons in the third picture level to the correct position of the process picture.
11. In the WinCC Explorer, select the OS project, select the properties, and select the "Allow
activation on ES" option in the "Options" menu.
12. Enable the OS (runtime).
13. Familiarize yourself with the manner of operation.

Result
The OS now reflects the plant and you have familiarized yourself with its creation and operation.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-38 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.11.2 Exercise: M120 and M130

Task
Creating the "M120"
Configure and
the AS and"M130" areas
OS functions for the "M120" and "M130" areas based on a copy of
"M110".

Procedure
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

1. Disable the OS.

2. In the process object view, create 2 copies of the M110 hierarchy folder (including its
content) in the same hierarchy level.
3. Rename the new hierarchy folders with the correct names (in the left window with the tree
structure).
4. Rename the new charts and pictures (in the "General" tab).
5. Adapt the block comments of the HMI blocks (in the "Blocks" tab).
6. Change the I/O addresses (in the "Signals" tab).
7. Compile and load the charts (into the AS).
8. Compile the OS (as scope of the compiling, select Changes only).
9. In Graphics Designer, edit the static texts in the pictures M120 and M130.
10. Save and close the pictures and the Graphics Designer and check the pictures in OS
runtime.

Result
The AS and OS functions of the M120 and M130 areas are now available and fully functional.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-39 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

11.11.3 Exercise: Objects for level indication in tanks

Task
Configuring the level indicators of the tanks
Configure correctly interconnected bar graphs ("Smart Objects > Bar") to visualize the levels in
the tanks.

Procedure
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

1. Open the process pictures "MaterialTanks, Reactors, StorageTanks, M110, M120, M130,
R310 and B410" one after the other.
2. Enable the display of the "Tags" toolbar:
View > Toolbars
3. In the left window pane, open the tree structure of the "ES tags" until folders, charts and
blocks whose values are to be interconnected are displayed. For the bar graph of the
dosing tank "D210", this is the process tag "LIA124".
4. Find a tag with the name "PV_Out#Value" in the right window pane and drag it to the
desired bar graph.
5. Repeat the same procedure for all other bar graphs in the process pictures.

Result
Now the fill level is correctly displayed on the bar graphs.

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-40 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Which properties
11.12 of an operator system should only be configured at a later
Checkpoints
time?
Which properties of an operator system should only be configured at a later time?
A. Managing the process operators in the User Administrator.
B. Settings for the message and process value archive.
C. Settings from the OS project editor regarding layout.
D. For a multiple-station system, we do not need any clients at this
point in time.

Have we forgotten something for the fill level of M130?

Have we forgotten something for the fill level of M130?

A. M130 is identical to M110 and M120, so we have not forgotten
anything.
B. According to the system description, the capacity of this material
tank is less than that of the other two tanks.
C. The vertical bar for the level of this material tank is to be displayed
smaller according to the capacity.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring
D. The limits for PV_AH_Li and PV_WH_Li at the associated MonAnL
are to be adapted later to the changed capacity.

When is a bar graph useful?

When is a bar graph useful?

A. When displaying fill levels.
B. When displaying temperatures, but not trends.
C. Only when the bar graph runs from bottom to top.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring
D. When the bar color changes with the process value.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring

11 Basic functions for operator control & monitoring 11-41 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

12 Implementation of manual and automatic

operation
Learning
12.1 objectives
Learning objectives

• You are familiar with the general concept of automatic operation.

• You can use the different operating modes.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 12 Implementation of manual and automatic operation

12 Implementation of manual and automatic operation 12-1 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

12.2 Setting the operating mode

The operating mode can be set via the faceplate, or via the corresponding I/Os of the block. The
selection is made via the "ModLiOP" switch. The currently set operating mode is indicated at the
"ManAct" and "AutAct" block outputs.

12.2.1 Selection of the operating mode by the operator

If "ModLiOp = 0", the operator can set the operating mode on the faceplate.
Control logic (Open/Close command for a valve)
Selection of the operating mode by the operator
Control logic (Open/Close command for a valve)
VlvL

Logic for manual/

automatic operat-
ing mode selection

OpenAut
S CtrL
OpenMan
1

Output driver
CloseAut
R
CloseMan
PIQ

Feature.Bit4: Output module

0 = Button mode
1 = Switch mode

Simplified representation for

illustration of the logic

12.2.2 Selection of the operating mode by the program

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 12 Implementation of manual and automatic operation
IfLogic for=manual/automatic
"ModLiOp operating
1", the "AutModLi"/"ManModLi" mode
I/Os or switchover
only the "AutModLi" I/O are used to set
the operating mode.

Logic for manual/automatic operating mode switchover

Logic for manual/automatic operating
mode selection

ModLiOp

AutModLi
S
AutModOp
1

ManModLi
R
ManModOp

Feature.Bit4:
0 = Button mode
1 = Switch mode

Simplified representation for

illustration of the logic

When selecting the operating mode through the I/Os on the function block, a distinction is made
between button mode and switch mode. This is defined by the "Feature.Bit4".
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 12 Implementation of manual and automatic operation

12 Implementation of manual and automatic operation 12-2 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

12.3 Opening and closing a valve

The valve is controlled via the "Ctrl" output. This signal is usually connected to the I/O via the
output driver block. Depending on the selected operating mode, this signal is controlled in
different ways.

12.3.1 Opening and closing a valve in manual mode

The "OpenMan" and "CloseMan" I/Os are used to control the valve in "Manual" operating mode.
These I/Os are not visible by default. They are set by the operator via the corresponding keys
Demonstration
on the OS faceplate. with buttons and switches

Button mode Switch mode

YS311 YS312
VlvL OB33 VlvL OB33
Valve - large 4 / 1 Valve - large 5 / 1

T3 OpenAut S4 OpenAut
T4 CloseAut CloseAut

S1 ModLiOp S2 ModLiOp

T1 AutModLi S3 AutModLi
T2 ManModLi ManModLi

T = Button S = Switch

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 12 Implementation of manual and automatic operation

12 Implementation of manual and automatic operation 12-3 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

12.3.2 Opening and closing a valve in automatic mode

In "Automatic" operating mode, the "OpenAut" and "CloseAut" I/Os (button mode) or only
Examples
"OpenAut" (switchfor
mode)operating mode
are used to control selection
the valve. (manual/automatic)
These I/Os are usually connected with a by the p
program logic or addressed via a sequencer.

0 ModLiOp
2 Based on
AutModLi
switch mode
1 ModLiOp
AutModLi
3

ModLiOp
1 AutModLi
4

ModLiOp
AutModLi

5 6 7 8
1
0
1
0
t

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 12 Implementation of manual and automatic operation

12 Implementation of manual and automatic operation 12-4 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

12.4 Exercises and checkpoint

12.4.1 Exercise: Switchover between automatic and manual mode in the
"Material tanks" area

Task
Configure a central manual and automatic switchover for several pumps and drives. The
actuators of the "Material tanks" area should be able to be switched between manual and
automatic mode via a common switch by the operator.

Preparation
Exersice: Configuring a logic to switch between manual and automatic mode of
Make sure that the "Feature.Bit4 = 1" (switch mode) is set for all drives and valves.
all actors

CFC "M-General"

M110 M120 M130

OperatingMode ModLiOp
[OpDi03] [Or04]
Out1 In1 Out
Out2 In2
Out3 In3 YS112 YS122 YS132
In4
ModLiOp ModLiOp ModLiOp
FbkIn1
FbkIn2 AutModLi AutModLi AutModLi
FbkIn3

NS113 NS123 NS133

ModLiOp ModLiOp ModLiOp
AutModLi
AutModLi AutModLi AutModLi
[Or04]
In1 Out
In2
In3
In4

Procedure
1. Create a new "M-General" folder in the Material tank hierarchy folder. Add an "M-General"
© Siemens 2023 | SITRAIN | Die Implementierung von Hand- und Automatikbetrieb
chart and an "M-General" picture to this new folder.
2. Incorporate the "OpDi03" block from the PCS 7 APL into the master data library.
3. Insert the following blocks into the "M-General" chart and rename them:
– "OpDi03" block, rename to "OperatingMode"
– 2x "Or04" blocks, rename to "ModLiOp" and "AutModLi"
4. Interconnect the outputs "Out1" and "Out3" of the "OperatingMode" operator block as
follows:
– "Out1" with an input of the first "Or04" block, which was renamed "ModLiOp". Invert the
input at the "Or04" block.
– "Out3" with an input of the second "Or04" block, which was renamed "AutModLi".
5. The function block has inputs for feedback ("Fbk1In", "Fbk2In" and "Fbk3In"). Connect the
outputs "Out1", "Out2" and "Out3" to the inputs for feedback.
6. Open the I/O table in the properties of the "OpDi03" block. Search for the following I/Os and
enter the corresponding text in the "Text 1" column.
– "SetOp1" = "Operator"
– "SetOp2" = "Manual"
– "SetOp3" = "Automatic"

12 Implementation of manual and automatic operation 12-5 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7. Interconnect the "Out" outputs of the two "Or04" blocks with the corresponding inputs for
operating mode switching on the "VlvL" and "MotL" blocks of "M110", "M120" and "M130".
8. Compile and load the AS program. Compile the OS.

Result
The "M-General" process picture now contains a block icon that you can use to switch the
operating mode for all actuators in the "Material tanks" area.
You can choose from the following switch settings:
• Operator = The operator can select the operating mode separately on each block.
• Manual = All actuators are in manual mode.
• Automatic = All actuators are in automatic mode.

12.4.2 Exercise: Automatic transfer of material

Task
Implement a logic in the program to automatically transfer material from one of the three
material tanks to the "D210" dosing tank of the "R310" reactor.
The three feed valves of the dosing tank are each to control the valves and pumps of the
corresponding material tank, if these are in automatic mode.
In addition, a textual interconnection is to be created to the future valves of the reactors "R320",
"R330" and "R340" which are currently not yet configured.

12 Implementation of manual and automatic operation 12-6 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Exercise: Automatic transfer of material to dosing

Exercise: Automatic transfer of material to dosing

M110 M120 M130

Or04 YS112 Or04 YS122 Or04 YS132

In1 Out OpenAut In1 Out OpenAut In1 Out OpenAut
YS221(R320) In2 YS222(R320) In2 YS223(R320) In2
Opened Opened Opened
YS231(R330) In3 YS232(R330) In3 YS233(R330) In3
YS241(R340) In4 YS242(R340) In4 YS243(R340) In4

NS113 NS123 NS133

StartAut StartAut StartAut

YS211 YS212 YS213

Opened Opened Opened

Dosing R310

© Siemens 2023 | SITRAIN | Die Implementierung von Hand- und Automatikbetrieb

ProcedureOpen the CFCs "YS112", "YS211" and "NS113".
1. Insert an "Or04" block in the "YS112" chart and rename it "OpenAut".
2. Connect the "Out" output of the OR block to the "OpenAut" input of the valve block.
3. Connect the "Opened" output of the "YS112" valve to the "StartAut" input of the "NS113"
motor.
4. Connect the "Opened" output of the "YS211" valve block to the "In01" input of the "YS112"
CFC.
5. At the OR block in the CFC "YS112", add a textual interconnection to the valves "YS221",
"YS231" and "YS241" at the inputs "In02", "In03" and "In04".
Format of textual interconnections to the first feed valves of reactors "R320", "R330" and
"R340":
– YS221\[Link]
– YS231\[Link]
– YS241\[Link]
6. Repeat this configuration for the material tanks "M120" and "M130". Take the process tag
names and connections from the graphic.
7. Compile and download the AS program.

Result
If the actuators in the "Material tanks" area are in "Automatic" mode, the transfer from the
material tanks to the "D210" dosing tank can be started by opening one of the valves "YS211",
"YS212" or "YS213".

12 Implementation of manual and automatic operation 12-7 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Which statements
12.4.3 regarding manual and automatic operation are true?
Checkpoint

Which statements regarding manual and automatic operation are true?

A. The operator can select the operating mode at any time.
B. If the "ModLiOp" and "AutModLi" connections are equal to "1", the
block is in automatic mode.
C. The "Feature.Bit4" (button Mode / switch mode) determines
whether only the module connection "AutModLi" or the connections
"AutModLi" and "ManModLi" are used to set the operating mode.
D. Switching to automatic mode on the image module can only be
performed in local mode.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 12 Implementation of manual and automatic operation

12 Implementation of manual and automatic operation 12-8 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13 Sequential controls with SFC

Learning
13.1 objectives
Learning objectives

• You can control your devices based on the states of other devices.

• You are familiar with the various operating modes and their sequential control.

• You can realize additional sequencers in an SFC with different start conditions.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-1 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.2 Basics of SFC

13.2.1 Creating SFCs

A sequential control system is a controller with a step-by-step sequence that advances from one
state to the next depending on conditions.
The SFC (Sequential Function Chart) is a sequential control system used to control and
selectively execute basic automation functions (typically created with CFC) by operating state
and operating status changes.
Creating SFCs

Creating a new SFC Placement in the run sequence of the CPU

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

You can insert SFCs in the "Charts" folder of the S7 program, or in any folder of the plant
hierarchy. The SFC is automatically inserted in the cyclic interrupt OB that has the "Predecessor
for Insert Position". In the runtime editor, the SFC can be moved like a block or chart.

See [304] PCS 7 V9.0 SP5 SFC for SIMATIC S7 – Programming and Operating Manual

Manual

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-2 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
The SFC editor
13.2.2 The SFC editor

Tools

Step

Information texts
Transition

Sequencers of an SFC

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

A newly created SFC initially consists of exactly one sequencer. You create each sequencer in
its own work window.
For each work window, a tab with the name of the sequencer (e.g. RUN or SEQ1) is created at
the bottom edge. You switch between the individual sequencers with these tabs.
A newly created sequencer (menu command Insert > Sequencer > ...) is inserted in its initial
state, consisting of a start step, transition and end step, at a selected position in the SFC.

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-3 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.2.3 Structure of the sequencers

Structure ofEach newly created SFC already contains a sequence with a start and end step, as well as a
the sequencers
transition in between. You can expand this sequence with the following functions:
Step/transition Simultaneous branch Alternative branch Loop Jump

Step / transition
This inserts a pair consisting of a step and a transition together into the sequencer. The order of
the two elements is determined by the selected installation position.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

Simultaneous branch
If the execution is to be split into two or more sequencers that are to be executed at the same
time, the simultaneous branch is used.
A simultaneous branch consists of at least two sequencers that are processed at the same time.
A simultaneous branch is always preceded by a transition or an alternative branch. The
simultaneous branches end in a simultaneous convergence that is always followed by a
transition or alternative branch.
The successor transition executes only when all actions of the steps at the end of every
associated sequencer have been executed (apart from the "termination" action) and the step
enabling condition is fulfilled (synchronization).
Alternative branch
Behind the selected step for the installation position, there is an alternative of two branches,
each of them has a transition. There is a built-in step behind the alternative branch. Each of
these alternative transitions can be extended again with step/transition elements. In this case,
the branch whose initial transition is fulfilled first is passed through later.
In alternate or simultanious branches, more than two alternative or simultanious branches can
be used at a time.
However, a maximum of 255 steps and 254 transitions can be used in a sequence chain.
Loop
The loop is a special form of an alternative branch, in which the alternative branch branches
upwards to a step that has already been completed, which is thus processed repeatedly.
Jump
The jump is another form of alternate branching that branches out to distant step in the
sequencer.
References
See [304] PCS 7 V9.0 SP5 SFC for SIMATIC S7 –Programming and Operating Manual,
section 12.2 for further details on the topology of sequencers.

Manual

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-4 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.2.4 Processing steps

Sequencers work in close cooperation with CFCs. In steps, block inputs in the CFC are mainly
accessed for writing.

Control
Process devices are controlled using the corresponding technological blocks in the CFC.
Generally, automatic mode and the associated input parameters are used for this.
For example, the "OpenAut" input must be used for control of the "VlvL" block. The "VlvL" block
Processing
in turnsteps
receives its connection to the process via the input and output driver.

Value that is written

Block I/Os
to the I/O

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

The step editor is divided into the following tabs:

• "General", general settings (name, minimum and maximum duration, etc.).
• "Initialization", instructions are processed once (1 cycle) when jumping into the step.
• "Processing", instructions are executed cyclically after the initialization, until the following
transition condition is fulfilled.
• "Termination", instructions are executed once after the following transition condition has
been fulfilled.
You can create up to 50 instructions per step and action. In instructions, you can pass
constants, variables (values of other I/Os) or the result of a formula to the I/O configured on the
left.
You can insert block I/Os as follows:
• Select the block I/O via the selection dialog by double-clicking in an operand field.
Structures of block I/Os cannot be added as a whole, therefore always select the structure
element to be inserted.
• Drag-and-drop a block I/O from the CFC into the step editor.
• Enter the block I/O manually. You can also create a textual reference in this way.

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-5 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.2.5 Processing transitions

In transitions, states at block outputs are queried and compared with a target state.

Monitoring
The monitoring of the process (generally as feedback from a preceding command) is via a block
for measured value monitoring, which is interconnected with the associated input driver. This
technological block provides the scaled process value, which is queried in the transition and
Processing transitions
compared to the achievement of the desired value.

Logical operation
of the conditions

Operator
Block I/O to be Value which is
monitored checked

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

The transitions editor is divided into the following tabs:
• "General", general settings (name, comment).
• "Condition", transition condition that must be fulfilled in order to switch to the next step.
• "OS Comment". Text that is displayed on the OS during process execution. This text can be
customized for a better understanding of the operator.

You can configure up to 16 conditions per transition. The conditions can be linked with the
logical operators "AND, NAND, OR, NOR".
You can insert block I/Os as follows:
• Select the block I/O via the selection dialog by double-clicking in an instruction field.
• Drag-and-drop a block I/O from the CFC into the step editor.
• Enter the block I/O manually. You can also create a textual reference in this way.

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-6 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.2.6
SwitchingInterconnecting
of block I/Os withblock I/Os with
the Browse the Browse dialog
dialog

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

1. Open the properties of the step (or those of a transition) with a double-click. You can set the
name in the "General" tab.
2. Switch to the "Processing" tab and double-click on an empty field.
3. In the selection dialog, find the desired tag and select the "Open Structure" command in the
shortcut menu.
4. Select the process value of the structure and close the dialog.

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-7 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.2.7 Interconnecting block I/Os via drag-and-drop

Interconnecting block I/Os via drag-and-drop

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

1. Open the properties of the transition (or a step) with a double-click. You can set the name in
the "General" tab.
2. Arrange the properties window and the CFC so that both are visible together on the
desktop.
3. Drag-and-drop the desired connection into a free operand field. You do not have to explicitly
select the structure element here. The first element of the structure is used automatically.

Existing SFC interconnections can also be moved by holding down the ALT key. Note,
Note
however, that all SFC access operations to this I/O are moved.

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-8 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.2.8 Calculations in an SFC

Since PCS 7 V8.2, the SFC editor has supported the execution of calculations in steps,
transitions or start conditions of the sequencers. For verification, the calculations with current
values are displayed in test mode.
As a result, both simple and complex operations are performed directly in the SFC and no
longer have to be exported to a CFC.
The "Calculation for SFC" dialog box in the SFC editor is used for the configuring. The dialog
box is opened using the "f(x)" button of an instruction row.

References
The objects for the operators (ADD, SUB, MUL, etc.) are created in the chart folder of the
master data library. The functions are listed in [304] PCS 7 V9.0 SP5 SFC for SIMATIC S7 –
Manual Programming and Operating Manual, section [Link].

Note These objects are used only for the calculations in SFC and are not identical to the library
blocks that are available in the CFC Editor, for example.
For configuring a calculation, the corresponding field in the statement line must be empty.
Otherwise, the "f(x)" button is disabled.

Calculations in an SFC
Example
In the following example, an analog value calculation is performed in a step-enabling condition.

3
1 4
2

1. You open the properties dialog of the transition by double-clicking it.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

2. As described previously, select the block output in the left part of the transition. In this case,
a process value output of a temperature controller.
3. A calculation is needed on the right side of the condition. Click on the formula character for
this.
4. Right-click on "Enter the function" to open the "Insert Function" shortcut menu containing a
selection of available functions.
5. In our example, the "SUB" function for subtraction is selected.

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-9 SITRAIN

Calculations in an SFC
SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

7
8

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

The function has two inputs. Additional inputs can be added for some functions (e.g. Addition,
Multiplication).
6. To interconnect the first input, select this input.
7. Click the "Browse..." button.
8. The valid setpoint of the temperature controller is to be selected as the minuend. Because
the block output is of data type "Structure", another dialog for selection of the structure
element is displayed.
Calculations in an SFC
9. Select the structure element "Value".

Change name
11

10

10. The value 10 is entered as a constant in our example as the subtrahend. The sequencer
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

advances when the actual temperature value of the controller has approached within 10
degrees of the setpoint during the heating operation.
11. As the final step, you can change the name of the calculation.

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-10 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.2.9 Initialization, processing and termination

In the properties of a step, you will find three tabs in which you can specify actions/commands:

Initialization
If you configure actions here, they will only be executed once (i.e. for one cacle): At the
transition from the previous step to this step.

Processing
The actions configured here are executed in each program cycle as long as the conditions in
the transition for the transition to the next step are not yet fulfilled - If actions have been
configured in initialization, the configured actions are executed from the cycle after initialization.

Termination
Initialization, processing
If you configure and
actions here, termination
they will only be executed once: At the transition from this step to
the next step.

Cycle

Transition condition met

Start Trans 2
Step active
Stop Trans 2

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

References
See [304] PCS 7 V9.0 SP5 SFC for SIMATIC S7 –Programming and Operating Manual,
section 16.3.6 for more details.
Manual

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-11 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.2.10 SFC in test mode

In SFC test mode, a toolbar and status bar are displayed to enable monitoring and control. The
various step control modes influence the behavior of the SFC at the transition from the active
step to the successor step:
SFC in test mode

Step control modes

T Transition

T or O Transition or confirmation by operator

T and O Transition and confirmation by operator

O Confirmation by operator

T/T and O Step-specific confirmation by operator

Active operating
state Selection of the step control mode

Active operating
mode
Acknowledgment button
Operator
commands

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-12 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.3 Exercise and checkpoint

13.3.1 Exercise: Preparing automatic mode for the "R310" reactor

Task
Configure a logic so that the operating mode of the actuators of the entire "R310" plant area can
Exercise: be
Preparing
switched manual
over in aand automatic
simple mode
way using for the "R310" reactor
a sequencer.
YS211 YS212 YS213
ModLiOp ModLiOp ModLiOp
AutModLi AutModLi AutModLi

D210

R310-Gen
ModLiOp
YS311
ModLiOp AutModLi
Or04 ModLiOp TICA YC315
In01 Out ModLiOp AutModLi 315
M NS316
AutModLi

AutModLi R310
Or04
In01 Out
ModLiOp
YS312
AutModLi

ModLiOp NS313
AutModLi 2s

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

Procedure
1. Create a "R310-Gen" CFC in the R310 hierarchy folder and place two digital "Or04" logic
blocks in this chart. Rename these blocks "ModLiOp" and "AutModLi". Switch the "In2" to
"In4" I/Os of the blocks "invisible". These are not required.
2. Connect the "Out" outputs of the "ModLiOp" and "AutModLi" OR blocks to the
corresponding inputs of all valves and drives, and of the controller.

The "YC315" control valve is not created in this project. It is controlled directly via the
Note "MV.PV_Out" and "RBK.PV_In" I/Os of the "TICA315" controller.

Result
All actuators in the "R310" area can now be switched to manual or automatic mode via the
"In01" I/Os of the "ModLiOp" and "AutModLi" OR blocks.

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-13 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.3.2 Exercise: Configuring the first sequencer

Task
Exercise: Create an initial
Configuring theshort
firstsequencer
sequencerfor dosing a material.

Block I/Os with access of the sequencer Active sequencer

R310-Gen YS211
OpenAut AutAct
ModLiOp ManAct
Or04 Opened
Closed
In01 Out

LIA
PV_Out
214
AutModLi
Or04
In01 Out

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

Procedure
1. Create a "R310-Seq" SFC in the "R310" hierarchy folder and create a sequencer according
to the following description:

Use the "In1" inputs of the corresponding OR blocks for the interconnection with the SFC to
Note realize the operating mode switchover for the entire reactor area with the commands
"ModLiOp" and "AutModLi".

Table 13-1
Step/transition Description Process tags
No configuration.

No configuration.

Switch the actuators of the R310 reactor ModLiOp (R310-General)

section to the "Automatic" mode. AutModLi (R310-General)

Is the valve in automatic mode? YS211

Open the dosing valve for material 1. YS211

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-14 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Step/transition Description Process tags

Quantity of material 1 >= 50kg in the dosing LIA214
tank?

Close the dosing valve for material 1. YS211

Is the valve closed? YS211

Switch the actuators of the R310 reactor AutModLi (R310-General)

section to the "Manual" mode.

Is the valve in manual mode? YS211

Operator receives the right to operate ModLiOp (R310-General)

2. Compile and load the AS.

3. Set the valves and pumps of the material tank area to automatic mode.
4. Test the new sequencer with manual operation. Check whether the operator has full access
to the mode switchover in the faceplate after the sequencer has been fully executed.

Arrange the SFC window in front of the "R310" process picture of the OS runtime so that you
Note can observe the effects of the sequencer.

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-15 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.3.3 Checkpoint
What must be changed in the sequencer if a valve is to be controlled in button
Whatinstead
mode must beofchanged in the sequencer
switch mode if a valve is to be controlled in button mode instead of
(Feature Bit.4)?
switch mode (Feature Bit.4)?
A. The valve must be opened with "OpenAut" and closed with
"CloseAut".
B. The "Feature.Bit4" parameter of the valve must first be set to "0".
C. To be able to change the operating mode, 2 I/Os are required:
"AutModLi" (automatic mode) and "ManModLi" (manual mode).
D. You must add further steps to the sequencer.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-16 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.4 Expanding sequencers

Configuration with Copy / Paste
Configuration with Copy / Paste

1 2 3 4

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

1. Select the area you want to copy and then the "Copy" (Ctrl + C) command in the shortcut
menu.
2. Execute the shortcut menu command "Paste" (Ctrl + V) on a free area of the SFC.
3. Position the cursor between the transition and the step where you want to paste the copied
sequence. The cursor then shows a hand with a green line instead of a crossed-out circle.
4. The names of the newly inserted steps and transitions are automatically given a number or
incremented by one.

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-17 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.5 Exercise and checkpoint

13.5.1 Exercise: Expand the sequencer

Task
Exercise: Expand
Expandthe
thesequencer
sequencerfor the "R310" reactor for dosing, mixing and heating 3 materials.

YS211 YS212 YS213

Block I/Os with access of the sequencer

R310-Gen YSxxx
OpenAut D210
AutAct LIA
ModLiOp ManAct 214
Or04 Opened
Closed YS311
In01 Out
NSxxx TICA
StartAut YC315
AutAct 315
ManAct M NS316
Run
AutModLi Stop LIA
Or04 314
In01 Out TICA AutAct R310
SP_LiOp
SP_ExtLi xxx ManAct
SP_Ext PV_Out
RbkOut

YS312

LIA PV_Out
xxx NS313
2s

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

Procedure
1. Complete the instructions of the sequencer using the following table.

In the "Automatic" step, the controller must also be switched to external setpoint.
For recurring sequences, you can use the copy and paste function. For example, copy the
Note steps and transitions from "Dosing 1" to "Trans End 1" to the clipboard and paste them once
after the "IsMixing" transition. The steps and transitions are renamed automatically but you
have to adapt the relevant process tags. Repeat the procedure for the 3rd material.

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-18 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Table 13-2
Step/transition Description Process tags
No configuration.

No configuration.

Switch the actuators of the R310 reactor ModLiOp (R310-General)

section to the "Automatic" mode. AutModLi (R310-General)
Switch the temperature controller to external SP_LiOp (TICA315)
setpoint an set this to safety value = 0 SP_ExtLi (TICA315)
SP_Ext = 0 (TICA315)
Are all actuators in automatic mode? YS211, YS212, YS213;
YS311, YS312, NS313,
NS316, TICA315
Open the dosing valve for material 1. YS211

Quantity of material 1 >= 50kg in the dosing LIA214

tank?

Close the dosing valve for material 1. YS211

Is the valve closed? YS211

Open the feed valve of the reactor. YS311

Is the dosing tank empty (fill level <= 2kg)? LIA214

Close the input valve of the reactor. YS311

Is the valve closed? YS311

Start the stirrer motor. NS316

Has the stirrer drive been started? NS316

Open the dosing valve for material 2. YS212

Quantity of material 2 >= 40kg in the dosing LIA214

tank?

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-19 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Step/transition Description Process tags

Close the dosing valve for material 2. YS212

Is the valve closed? YS212

Open the feed valve of the reactor. YS311

Is the dosing tank empty (fill level <= 2kg)? LIA214

Close the input valve of the reactor. YS311

Is the valve closed? YS311

Open the dosing valve for material 3. YS213

Quantity of material 3 >= 30kg in the dosing LIA214

tank?

Close the dosing valve for material 3. YS213

Is the valve closed? YS213

Open the feed valve of the reactor. YS311

Is the dosing tank empty (fill level <= 2kg)? LIA214

Close the input valve of the reactor. YS311

Is the valve closed? YS311

Set the external setpoint of the controller to TICA315

70°C.

Is the temperature >= 68°C? TICA315

Set the external setpoint of the controller to TICA315

0°C.

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-20 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Step/transition Description Process tags

Is the control valve closed? TICA315

Open the reactor drain valve and stop the YS312

stirrer motor. NS316

Is the drain valve open? YS312

Start the drain pump. NS313

Is the reactor empty (fill level <= 2kg)? LIA314

Stop the drain pump. NS313

Is the pump stopped? NS313

Close the drain valve. YS312

Is the drain valve closed? YS312

Switch the actuators of the R310 reactor AutModLi (R310-General)

section to the "Manual" mode. SP_ExtLi (TICA315)
Set the controller to internal setpoint

Are all actuators in manual mode? YS211, YS212, YS213;

YS311, YS312, NS313,
NS316, TICA315
The right to operate is returned to the ModLiOp (R310-General)
operator. SP_LiOp (TICA315)

2. Compile and load the AS.

3. Open the "YS411" valve in manual mode in OS runtime. Set the valves and pumps of the
material tank area to automatic mode.
4. Test the new sequencer with manual operation. Check whether the operator has full access
to the mode switchover in the faceplate after the sequencer has been fully executed.

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-21 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

What happens
13.5.2 in a dosing step if the Hold command is executed?
Checkpoint

What happens in a dosing step if the Hold command is executed?

A. There is a jump out of the sequencer.
B. The sequencer is held in the step that is currently being
executed.
C. As long as the Close command for the dosing valve is not
executed, the valve is open and material flows.
D. The operating state of the SFC changes from "Holding"
to "Held".

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-22 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.6 Operating states

Operating state logic for sequencers
13.6.1 Operating state logic (OSL) for sequencers

Legend
Ready

Operating states
Start

States that are exited by commands.

Cancel Hold
Aborted
Active Held
States that are exited implicitly.
Start Resume/restart

Start

Completed

Cancel

The sequencer OSL is run through independent of the SFC OSL when a sequencer is
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

processed. As a result, the sequencer has a state that must be differentiated from the state of
the SFC. For example, the SFC OSL can be in "Holding" state, whereas the sequencer OSL is
in "Run" state (due to processing of the sequencer for the "Holding" state). The processing of
the sequencer OSL is subordinate to the SFC OSL. This means that a status change in the SFC
OSL generally causes a status change in the sequencer OSL.

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-23 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course
Operating state logic (OSL) for SFC
13.6.2 Operating state logic (OSL) for SFC

Legend

States that are triggered by events

Transition states that are triggered implicitly.

States adopted from operating state logic for

SFC V5.x

Events: Commands/operations/external
signals/internal signals

Event: Error

Events adopted from operating state logic for

SFC V5.x

Implicit transitions triggered by the SFC if the

active sequence has been completely executed
or if no sequence has to be executed.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

The current operating state of the SFC OSL can be changed by the following events:
• Commands (e.g. Start, Resume, Hold) in "MANUAL" operating mode
• External signals (e.g. inputs of the SFC or commands from another SFC in "AUTO"
operating mode)
• Internal signals (e.g. commands of own sequencers, from test mode or from SFC
visualization)
• Implicit status change

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-24 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.6.3 External view

External view
The external view of the SFC represents the SFC in a CFC as a block with its interface.

Operating mode
selection, enabled by
EnAut and EnMan
Provision of the
operating states
Commands in
automatic mode

Enables, external
interlocks and
sequence options in
automatic mode

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

In the external view, you can configure and interconnect the interface of the SFC for "AUTO"
mode so that the status of the SFC can be determined in test mode and control signals can be
derived from it for the SFC. This allows you to influence the processing of the SFC by the user
program. If the SFC is used in "MANUAL" mode, only the I/Os of the external view that are also
processed in "MANUAL" mode are relevant. The I/Os of the SFC can be interconnected with
other block I/Os or accessed with sequencer instructions.

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-25 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.7 Sequencers and start conditions in the SFC

13.7.1 Additional sequencers in an SFC

Up to 8 sequencers can be configured in an SFC. A newly created SFC already contains a

sequencer with the name "RUN". This sequencer has the "Run" start condition and is therefore
Additionalexecuted in thein
sequencers "Run" operating state. In principle, sequencers can be configured for all
an SFC
operating states of the SCL. To ensure that the sequencers are executed to the desired state
(OSL), the corresponding start conditions must be configured.

Ready
Start condition
"Holding"
Start
Start condition (command)
"Starting" Starting Holding
Start Start

End End
Automatic
transition Start condition
Automatic "Held"
transition Hold
Active (command) Resuming Held
Start Start
Start
Start condition Resume
End End
End
"Run" Automatic (command)
transition
Start condition
"Resuming"

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

Configuring the start condition
13.7.2 Configuring the start condition

1. Add another sequencer to the SFC. Select the "Insert Sequencer at End" command in the
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

shortcut menu.
2. Double-click the new sequence. Assign a name in the "General" properties dialog. Switch to
the "Start condition" tab.
3. Insert the corresponding I/O of the sequencer into an empty field. You can do this by drag-
and-drop from the outer view of the SFC, or you can use the tag selection dialog.
4. You can select the value (e.g. Starting) in the right field. The displayed text always stands
for a "1" signal.

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-26 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.8 Exercise and checkpoint

13.8.1 Exercise: Add the "Holding" and "Resuming" sequence

Task
Exercise: When
Add the
the"Holding"
sequencer and "Resuming"
is stopped, sequence
all valves are to be closed and all drives to be stopped. If the
sequencer is resumed, the state that was current when it was stopped is to be restored.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

The custom "ReacComd" function block is used for buffering the device states. The function
Note block can be taken from the course library.

Procedure
1. Open the "R310-General" CFC and insert the "ReacComd" block. Rename the block
"R310_Comd".
2. Set the invisible input "EN" to "0". Editing of the block is not required.
3. Open the "R310-Seq" SFC and add a new sequence with the name "Holding" and
"Resuming" respectively.
4. Configure the "HOLDING" and "RESUMING" start conditions for this sequence.
5. In the "Holding" sequencer, configure the following steps:
– "Save Commands" – The currently applied values at the I/Os "StartAut" (NS313) and
"OpenAut" (YS211, YS212, YS213, YS311, YS312) are written to the inputs of the block
"R310_Comd".
– "Close Stop All" – The values at the "StartAut" and "OpenAut" I/Os are set to "0".
The transition does not have to be configured.
6. In the "Resuming" sequencer, configure the following step:
– "Resume All" – The temporarily stored values at the "R310_Comd" block are written
back to the "StartAut" and "OpenAut" I/Os of the valves and pumps.
The transition does not have to be configured.
7. Compile and load the AS program. Test the function.

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-27 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

13.8.2
What Checkpoint
can additional sequencers be used for in an SFC?

What can additional sequencers be used for in an SFC?

A. For control of an additional plant area
B. In additional sequencers, safety precautions can be taken in the
event of a fault.
C. Guided shutdown can be configured if the operator issues the
commands "Stop" or "Cancel".
D. Each SFC can contain only one sequencer.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 13 Sequential controls with SFC

13 Sequential controls with SFC 13-28 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control

systems
Learning
14.1 objectives
Learning objectives

• You can prepare the ES to visualize sequential control systems.

• You can operate an SFC in runtime.

• You know the possibilities for visualizing an SFC.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems

14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems 14-1 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

14.2 Configuring the visualization

14.2.1 Creating block icons

In order to visualize SFC, the OS must be compiled at least once with the "SFC Visualization"
option. All required tags, messages and block icons of the configured SFC are generated in this
process. Subsequently, icons can be created later with the "Create/update block icons" function.

Selection of the icon variant

Two variants of the SFC icon are available. You can select from APL variants 2 (default) or 3.
These are stored in the process image "@[Link]". Variant 1 can also be
configured and is taken from the "@[Link]" picture. However, this
only contains a group display for alarms and messages.
The variant is selected in the properties of the SFC. To do this, go to the "OS" tab. Here, you
can enter the desired variant.

Compiling the OS
When compiling the OS, the "SFC Visualization" option must be selected. The block icons are
transferred to the corresponding process picture depending on the plant hierarchy.
Creating block icons

2 OS runtime

Var 2 Var 3 Var 1

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems

1. In the shortcut menu of the SFC, you can open the properties and enter an icon variant.
2. When compiling the OS, ensure that the "SFC Visualization" option is selected.
If you subsequently set another icon variant, it is sufficient to call the "Create/update block
icons" function in the plant hierarchy.

Reference
See [304] PCS 7 V9.0 SP5 SFC for SIMATIC S7 – Programming and Operating Manual

Manual

14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems 14-2 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

14.2.2 "Dynamic wizards" for configuring SFC functions

"Dynamic wizards" for configuring SFC functions

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems
You can configure additional SFC functions at any objects in the process picture. The following
wizards are available for this purpose:

Configure SFC browser

This function provides you a selection dialog in runtime with which you can open any existing
SFC in the project.

Configure SFC button

This function provides you access to a specific SFC. You can select whether the faceplate, an
overview diagram or an area of the sequencer is displayed.
To configure these functions, select any object and run the desired wizard. The dialog guides
you through the configuration.

14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems 14-3 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

14.2.3 Controls
Controls for for sequential
sequential control systems
control systems

PCS 7 SFC Control

PCS 7 SFC MultiChart Control

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems

Ready-made, pre-defined controls are available for PCS 7 that you can use to display and
control SFC. The controls are "PCS 7 SFC Control" and "PCS 7 SFC MultiChart Control".

The "PCS 7 SFC Control" enables you to:

– Show the status display of an SFC in a configured area of the process picture.
– Open the associated SFC faceplate.

The "PCS 7 SFC MultiChart Control" enables you to:

– Show an overview of the various sequencers within a process picture.
– Navigate to the window section and the overview window of an SFC.
– Control an SFC using the buttons in the control.

14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems 14-4 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

Configuring
14.2.4 SFC Multichart
Configuring Control
SFC Multichart Control

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems
1. Drag the "OCX Control" object from the Graphics Designer catalog into the process picture.
2. The "Insert a Control" dialog then appears. Select "PCS 7 SFC MultiChart Control" and
confirm your selection.
3. The control then appears in the process picture. Adapt the size and position.
Configuring SFC Multichart Control

5
6

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems

4. Double-click on the control to start the configuration dialog.

5. Press the "Add SFC" button to start another dialog. Select the SFC that is to be inserted in
this control. Repeat the step for further SFCs.
6. Confirm the configuration dialog. The SFC are then displayed in the control.

14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems 14-5 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

14.3 SFC type

SFC-Typ
An SFC is able to directly access operands in the CFC (addresses, block I/Os).
SFCs can be processed independent of one another.

SFC-Typ
SFC CFC

An SFC type is created in a chart folder as a function block (e.g. in a library or directly assigned
to the AS).
Steps and transitions access a dedicated interface of the SFC type. The SFC type only receives
the connections to the desired measure points by initiation in a CFC plan.

Instances
An SFC instance is derived from an SFC type and has identical properties to the SFC type
SFC-Typ
initially. executableSFC-Instanz
AnSFC sequentialplatziert
controlinCFC
einem CFC-Plan
system is produced only after the SFC instance is
interconnected with block parameters of the basic automation in CFC.
© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | Die Implementierung von Hand- und Automatikbetrieb

SFC-Typ SFC-Instanz platziert in einem CFC-Plan

By© default,
Siemens 2022the interface
| SITRAIN of an SFC
| Die Implementierung type
von Hand- corresponds to the external view of an SFC, expanded
und Automatikbetrieb
to include several parameters specific to the SFC type. However, you can configure additional
parameters in order to create an application-specific interface (i.e. features).

BATCH
Correspondingly configured SFC types can represent an "Equipment Phase" in a SIMATIC
BATCH application.

References
See [304] PCS 7 V9.0 SP5 SFC for SIMATIC S7 - Programming and Operating Manual,
section 5.5.2 for more details.
Manual

14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems 14-6 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

14.4 Exercises and checkpoint

14.4.1 SFC visualization

Task
Expand the SFC already completed in the AS program with a visualization on the OS with the
standard symbol. You also create the possibility in the overview screen of the reactors to clearly
SFC visualization
display the previously created SFC together with the SFC of the reactors "R320" to "R340",
which will be generated later.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems
Procedure
1. Select variant 2 as the block icon for the SFC.
2. Compile the OS with the activated option for SFC visualization.
3. Add a PCS 7 SFC MultiChart control in the overview picture of the reactors, "[Link]",
to get an overview of the SFCs of all reactors in the future. (Only one SFC can be inserted
into the control at this time, the other three will be added later).
– Select a "Control" object in the "Standard > Smart Objects" palette of the Graphics
Designer.
– When you click in the process picture, a dialog with a large selection of registered
ActiveX controls opens. It is sorted alphabetically.
– Once you have inserted the PCS 7 SFC MultiChart, double-click to open the properties.
– You use a button to open an SFC browser to select the desired SFC.
4. Test the SFC control in the PCS7 SFC MultiChart Control after activating the runtime mode
of the OS.

Result
Now you have different possibilities to open the operating window of the SFC in runtime. You
can see the status of the SFC in the SFC Multichart Control. The control can be extended later
with additional SFC.

14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems 14-7 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

14.4.2 Optional: Configuring additional SFC buttons

Task
Optional: Configuring additional SFC buttons
Configure an additional control and button functions for visualization of the SFC.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems
Procedure
1. Insert a PCS7 SFC control in the picture of "[Link]". Double-click again to open the
properties and select the desired SFC using the "Assign SFC" button.
2. Create a button with the label text "SFC" in the picture of "[Link]".
3. Use the appropriate Dynamic Wizards to assign the following two mouse click actions:
– Left click: Open the SFC "R310-Seq"
– Right click: Open the SFC browser

Result
You have configured additional options for monitoring and controlling the SFC in runtime.

14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems 14-8 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 System Course

14.4.3
Which Checkpoint
possibilities do you have to operate an SFC if you have not configured
optional functions?
Which possibilities do you have to operate an SFC if you have not configured optional functions?
A. A block icon is available in the process picture, which displays a
faceplate when clicked.
B. An "SFC MultiChart Control" is created by the OS compilation.
C. The SFC browser is available in the button bar by default.
D. If you want to operate the SFC in runtime, you have to configure
corresponding functions in the Graphics Designer.

© Siemens 2022 | SITRAIN | 14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems

14 Monitoring and control of the sequential control systems 14-9 SITRAIN

 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

Attachment A – Documentation
and Online Support
A 1. Documents available after PCS 7
installation
A 1.1. Manuals supplied
Pre-installed manuals
In section 3.1 "General", the PCS 7 readme file "[Link]" has a full list of all PCS 7 electronic manuals that are
available locally after installing PCS 7.
The following PCS 7 documentation is available on the computer after the installation of PCS 7:

• PCS 7 – Documentations Manual (PDF)

• PCS 7 - Operating Instructions - OS Process Control (PDF)

• PCS 7 - Installation Manual - PC Configuration (PDF)

• PCS 7 - Configuration Manual - Engineering System (PDF)

• PCS 7 - Configuration Manual Operator Station (PDF)

Total documentation of PCS 7 on the Internet

The complete PCS 7 documentation is available for you in a number of languages on the following Internet page:
[Link]/pcs7-documentation

A-1 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 1.2. Complete documentation of PCS 7 on the

Internet and updating of documents
Access to the PCS 7 system documentation in Windows
C:\Program Files (x86)\Siemens\Documentation\Manuals\English
C:\Program Files (x86)\Siemens\Documentation\Readmes\English

Start > All Programs > Siemens Automation > SIMATIC > Documentation > English
Start > All Programs > Siemens Automation > SIMATIC > Product Info > English

Implementation of the PCS 7 help system

You also have the option of updating the installed PCS 7 help system and reinstalling the PCS 7 system documentation.

The "PCS 7 Documentation Portal Setup" required for this is available for download from Industry Online Support under
the entry ID 109479444:
Updating the SIMATIC PCS 7 online help system and the system documentation

The PCS 7 help system that can be called up from the SIMATIC Manager is updated at regular intervals as of PCS 7 V8.0
This allows service packs of PCS 7 and the products to be registered in the system documentation and published.
You need to implement the PCS 7 help system manually using Copy&Paste in the PCS 7 installation:
1. Download the zip file of the help system from the Service & Support portal.
2. Extract the help files to a folder.
3. Copy all help files into the installation of PCS 7 in the folder
Siemens > STEP7 > S7BIN.
When you then reopen the PCS 7 help system it is updated.

A-2 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A
Access to the PCS 7 System documentation via the online help
As of PCS 7 V6.0 SP3, you can access the entire PCS 7 system documentation in the format of the online help from the
SIMATIC Manager.

• You open the online help for the "PCS 7 Basic Documentation" with the menu command "Help > Contents...".

A-3 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 1.3. Supplied readme files

Why you need to note the readme files
The individual products are supplied with product-specific information in the form of readme files. When using the
products of PCS 7, the statements in these readme files also apply.
The readme files contain information that is more up-to-date than the information in the manuals. The statements in the
readme files out rank those of all PCS 7 manuals.

[Link]
• Is the most important readme file in PCS 7.

• Contains information that is relevant, even before PCS 7 installation:

- Licensing of the software to be installed
- Hardware requirements and compatibility
- Software requirements relating to the operating system or the system settings and relating to the software to be
installed
- Compatibility with products from third parties (software)
- Necessary steps in installation / upgrading
- Basic information on updating PCS 7 projects
- Notes on using the product
- A summary of the changes compared with the previous version

[Link]
• Contains information and additions to the manuals of the PCS 7 system documentation, and is more up-to-date due to
the editorial deadlines for the electronic manuals.

• Known printing errors in the supplied manuals are corrected here.

[Link]
• "What's new in PCS 7?" contains an extract of all new features and changes in the current PCS 7 version.

• It is a summary of the first section "What's new" from all manuals.

A-4 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 1.4. Template for a system-specific process control

manual for operators
For the operator you can create a process control manual tailored to a concrete PCS 7 system that can be derived from a
source document of the current manual for PCS 7 OS process control.

 process control manual tailored to the concrete PCS 7 plant for the operator on the customer
side

 is located on the PCS 7 storage media in the folder "_Manuals\<language*>"

A-5 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 1.5. Plant and User Documentation Manager for

SIMATIC PCS 7
The PUD Manager in PCS 7 is the modular help system for the collections of manuals and information documents that can
be individually configured according to the user's requirements. The PUD Manager Help Viewer is part of the SIMATIC PCS
7 software package. You can install the PUD Manager if you also select “PUD Manager Help Viewer” component in the PCS
7 framework setup.

1
2

Integration of documents
To integrate or update documents, the user must have administrator rights and the hidden folders must be visible.
Follow the instructions below to integrate/update the documentation:
1. The downloaded package (ZIP file) must be stored in the following directory path:
ProgramData > Siemens > PUDManager > Public > BaseSnippetsRepository > PendingUpdates

NOTE The storage location may differ if you using other PuD versions. You'll find detailed instructions and
information in our download entry.

2. Select the PUD Manager Help Viewer and click on "Open as administrator" in the shortcut menu.
3. Select "Settings" in the menu.
4. In the document overview panel, select all the documents you want to add and click the "Update selection" button.

NOTE You will receive a message as soon as all documents have been integrated. Make sure that you wait
for this message. The integration takes several minutes and depends on the number of documents in
the package.

A-6 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A
5. Restart the PUD Manager Help Viewer.

Cross-document navigation and search

functions

Language-dependent
availability of documentation

Click the following link for further information on PUD Manager Help Viewer and the available documentation packages
for SIMATIC PCS 7:
Plant and User Documentation Manager for SIMATIC PCS neo and SIMATIC PCS 7 - The modular help portal

Advantages of the PUD Manager

• Placement of system documentation regardless of the installed PCS 7 software packages and functions.

• Cross document search functions

A-7 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 2. Additional sources of information

A 2.1. PCS 7 Compendium
On the one hand:
- SIMATIC PCS 7 as a definitively open system ensures a high degree of adaptation to the widest variety of customer
needs.
- The system software provides the configuration engineer with many freedoms in terms of project structure and
the design of the program and visualization.

On the other hand:

- Experience has shown that later modernizations or expansions to a system are much simpler to handle when the
configuration is mainly "PCS 7 compliant" from the very beginning.
- This means that certain basic rules should be adhered to, to be able to use the given system functions optimally in
the future.

The compendium directly reflects the recommended method of configuration, while evaluating numerous practical
experiences. The description does not go into the application itself but relates to handling the project and the parameter
settings of the components it contains.
The compendium is divided into several parts:

• SIMATIC Process Control System PCS 7 Compendium Part A - Configuration Guidelines (V9.1)

• SIMATIC Process Control System PCS 7 Compendium Part B - Process Safety (V9.1)

• SIMATIC PCS 7 Process Control System Compendium Part C - Equipment Phases with SFC Types (V9.1)

• SIMATIC Process Control System PCS 7 Compendium Part D - Operation and Maintenance (V9.1)

• SIMATIC Process Control System PCS 7 Compendium Part E – Hardware Installation (V9.1)

• SIMATIC Process Control System PCS 7 Compendium Part F - Industrial Security (V9.1)

Selecting versions

 Part A: Configuration Guidelines

 Part B: Process Safety
 Part C: Equipment Phases with SFC Types
 Part D: Operation and Maintenance
Checklists for
 Part E: Hardware Setup downloading
 Part F: Industrial Security

You can download the documents as entries in the Product Support of Industry Online Support. Search for
"Compendium".Some parts contain additional checklists that support documented project processing.

A-8 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 2.2. PCS 7 catalogs

The catalogs list all products from the range of Siemens automation products that are released for the process control
system SIMATIC PCS 7. The products contained in these catalogs are also part of the electronic catalog CA 01. You can
obtain the catalogs as printouts and downloads in the Product Support portal.

SIMATIC PCS 7 standard catalog ST PCS 7

The catalog contains the PCS 7 hardware and software products organized according to the PCS 7 product
structure.
The products are introduced by detailed descriptions and specifications.

Add-on catalog ST PCS 7 AO, Add-ons for the SIMATIC PCS 7 Process Control System
For PCS 7, numerous extra add-on products were developed by Siemens or external partners. These software
packages and hardware components released by the system manufacturer allow a cost-effective
implementation of SIMATIC PCS 7 for special automation tasks.

Catalog ST PCS 7, Technological Components

With the SIMATIC PCS 7 technological components from the catalog ST PCS 7 T that can be integrated
seamlessly into the process control system you can expand the functionality of the system components for
special automation tasks.

NOTE You can find ordering data for SIMIT and the virtual controller in the catalog ST PCS 7 T.

A-9 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 2.3. PCS 7 on the Internet / intranet

Link to the PCS 7 Website
The PCS 7 Internet presence provides convenient access to the entire PCS 7 documentation and the latest information on
hardware and software components released for PCS 7.
SIEMENS PCS 7 - the distributed control system with proven performance

Come into the world of SIMATIC PCS 7 with an interactive system overview.

The PCS 7 portal contains links to the following areas:

- Presales information
- Online catalog and ordering system
- Technical information
- Support
- Training
- Contact & Partners (local contacts and solution partners)

A-10 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 3. Industry Online Support Internet portal

The Industry Online Support provides you with technical information and solutions for all Siemens industrial products.
Here you will find:

• Manuals

• FAQs

• Application examples

• Multimedia content

• Forum for exchanging information with the community

• Support Requests to Technical Support

In Industry Online Support convenient functions bring you directly to the required information. Online support - always
the first step - 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
SIEMENS Industry Online Support

Detailed how-to videos demonstrating the benefits and use of the Industry Online Support can be found here:

A-11 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 3.1. Overview

12 10 2

3
4 5 6 7

Always available 9
(top right):
11

1. Registration: You want to use the complete information offer of Online Support and profit from the options for
personalization in mySupport?
Then register for Online Support and log in before you use it. And this is all free of charge. Make the most of your
Industry Online Support!
2. Global search: The input box of the global search is always available at the top right. The global search searches all
entries of Industry Online Support and presents the results clearly on a separate results page.
In all specific filter areas, there is a further input box available to start the search. This search works with the filters,
and searches only entries that match the filter values you have selected.
3. Direct selection of the basic parts of the portal:
Product support, application examples, services, the online support forum and the personal working area mySupport.
4. Search for product information: Product support is the central contact point for all information on the industrial
products of Siemens. Most of the information in product support is stored in the form of entries. Depending on the
type of entry you find different information and data. You can use filters to reduce the displayed list of entries to the
required information.
Many functions and areas of product support are only available to you if you have logged in to Online Support. These
include, for example, saving and loading filter settings or downloading software packages.
5. Overview of our services: You would like to get information about the service offer from Siemens, find contacts or find
concrete instructions on the procedure for the individual services? The Service catalog provides you with the
possibility of getting comprehensive information.
You call up the Service catalog via the "Services" navigation point that you will find on every page.

A-12 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A
6. Forum – communication platform for products from Siemens Industry.
In the Technical Forum, you will meet a strong community that exchanges information about products from Siemens
Industry. The community discusses questions, for example relating to configuration, commissioning and product
details. Naturally, non-registered users can also view the contents and search through them. If you want to use other
functions of the Technical Forum, log in with your user name. Then you can also ask a question and take part in the
discussion.
7. mySupport is your personal working area in Industry Online Support. Here, you can put together information that is
important in performing your daily tasks. mySupport provides you with a series of tools that support you in this.
To make your important information simply and efficiently accessible at all times, structure the contents according to
your ideas. You can create folders and name them freely, for example, according to your projects or products. You can
also use your own tags for indexing and add personal notes – completely according to your needs.
8. The mySupport Cockpit is located on every page in Online Support on the right-hand side of the page. If you are
logged in, here you will find direct links at all times to your favorites or to the last entries you viewed in Online
Support.
The mySupport Cockpit also informs you about new personal messages, status changes of support requests or with
completed jobs of the CAx Download Manager. At the relevant entry, a number in brackets shows how many new or
modified objects there are.
9. Copying a link and printing an entry: You can copy the address of the selected entry to the clipboard or print the
entry.
10. Queries to Technical Support (support request)
You have a technical question and want to receive support finding the right answer?
With the support request form in Online Support, you can put the question to our Technical Support directly without
detours. To do this, describe your question in a few steps and you will immediately receive proposed solutions. If your
question is still not answered after this, a specialist for your topic will make contact with you within the briefest period
of time.
11. Mobile use with an app - make sure you have Siemens support when you are on the move! With our Industry Online
Support app you have access to more than 300,000 documents anywhere and at all times. Regardless of whether you
have a problem implementing a project, require support to eliminate problems, want to expand or replan your system.
12. You will find instructions on working with the app and a guide to the most important innovations in the HelpCenter.

A-13 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 3.2. Product support

You will find the following in product support:

• Information on product details and technical specifications

• Manuals and operating instructions

Documents and all the necessary information for working with or operating a product. A distinction is made between
two variants of manuals: Classic PDF manuals and configurable manuals (to extend your personal library in
mySupport).

• Downloads of updates, upgrades, service packs and support tools.

You can download most of this software free of charge but you do need to be logged in Online Support.

• Answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs)

The term "FAQ" stands for Frequently Asked Questions. This is a collection of questions that are often asked
concerning a specific topic along with the appropriate answers.

• Certificates
Approvals for marketing in other countries, certificates relating to the successful test of nominal data according to a
specific standard or for special use scenarios (documents in PDF format).

• Application examples
Application examples help you solve your automation tasks. To achieve this, you have examples and tools,
background knowledge, functional descriptions, handling instructions, performance data etc. available. It is not the
individual product that is in the foreground but rather the system-wide interaction of the products.

• Characteristics
Pictorial representation of characteristics, for example, the current/time behavior of causes of overcurrent (documents
in PDF format).

• Product news
Product-related current information from marketing and sales e.g. sales and delivery releases for new products.

• Technical specifications
Technical operating figures of the selected product in a clear table form.

A-14 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A
Filter functions (1)
With the filters in product support, you can find all required information about your question quickly, simply and
conveniently or simply only for one product. Use the filters to reduce the large amount of information available to the
content that is of interest to you.
Depending on what you are looking for, the following filters are available:

• Product tree

• (Individual) product

• Entry type

• Date
You can, however, also simply enter one or more terms in the search box. As soon as you have made the settings for a
filter, the entry list provides you with all suitable results. You can add filters or change existing filters at any time to
narrow down your search even further.
To remove individual or all filters, click the "X" beside a set filter or click on the button "Clear all filters".

"Breadcrumb" navigation (2)

Breadcrumb navigation is an important navigation element of Online Support. Here, you can see at a glance where you
are currently located.
Click on a link in the breadcrumb to go to a hierarchically higher page. If you do not click a link but only hover the mouse
pointer over it, a drop-down menu appears, in which you can see all the available areas of this hierarchy. Clicking on an
entry brings you directly to the relevant area.

A-15 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 3.3. SIMATIC PCS 7 "Landing Page" of Product

Support

A so-called PCS 7 quick start (start page, landing page) allows you to find all PCS 7 relevant topics, technical information
and solutions quickly.
SIMATIC PCS 7 Overview
This start page has many advantages:
- PCS 7 films, interactive demonstrations, FAQs, new application examples and much more are listed and ordered at
a glance.
- All available solution examples and unit templates are listed and briefly described in a PDF document.
- Icons simplify the classification of documents, e.g. contains archived projects/code, step-by-step instructions,
performance data, etc.
- The desired PCS 7 version can be selected directly so that all entries are then filtered for this version.

Links to other landing pages from the area of process automation:

- COMOS Overview
- SIMIT Simulation Platform - Overview

A-16 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 3.4. Compatibility tool

You will find the compatibility statements on automation and drive technology in the compatibility tool of Industry Online
Support. It is intended to support you with questions regarding compatibility of different hardware and software
products.
The stored database is constantly updated and expanded. In addition to this you can download the compatibility lists of
the individual product lines as an Excel file centrally in the tool.
SIEMENS - Compatibility Tool

To be able to query the compatibility statements you require, in the first step you need to decide on a "main component"
(WinCC, PCS 7, STEP 7, etc.).

A-17 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A
You can add further components to this "main component" (e.g. operating systems, virus scanners, etc.).

Once you have selected the desired component, you can display the compatibility statement by clicking the "Show
compatibility" button.

A-18 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 4. Working with mySupport

You will find all personal settings and notifications in your MySupport area:

By setting up individual notifications and newsletters for yourself, you will stay up to date regarding
Note your Siemens products. The how-to videos of the Industry Online Support show you how to store
personal messages in MySupport.

A-19 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 4.1. Personal filters and notifications

To distinguish the types of information, mySupport is divided into so-called information categories (e.g. personal
messages, filters, tags). Each category provides specific functions; however, the operating concept is uniform so that you
can work quickly and simply.
All contents in the individual categories of mySupport are only accessible to you personally.
For this reason, you must log in to Online Support before using mySupport. You must register before the first login. To
access your personal information in the most efficient way, you can opt to remain logged in (see registering and login).
Without logging in, only general information on the individual categories is visible.

Favorites
Favorites are your personal bookmarks in Online Support. Similar to the favorites or bookmarks of your browser (e.g.
Internet Explorer), you have access to your preferred entries quickly – and from anywhere.
You can select your favorites in Product Support, Forum and Service area and save them in mySupport, organize them in
your own folder structure, call them up at any time and apply tags to them (keywords). You can access your saved
favorites either via the "Favorites" category in mySupport or via the "Favorites" link in the mySupport Cockpit in the right-
hand navigation area.

Tags
If you have marked an entry as a favorite, you can also apply your own keywords to it ("tag"). From these keywords, a "tag
cloud" is generated automatically in the mySupport Cockpit the individual terms in the tag cloud serve at the same time as
links. The more often you use a term as a tag, the larger it is displayed. If you click on a tag, your favored entries are
filtered - you cannot access your information more quickly.

Saving and managing filter settings

In the mySupport area you can manage the created filters in the "Filter" category. Simply save the filters in the (folder)
structure that is suitable for you. You can add notes for the filters, such as when which filter is relevant. You can also
group all the filters together in one folder as a notification – you then receive a summarized mail for all changes that
relate to the filters in this folder.

A-20 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A
Manage notification

You want to be informed when there is something new relating to your points of interest? Then let Online Support notify
you automatically.
If you are interested in numerous entries, identify these with a filter. If you are interested in only a single entry, mark this
as a favorite. Both in mySupport filters and in favorites, you can set how you want to receive notifications. To do so, select
the "Set options" item in the toolbar According to your configuration, the "Notifications" category lists all active
notifications – this gives you a quick and easy overview.

NOTE The previous newsletter from the "old" Online Support portal has been replaced with the new function
of notifications. The newsletters you subscribe to are automatically continued as new notifications.

A-21 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 4.2. Personal documentation

|A h A|D i d O li S

You want to bundle documents that are particularly important for you?
In mySupport you can create your own personal document library in the "Documentation" category. You can use this
library online in mySupport, or also generate it in different formats for offline use.
Naturally, you can also share your personal library in mySupport with other mySupport users. This allows you to efficiently
create a collection of relevant documents for your topics that you can share with colleagues. Regardless of whether you
are alone in the office or together with colleagues, work at different locations or need to take trips, you have access to
your personal document collection from anywhere.

NOTE This function was previously available in MyDocumentationManager for configurable manuals. Due to
the integration in mySupport it will be even simpler for you to include entries in your library. In
addition to this, the total range of entries is now available to you. You can include all entries of
Industry Online Support in your library, i.e. also FAQs or product notifications.
And if you have already worked with MyDocumentationManager all the libraries you have created
naturally remain available in mySupport – None of your work will be lost.

A-22 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A
Setting up a personal library

1
4 2 3

In your personal library you can create your own folder structure as familiar to you from the folder structure used for file
storage. You can save the entries from Online Support in the folders and therefore set up your own personal collection of
documents. You can structure the library to meet your exact requirements e.g. according to the structure of your plant or
projects.
You can adopt entries directly from the entry list or from the entry display into your personal library.
By adopting an entry into your personal library, you create a copy of the original entry for your own use. This copy is then
available to you until you delete it again. This applies even if the original entry has been revised or deleted in Online
Support.
1. After you have created a library, you can change it again at any time in "mySupport Documentation". With the
"Configure" function in the shortcut menu, in addition to the content area, the structure of your personal library is
shown in a second area. This allows you to make considerable changes very conveniently using drag and drop.
The fully configurable manuals represent a special feature. If you insert a manual of this type in a folder, not only the
entry appears in your folder but the entire chapter structure along with the content is entered in your folder. This
makes it simple to navigate through the manual. And if you only require parts of a manual, you can enter these parts
only in your library. You can modify and restructure an entered chapter structure later to any extent you require.
2. You can be informed automatically of changes to the entries contained in your personal documentation. With the
"Settings" button, you can enable and adapt the automatic update service. You select the language, the interval (day,
week, month, quarter) and the standard according to which warning notices of pending updates will be given (ISO,
ANSI).
3. Using the update function, you can synchronize your personal documentation with the current version of the entries.
In this way, your documentation always remains up-to-date. With the "Update" button you can adopt or discard
pending updates.
4. My exports: When you export, the content of the selected folder and all subfolders is transferred to a file that you
save and edit further. You can carry out this export from each folder of your library - regardless of whether you
yourself created the folder or transferred it from a standard document. (In MyDocumentationManager, this function
was available with "Generate".)

A-23 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 5. Support request

Or you can click directly on following link:

Create New Support Request

Tips for creating a support request:

• Here, select your product and use case as precisely as possible; avoid selecting the item "Other" if possible. In this way
you guarantee optimum support by our experts and suitable proposed solutions.

• Have other users already had a similar problem? Common questions and solutions are made available to you here.
Have a look at it – it will certainly be worth it!

• Describe your problem in as much detail as possible. Pictures or explanatory attachments give our experts the
opportunity to narrow down your problem and to work out solutions. Several attachments up to a size of 10 MB per
file can be uploaded.

• Each time you send, check your personal contact information and the data you have entered. When complete you also
have the option of printing out the summary.

As a logged in user you can track the status of your requests online. To do this, go to "My requests" in the "Requests"
category in mySupport.

A-24 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 5.1. Support anywhere at any time – the Industry

Online Support app
The free Industry Online Support app is available in your operating system's app store:

Examples of what's available in the app:

• A scan function for quickly capturing the product you are searching for
• Access to the global community for knowledge sharing
• A wide variety of entries and products available offline
• A convenient way to send queries to Technical Support (Support Request)

Support Requests
Support Requests to to
Technical Support
Technical Support

Search
Search function function

Scan function
Scan function for for
Siemens products
Siemens products

A-25 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 6. Forum – Communication platform for

products from Siemens Industry
A 6.1. Conferences and forum management

1
2

1. On the left-hand side you will find the so-called Conference tree. Here, you can navigate through the individual
discussion areas.
2. With the Conference overview, you are in the central discussion area of the Technical Forum. The community meets
here to exchange information about technical questions about all the products from Siemens Industry.

A-26 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A
3. In the Forum Management, you will find your personal control center for the Technical Forum. Here, you can manage
your specific profile data and filters.

Conference filters
Add conferences to your personal filter of preferred conferences. With this you can activate a notification that always
informs you when new topics are started in these conferences.
There is a Quicklink in the Technical Forum to an overview page that contains all the topics of your preferred conferences.

Managing a profile
In the profile management, you will find interesting information and functions:

• You obtain an overview of your activities in the Technical Forum.

• You can see your rank and any special rights as well as your progress in the ranking.

• You can store a signature and a personal description for your profile in the Forum.

• You have direct access to the quicklinks to obtain an overview of all topics to which you have contributed.

User filters
In the Technical Forum, you have found a user who contributes particularly interesting entries? Then add this user to the
list of your "preferred users".
With this you can activate a notification that always informs you when the user has created a new entry.
There is a Quicklink in the Technical Forum to an overview page that contains all the topics of your preferred users.

A-27 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A

A 6.2. Interactions in the Forum

Create a new topic

in the conference

Status: Topic from the Rating of

solved conference overview the topic

Create a new
entry for the topic

Respond
to an entry

Feedback for the

individual entry

A-28 SITRAIN
 SIMATIC PCS 7 - Attachment A
Creating a new entry
You want to create or format a new entry? The entry editor provides you with all the necessary functions.
To prepare your entry optically, there are many functions available. By using pictures you increase the understandability
of your entry.

• With "Add attachment" you can upload a file from your hard disk and publish it to the forum.

• You want to check how your entry will actually appear prior to publication? For this, there is an entry preview
available.

• You would like to consider the topic again for which you are creating an entry? Please use the link via the input area
(right mouse button -> open in a new tab or window).

Posting / replying to an entry

You would like to become involved in an existing discussion with your own entry? Click on "Answer" and write your
personal entry post to support other users with their questions.

• Use the link "Answer" to open the entry editor to write an answer without quoting the entry.

• If you want to quote the entry or just a part of it, use the "Quote" link. The content of the quoted entry is then
displayed in the entry editor.

Evaluating an entry / saying thanks

You find an entry particularly readable? Use the available functions and evaluate the entry or give your personal feedback
with a thank you. Evaluations and thanks are the wages of our community members given for the help they provide.
When you evaluate an author or an entry, this is added to the already existing evaluations. The average value of all
evaluations is displayed.
Apart from the feedback to the author of the entry, you draw the attention of other readers to particularly valuable entries
and helpful authors.

A-29 SITRAIN